SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Contents
1. Scales
2. Engineering Curves - I
3. Engineering Curves - II
4. Loci of Points
5. Orthographic Projections - Basics
6. Conversion of Pictorial View into Orthographic Views
7. Projections of Points and Lines
8. Projection of Planes
9. Projection of Solids
EXIT
10. Sections & Development
11. Intersection of Surfaces
12. Isometric Projections
13. Exercises
14. Solutions – Applications of Lines
Scales
1. Basic Information
2. Types and important units
3. Plain Scales (3 Problems)
4. Diagonal Scales - information
5. Diagonal Scales (3 Problems)
6. Comparative Scales (3 Problems)
7. Vernier Scales - information
8. Vernier Scales (2 Problems)
9. Scales of Cords - construction
10. Scales of Cords (2 Problems)
Engineering Curves – I
1. Classification
2. Conic sections - explanation
3. Common Definition
4. Ellipse – ( six methods of construction)
5. Parabola – ( Three methods of construction)
6. Hyperbola – ( Three methods of construction )
7. Methods of drawing Tangents & Normals ( four cases)
Engineering Curves – II
1. Classification
2. Definitions
3. Involutes - (five cases)
4. Cycloid
5. Trochoids – (Superior and Inferior)
6. Epic cycloid and Hypo - cycloid
7. Spiral (Two cases)
8. Helix – on cylinder & on cone
9. Methods of drawing Tangents and Normals (Three cases)
Loci of Points
1. Definitions - Classifications
2. Basic locus cases (six problems)
3. Oscillating links (two problems)
4. Rotating Links (two problems)
Orthographic Projections - Basics
1. Drawing – The fact about
2. Drawings - Types
3. Orthographic (Definitions and Important terms)
4. Planes - Classifications
5. Pattern of planes & views
6. Methods of orthographic projections
7. 1st
angle and 3rd
angle method – two illustrations
Conversion of pictorial views in to orthographic views.
1. Explanation of various terms
2. 1st angle method - illustration
3. 3rd angle method – illustration
4. To recognize colored surfaces and to draw three Views
5. Seven illustrations (no.1 to 7) draw different orthographic views
6. Total nineteen illustrations ( no.8 to 26)
Projection of Points and Lines
1. Projections – Information
2. Notations
3. Quadrant Structure.
5. Projections of a Point – in 1st quadrant.
6. Lines – Objective & Types.
7. Simple Cases of Lines.
8. Lines inclined to one plane.
9. Lines inclined to both planes.
10. Imp. Observations for solution
11. Important Diagram & Tips.
12. Group A problems 1 to 5
13. Traces of Line ( HT & VT )
14. To locate Traces.
15. Group B problems: No. 6 to 8
16. HT-VT additional information.
17. Group B1 problems: No. 9 to 11
18. Group B1 problems: No. 9 to 1
4. Object in different Quadrants – Effect on position of views.
19. Lines in profile plane
20. Group C problems: No.12 & 13
21. Applications of Lines:: Information
22. Group D: Application Problems: 14 to 23
Projections of
Planes:
1. About the topic:
2. Illustration of surface & side inclination.
3. Procedure to solve problem & tips:
4. Problems:1 to 5: Direct inclinations:
5. Problems:6 to 11: Indirect inclinations:
6. Freely suspended cases: Info:
7. Problems: 12 & 13
8. Determination of True Shape: Info:
9. Problems: 14 to 17
Projections of Solids:
1. Classification of Solids:
2. Important parameters:
3. Positions with Hp & Vp: Info:
4. Pattern of Standard Solution.
5. Problem no 1,2,3,4: General cases:
6. Problem no 5 & 6 (cube & tetrahedron)
7. Problem no 7 : Freely suspended:
8. Problem no 8 : Side view case:
9. Problem no 9 : True length case:
10. Problem no 10 & 11 Composite solids:
11. Problem no 12 : Frustum & auxiliary plane:
Section & Development
1. Applications of solids:
2. Sectioning a solid: Information:
3. Sectioning a solid: Illustration Terms:
4. Typical shapes of sections & planes:
5. Development: Information:
6. Development of diff. solids:
7. Development of Frustums:
8. Problems: Standing Prism & Cone: no. 1 & 2
9. Problems: Lying Prism & Cone: no.3 & 4
10. Problem: Composite Solid no. 5
11. Problem: Typical cases no.6 to 9
Intersection of Surfaces:
1. Essential Information:
2. Display of Engineering Applications:
3. Solution Steps to solve Problem:
4. Case 1: Cylinder to Cylinder:
5. Case 2: Prism to Cylinder:
6. Case 3: Cone to Cylinder
7. Case 4: Prism to Prism: Axis Intersecting.
8. Case 5: Triangular Prism to Cylinder
9. Case 6: Prism to Prism: Axis Skew
10. Case 7 Prism to Cone: from top:
11. Case 8: Cylinder to Cone:
Isometric Projections
1. Definitions and explanation
2. Important Terms
3. Types.
4. Isometric of plain shapes-1.
5. Isometric of circle
6. Isometric of a part of circle
7. Isometric of plain shapes-2
8. Isometric of solids & frustums (no.5 to 16)
9. Isometric of sphere & hemi-sphere (no.17 & 18)
10. Isometric of Section of solid.(no.19)
11. Illustrated nineteen Problem (no.20 to 38)
OBJECTIVE OF THIS CD
Sky is the limit for vision.
Vision and memory are close relatives.
Anything in the jurisdiction of vision can be memorized for a long period.
We may not remember what we hear for a long time,
but we can easily remember and even visualize what we have seen years ago.
So vision helps visualization and both help in memorizing an event or situation.
Video effects are far more effective, is now an established fact.
Every effort has been done in this CD, to bring various planes, objects and situations
in-front of observer, so that he/she can further visualize in proper direction
and reach to the correct solution, himself.
Off-course this all will assist & give good results
only when one will practice all these methods and techniques
by drawing on sheets with his/her own hands, other wise not!
So observe each illustration carefully
note proper notes given everywhere
Go through the Tips given & solution steps carefully
Discuss your doubts with your teacher and make practice yourself.
Then success is yours !!
Go ahead confidently! CREATIVE TECHNIQUES wishes you best luck !
FOR FULL SIZE SCALE
R.F.=1 OR ( 1:1 )
MEANS DRAWING
& OBJECT ARE OF
SAME SIZE.
Other RFs are described
as
1:10, 1:100,
1:1000, 1:1,00,000
SCALES
DIMENSIONS OF LARGE OBJECTS MUST BE REDUCED TO ACCOMMODATE
ON STANDARD SIZE DRAWING SHEET.THIS REDUCTION CREATES A SCALE
OF THAT REDUCTION RATIO, WHICH IS GENERALLY A FRACTION..
SUCH A SCALE IS CALLED REDUCING SCALE
AND
THAT RATIO IS CALLED REPRESENTATIVE FACTOR.
SIMILARLY IN CASE OF TINY OBJECTS DIMENSIONS MUST BE INCREASED
FOR ABOVE PURPOSE. HENCE THIS SCALE IS CALLED ENLARGING SCALE.
HERE THE RATIO CALLED REPRESENTATIVE FACTOR IS MORE THAN UNITY.
REPRESENTATIVE FACTOR (R.F.) =
=
=
=
A
USE FOLLOWING FORMULAS FOR THE CALCULATIONS IN THIS TOPIC.
B LENGTH OF SCALE = R.F. MAX. LENGTH TO BE MEASURED.X
DIMENSION OF DRAWING
DIMENSION OF OBJECT
LENGTH OF DRAWING
ACTUAL LENGTH
AREA OF DRAWING
ACTUAL AREA
VOLUME AS PER DRWG.
ACTUAL VOLUME
V
V
3
1. PLAIN SCALES ( FOR DIMENSIONS UP TO SINGLE DECIMAL)
2. DIAGONAL SCALES ( FOR DIMENSIONS UP TO TWO DECIMALS)
3. VERNIER SCALES ( FOR DIMENSIONS UP TO TWO DECIMALS)
4. COMPARATIVE SCALES ( FOR COMPARING TWO DIFFERENT UNITS)
5. SCALE OF CORDS ( FOR MEASURING/CONSTRUCTING ANGLES)
TYPES OF SCALES:
= 10 HECTOMETRES
= 10 DECAMETRES
= 10 METRES
= 10 DECIMETRES
= 10 CENTIMETRES
= 10 MILIMETRES
1 KILOMETRE
1 HECTOMETRE
1 DECAMETRE
1 METRE
1 DECIMETRE
1 CENTIMETRE
BE FRIENDLY WITH THESE UNITS.
0 1 2 3 4 510
PLAIN SCALE:-This type of scale represents two units or a unit and it’s sub-division.
METERS
DECIMETERS
R.F. = 1/100
4 M 6 DM
PLANE SCALE SHOWING METERS AND DECIMETERS.
PLAIN SCALE
PROBLEM NO.1:- Draw a scale 1 cm = 1m to read decimeters, to measure maximum distance of 6 m.
Show on it a distance of 4 m and 6 dm.
CONSTRUCTION:-
a) Calculate R.F.=
R.F.= 1cm/ 1m = 1/100
Length of scale = R.F. X max. distance
= 1/100 X 600 cm
= 6 cms
b) Draw a line 6 cm long and divide it in 6 equal parts. Each part will represent larger division unit.
c) Sub divide the first part which will represent second unit or fraction of first unit.
d) Place ( 0 ) at the end of first unit. Number the units on right side of Zero and subdivisions
on left-hand side of Zero. Take height of scale 5 to 10 mm for getting a look of scale.
e) After construction of scale mention it’s RF and name of scale as shown.
f) Show the distance 4 m 6 dm on it as shown.
DIMENSION OF DRAWING
DIMENSION OF OBJECT
PROBLEM NO.2:- In a map a 36 km distance is shown by a line 45 cms long. Calculate the R.F. and construct
a plain scale to read kilometers and hectometers, for max. 12 km. Show a distance of 8.3 km on it.
CONSTRUCTION:-
a) Calculate R.F.
R.F.= 45 cm/ 36 km = 45/ 36 . 1000 . 100 = 1/ 80,000
Length of scale = R.F. max. distance
= 1/ 80000 12 km
= 15 cm
b) Draw a line 15 cm long and divide it in 12 equal parts. Each part will represent larger division unit.
c) Sub divide the first part which will represent second unit or fraction of first unit.
d) Place ( 0 ) at the end of first unit. Number the units on right side of Zero and subdivisions
on left-hand side of Zero. Take height of scale 5 to 10 mm for getting a look of scale.
e) After construction of scale mention it’s RF and name of scale as shown.
f) Show the distance 8.3 km on it as shown.
KILOMETERS
HECTOMETERS
8KM 3HM
R.F. = 1/80,000
PLANE SCALE SHOWING KILOMETERS AND HECTOMETERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1110 5
PLAIN SCALE
PROBLEM NO.3:- The distance between two stations is 210 km. A passenger train covers this distance
in 7 hours. Construct a plain scale to measure time up to a single minute. RF is 1/200,000 Indicate the distance
traveled by train in 29 minutes.
CONSTRUCTION:-
a) 210 km in 7 hours. Means speed of the train is 30 km per hour ( 60 minutes)
Length of scale = R.F. max. distance per hour
= 1/ 2,00,000 30km
= 15 cm
b) 15 cm length will represent 30 km and 1 hour i.e. 60 minutes.
Draw a line 15 cm long and divide it in 6 equal parts. Each part will represent 5 km and 10 minutes.
c) Sub divide the first part in 10 equal parts,which will represent second unit or fraction of first unit.
Each smaller part will represent distance traveled in one minute.
d) Place ( 0 ) at the end of first unit. Number the units on right side of Zero and subdivisions
on left-hand side of Zero. Take height of scale 5 to 10 mm for getting a proper look of scale.
e) Show km on upper side and time in minutes on lower side of the scale as shown.
After construction of scale mention it’s RF and name of scale as shown.
f) Show the distance traveled in 29 minutes, which is 14.5 km, on it as shown.
PLAIN SCALE
0 10 20 30 40 5010 MINUTESMIN
R.F. = 1/100
PLANE SCALE SHOWING METERS AND DECIMETERS.
KMKM 0 5 10 15 20 255 2.5
DISTANCE TRAVELED IN 29 MINUTES.
14.5 KM
We have seen that the plain scales give only two dimensions,
such as a unit and it’s subunit or it’s fraction.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1’
2’
3’
4’
5’
6’
7’
8’
9’
10’
X
Y
Z
The principle of construction of a diagonal scale is as follows.
Let the XY in figure be a subunit.
From Y draw a perpendicular YZ to a suitable height.
Join XZ. Divide YZ in to 10 equal parts.
Draw parallel lines to XY from all these divisions
and number them as shown.
From geometry we know that similar triangles have
their like sides proportional.
Consider two similar triangles XYZ and 7’ 7Z,
we have 7Z / YZ = 7’7 / XY (each part being one unit)
Means 7’ 7 = 7 / 10. x X Y = 0.7 XY
:.
Similarly
1’ – 1 = 0.1 XY
2’ – 2 = 0.2 XY
Thus, it is very clear that, the sides of small triangles,
which are parallel to divided lines, become progressively
shorter in length by 0.1 XY.
The solved examples ON NEXT PAGES will
make the principles of diagonal scales clear.
The diagonal scales give us three successive dimensions
that is a unit, a subunit and a subdivision of a subunit.
DIAGONAL
SCALE
R.F. = 1 / 40,00,000
DIAGONAL SCALE SHOWING KILOMETERS.
0 100 200 300 400 500100 50
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
KM
KM
KM
569 km
459 km
336 km
222 km
PROBLEM NO. 4 : The distance between Delhi and Agra is 200 km.
In a railway map it is represented by a line 5 cm long. Find it’s R.F.
Draw a diagonal scale to show single km. And maximum 600 km.
Indicate on it following distances. 1) 222 km 2) 336 km 3) 459 km 4) 569 km
SOLUTION STEPS: RF = 5 cm / 200 km = 1 / 40, 00, 000
Length of scale = 1 / 40, 00, 000 X 600 X 105
= 15 cm
Draw a line 15 cm long. It will represent 600 km.Divide it in six equal parts.( each will represent 100 km.)
Divide first division in ten equal parts.Each will represent 10 km.Draw a line upward from left end and
mark 10 parts on it of any distance. Name those parts 0 to 10 as shown.Join 9th
sub-division of horizontal scale
with 10th
division of the vertical divisions. Then draw parallel lines to this line from remaining sub divisions and
complete diagonal scale.
DIAGONAL
SCALE
PROBLEM NO.5: A rectangular plot of land measuring 1.28 hectors is represented on a map by a similar rectangle
of 8 sq. cm. Calculate RF of the scale. Draw a diagonal scale to read single meter. Show a distance of 438 m on it.
Draw a line 15 cm long.
It will represent 600 m.Divide it in six equal parts.
( each will represent 100 m.)
Divide first division in ten equal parts.Each will
represent 10 m.
Draw a line upward from left end and
mark 10 parts on it of any distance.
Name those parts 0 to 10 as shown.Join 9th
sub-division
of horizontal scale with 10th
division of the vertical divisions.
Then draw parallel lines to this line from remaining sub divisions
and complete diagonal scale.
DIAGONAL
SCALE
SOLUTION :
1 hector = 10, 000 sq. meters
1.28 hectors = 1.28 X 10, 000 sq. meters
= 1.28 X 104
X 104
sq. cm
8 sq. cm area on map represents
= 1.28 X 104
X 104
sq. cm on land
1 cm sq. on map represents
= 1.28 X 10 4
X 104
/ 8 sq cm on land
1 cm on map represent
= 1.28 X 10 4
X 104
/ 8 cm
= 4, 000 cm
1 cm on drawing represent 4, 000 cm, Means RF = 1 / 4000
Assuming length of scale 15 cm, it will represent 600 m.
0 100 200 300 400 500100 50
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
M
M
M
438 meters
R.F. = 1 / 4000
DIAGONAL SCALE SHOWING METERS.
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CENTIMETRES
MM
CM
R.F. = 1 / 2.5
DIAGONAL SCALE SHOWING CENTIMETERS.
0 5 10 155 4 3 2 1
PROBLEM NO.6:. Draw a diagonal scale of R.F. 1: 2.5, showing centimeters
and millimeters and long enough to measure up to 20 centimeters.
SOLUTION STEPS:
R.F. = 1 / 2.5
Length of scale = 1 / 2.5 X 20 cm.
= 8 cm.
1.Draw a line 8 cm long and divide it in to 4 equal parts.
(Each part will represent a length of 5 cm.)
2.Divide the first part into 5 equal divisions.
(Each will show 1 cm.)
3.At the left hand end of the line, draw a vertical line and
on it step-off 10 equal divisions of any length.
4.Complete the scale as explained in previous problems.
Show the distance 13.4 cm on it.
13 .4 CM
DIAGONAL
SCALE
COMPARATIVE SCALES:
These are the Scales having same R.F.
but graduated to read different units.
These scales may be Plain scales or Diagonal scales
and may be constructed separately or one above the other.
EXAMPLE NO. 7 :
A distance of 40 miles is represented by a line
8 cm long. Construct a plain scale to read 80 miles.
Also construct a comparative scale to read kilometers
upto 120 km ( 1 m = 1.609 km )
SOLUTION STEPS:
Scale of Miles:
40 miles are represented = 8 cm
80 miles = 16 cm
R.F. = 8 / 40 X 1609 X 1000 X 100
= 1 / 8, 04, 500
CONSTRUCTION:
Take a line 16 cm long and divide it into 8 parts. Each will represent 10 miles.
Subdivide the first part and each sub-division will measure single mile.
Scale of Km:
Length of scale
= 1 / 8,04,500 X 120 X 1000 X 100
= 14. 90 cm
CONSTRUCTION:
On the top line of the scale of miles cut off a distance of 14.90 cm and divide
it into 12 equal parts. Each part will represent 10 km.
Subdivide the first part into 10 equal parts. Each subdivision will show single km.
10 100 20 305 50 60 70 MILES40
10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 KM
5
R.F. = 1 / 804500
COMPARATIVE SCALE SHOWING MILES AND KILOMETERS
COMPARATIVE SCALE:
EXAMPLE NO. 8 :
A motor car is running at a speed of 60 kph.
On a scale of RF = 1 / 4,00,000 show the distance
traveled by car in 47 minutes.
SOLUTION STEPS:
Scale of km.
length of scale = RF X 60 km
= 1 / 4,00,000 X 60 X 105
= 15 cm.
CONSTRUCTION:
Draw a line 15 cm long and divide it in 6 equal parts.
( each part will represent 10 km.)
Subdivide 1st
part in `0 equal subdivisions.
( each will represent 1 km.)
Time Scale:
Same 15 cm line will represent 60 minutes.
Construct the scale similar to distance scale.
It will show minimum 1 minute & max. 60min.
10 100 20 305 50 KM40
10 100 20 305 50 MINUTES40
MIN.
KM
47 MINUTES
47 KM
R.F. = 1 / 4,00,000
COMPARATIVE SCALE SHOWING MINUTES AND KILOMETERS
EXAMPLE NO. 9 :
A car is traveling at a speed of 60 km per hour. A 4 cm long line represents the distance traveled by the car in two hours.
Construct a suitable comparative scale up to 10 hours. The scale should be able to read the distance traveled in one minute.
Show the time required to cover 476 km and also distance in 4 hours and 24 minutes.
COMPARATIVE
SCALE:
SOLUTION:
4 cm line represents distance in two hours , means for 10 hours scale, 20 cm long line is required, as length
of scale.This length of scale will also represent 600 kms. ( as it is a distance traveled in 10 hours)
CONSTRUCTION:
Distance Scale ( km)
Draw a line 20 cm long. Divide it in TEN equal parts.( Each will show 60 km)
Sub-divide 1st
part in SIX subdivisions.( Each will represent 10 km)
At the left hand end of the line, draw a vertical line and on it step-off 10 equal divisions of any length.
And complete the diagonal scale to read minimum ONE km.
Time scale:
Draw a line 20 cm long. Divide it in TEN equal parts.( Each will show 1 hour) Sub-divide 1st
part in SIX subdivisions.( Each will
represent 10 minutes) At the left hand end of the line, draw a vertical line and on it step-off 10 equal divisions of any length.
And complete the diagonal scale to read minimum ONE minute.
10
5
0
kM
kM 060 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540
060 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
HOURS
MIN.
10
5
0
KILOMETERSDISTANCE SCALE TO MEASURE MIN 1 KM
TIME SCALE TO MEASURE MIN 1 MINUTE.
4 hrs 24 min. ( 264 kms )
476 kms ( 7 hrs 56 min.)
Figure to the right shows a part of a plain scale in
which length A-O represents 10 cm. If we divide A-O
into ten equal parts, each will be of 1 cm. Now it would
not be easy to divide each of these parts into ten equal
divisions to get measurements in millimeters.
Now if we take a length BO equal to 10 + 1 = 11 such
equal parts, thus representing 11 cm, and divide it into
ten equal divisions, each of these divisions will
represent 11 / 10 – 1.1 cm.
The difference between one part of AO and one division
of BO will be equal 1.1 – 1.0 = 0.1 cm or 1 mm.
This difference is called Least Count of the scale.
Minimum this distance can be measured by this scale.
The upper scale BO is the vernier.The combination of
plain scale and the vernier is vernier scale.
Vernier Scales:
These scales, like diagonal scales , are used to read to a very small unit with great accuracy.
It consists of two parts – a primary scale and a vernier. The primary scale is a plain scale fully
divided into minor divisions.
As it would be difficult to sub-divide the minor divisions in ordinary way, it is done with the help of the vernier.
The graduations on vernier are derived from those on the primary scale.
9.9 7.7 5.5 3.3 1.1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0A
0B
Example 10:
Draw a vernier scale of RF = 1 / 25 to read centimeters upto
4 meters and on it, show lengths 2.39 m and 0.91 m
.9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1
.99 .77 .55 .33 .11 01.1
0 1 2 31.0
SOLUTION:
Length of scale = RF X max. Distance
= 1 / 25 X 4 X 100
= 16 cm
CONSTRUCTION: ( Main scale)
Draw a line 16 cm long.
Divide it in 4 equal parts.
( each will represent meter )
Sub-divide each part in 10 equal parts.
( each will represent decimeter )
Name those properly.
CONSTRUCTION: ( vernier)
Take 11 parts of Dm length and divide it in 10 equal parts.
Each will show 0.11 m or 1.1 dm or 11 cm and construct a rectangle
Covering these parts of vernier.
TO MEASURE GIVEN LENGTHS:
(1) For 2.39 m : Subtract 0.99 from 2.39 i.e. 2.39 - .99 = 1.4 m
The distance between 0.99 ( left of Zero) and 1.4 (right of Zero) is 2.39 m
(2) For 0.91 m : Subtract 0.11 from 0.91 i.e. 0.91 – 0.11 =0.80 m
The distance between 0.11 and 0.80 (both left side of Zero) is 0.91 m
1.4
2.39 m
0.91 m
METERS
METERS
Vernier Scale
Example 11: A map of size 500cm X 50cm wide represents an area of 6250 sq.Kms.
Construct a vernier scaleto measure kilometers, hectometers and decameters
and long enough to measure upto 7 km. Indicate on it a) 5.33 km b) 59 decameters.
Vernier Scale
SOLUTION:
RF =
=
= 2 / 105
Length of
scale = RF X max. Distance
= 2 / 105
X 7 kms
= 14 cm
AREA OF DRAWING
ACTUAL AREAV
500 X 50 cm sq.
6250 km sq.V
CONSTRUCTION: ( vernier)
Take 11 parts of hectometer part length
and divide it in 10 equal parts.
Each will show 1.1 hm m or 11 dm and
Covering in a rectangle complete scale.
CONSTRUCTION: ( Main scale)
Draw a line 14 cm long.
Divide it in 7 equal parts.
( each will represent km )
Sub-divide each part in 10 equal parts.
( each will represent hectometer )
Name those properly.
KILOMETERSHECTOMETERS
0 1 2 310 4 5 6
90 70 50 30 10
99 77 55 33 11
Decameters
TO MEASURE GIVEN LENGTHS:
a) For 5.33 km :
Subtract 0.33 from 5.33
i.e. 5.33 - 0.33 = 5.00
The distance between 33 dm
( left of Zero) and
5.00 (right of Zero) is 5.33 k m
(b) For 59 dm :
Subtract 0.99 from 0.59
i.e. 0.59 – 0.99 = - 0.4 km
( - ve sign means left of Zero)
The distance between 99 dm and
- .4 km is 59 dm
(both left side of Zero)
5.33 km59 dm
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900
00
0 10 20 4030 7050 60 9080
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900
00
0 10 20 4030 7050 60 9080
OA
OA
B
O1 A1
B1
x
z
y
PROBLEM 12: Construct any triangle and measure it’s angles by using scale of cords.
CONSTRUCTION:
First prepare Scale of Cords for the problem.
Then construct a triangle of given sides. ( You are supposed to measure angles x, y and z)
To measure angle at x:
Take O-A distance in compass from cords scale and mark it on lower side of triangle
as shown from corner x. Name O & A as shown. Then O as center, O-A radius
draw an arc upto upper adjacent side.Name the point B.
Take A-B cord in compass and place on scale of cords from Zero.
It will give value of angle at x
To measure angle at y:
Repeat same process from O1. Draw arc with radius O1A1.
Place Cord A1B1 on scale and get angle at y.
To measure angle at z:
Subtract the SUM of these two angles from 1800
to get angle at z.
SCALE OF CORDS
0
10
20
40
30
70
5060
90
80
0
10
20
40
30
70
50
60
90
80
300550
Angle at z = 180 – ( 55 + 30 ) = 950
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900
00
0 10 20 4030 7050 60 9080
OA
PROBLEM 12: Construct 250
and 1150
angles with a horizontal line , by using scale of cords.
CONSTRUCTION:
First prepare Scale of Cords for the problem.
Then Draw a horizontal line. Mark point O on it.
To construct 250
angle at O.
Take O-A distance in compass from cords scale and mark it on on the line drawn, from O
Name O & A as shown. Then O as center, O-A radius draw an arc upward..
Take cord length of 250
angle from scale of cords in compass and
from A cut the arc at point B.Join B with O. The angle AOB is thus 250
To construct 1150
angle at O.
This scale can measure or construct angles upto 900
only directly.
Hence Subtract 1150
from 1800.
We get 750
angle ,
which can be constructed with this scale.
Extend previous arc of OA radius and taking cord length of 750
in compass cut this arc
at B1 with A as center. Join B1 with O. Now angle AOB1 is 750
and angle COB1 is 1150
.
SCALE OF CORDS
B1
750
1150
0
10
20
40
30
70
50
60
90
80
B
250
0
10
20
40
30
70
5060
90
80
A O
O
C
A
To construct 250
angle at O. To construct 1150
angle at O.
ENGINEERING CURVES
Part- I {Conic Sections}
ELLIPSE
1.Concentric Circle Method
2.Rectangle Method
3.Oblong Method
4.Arcs of Circle Method
5.Rhombus Metho
6.Basic Locus Method
(Directrix – focus)
HYPERBOLA
1.Rectangular Hyperbola
(coordinates given)
2 Rectangular Hyperbola
(P-V diagram - Equation given)
3.Basic Locus Method
(Directrix – focus)
PARABOLA
1.Rectangle Method
2 Method of Tangents
( Triangle Method)
3.Basic Locus Method
(Directrix – focus)
Methods of Drawing
Tangents & Normals
To These Curves.
CONIC SECTIONS
ELLIPSE, PARABOLA AND HYPERBOLA ARE CALLED CONIC SECTIONS
BECAUSE
THESE CURVES APPEAR ON THE SURFACE OF A CONE
WHEN IT IS CUT BY SOME TYPICAL CUTTING PLANES.
Section Plane
Through Generators
Ellipse
Section Plane Parallel
to end generator.
Parabola
Section Plane
Parallel to Axis.
Hyperbola
OBSERVE
ILLUSTRATIONS
GIVEN BELOW..
These are the loci of points moving in a plane such that the ratio of it’s distances
from a fixed point And a fixed line always remains constant.
The Ratio is called ECCENTRICITY. (E)
A) For Ellipse E<1
B) For Parabola E=1
C) For Hyperbola E>1
SECOND DEFINATION OF AN ELLIPSE:-
It is a locus of a point moving in a plane
such that the SUM of it’s distances from TWO fixed points
always remains constant.
{And this sum equals to the length of major axis.}
These TWO fixed points are FOCUS 1 & FOCUS 2
Refer Problem nos. 6. 9 & 12
Refer Problem no.4
Ellipse by Arcs of Circles Method.
COMMON DEFINATION OF ELLIPSE, PARABOLA & HYPERBOLA:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BA
D
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Steps:
1. Draw both axes as perpendicular bisectors
of each other & name their ends as shown.
2. Taking their intersecting point as a center,
draw two concentric circles considering both
as respective diameters.
3. Divide both circles in 12 equal parts &
name as shown.
4. From all points of outer circle draw vertical
lines downwards and upwards respectively.
5.From all points of inner circle draw
horizontal lines to intersect those vertical
lines.
6. Mark all intersecting points properly as
those are the points on ellipse.
7. Join all these points along with the ends of
both axes in smooth possible curve. It is
required ellipse.
Problem 1 :-
Draw ellipse by concentric circle method.
Take major axis 100 mm and minor axis 70 mm long.
ELLIPSE
BY CONCENTRIC CIRCLE METHOD
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
3 2 1A B
C
D
Problem 2
Draw ellipse by Rectangle method.
Take major axis 100 mm and minor axis 70 mm long.
Steps:
1 Draw a rectangle taking major
and minor axes as sides.
2. In this rectangle draw both
axes as perpendicular bisectors
of each other..
3. For construction, select upper
left part of rectangle. Divide
vertical small side and horizontal
long side into same number of
equal parts.( here divided in four
parts)
4. Name those as shown..
5. Now join all vertical points
1,2,3,4, to the upper end of minor
axis. And all horizontal points
i.e.1,2,3,4 to the lower end of
minor axis.
6. Then extend C-1 line upto D-1
and mark that point. Similarly
extend C-2, C-3, C-4 lines up to
D-2, D-3, & D-4 lines.
7. Mark all these points properly
and join all along with ends A
and D in smooth possible curve.
Do similar construction in right
side part.along with lower half of
the rectangle.Join all points in
smooth curve.
It is required ellipse.
ELLIPSE
BY RECTANGLE METHOD
C
D
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 3 2 1A B
1
2
3
4
Problem 3:-
Draw ellipse by Oblong method.
Draw a parallelogram of 100 mm and 70 mm long
sides with included angle of 750.
Inscribe Ellipse in it.
STEPS ARE SIMILAR TO
THE PREVIOUS CASE
(RECTANGLE METHOD)
ONLY IN PLACE OF RECTANGLE,
HERE IS A PARALLELOGRAM.
ELLIPSE
BY OBLONG METHOD
F1 F2
1 2 3 4
A B
C
D
p1
p2
p3
p4
ELLIPSE
BY ARCS OF CIRCLE METHOD
O
PROBLEM 4.
MAJOR AXIS AB & MINOR AXIS CD ARE
100 AMD 70MM LONG RESPECTIVELY
.DRAW ELLIPSE BY ARCS OF CIRLES
METHOD.
STEPS:
1.Draw both axes as usual.Name the
ends & intersecting point
2.Taking AO distance I.e.half major
axis, from C, mark F1 & F2 On AB .
( focus 1 and 2.)
3.On line F1- O taking any distance,
mark points 1,2,3, & 4
4.Taking F1 center, with distance A-1
draw an arc above AB and taking F2
center, with B-1 distance cut this arc.
Name the point p1
5.Repeat this step with same centers but
taking now A-2 & B-2 distances for
drawing arcs. Name the point p2
6.Similarly get all other P points.
With same steps positions of P can be
located below AB.
7.Join all points by smooth curve to get
an ellipse/
As per the definition Ellipse is locus of point P moving in
a plane such that the SUM of it’s distances from two fixed
points (F1 & F2) remains constant and equals to the length
of major axis AB.(Note A .1+ B .1=A . 2 + B. 2 = AB)
1
4
2
3
A B
D C
ELLIPSE
BY RHOMBUS METHOD
PROBLEM 5.
DRAW RHOMBUS OF 100 MM & 70 MM LONG
DIAGONALS AND INSCRIBE AN ELLIPSE IN IT.
STEPS:
1. Draw rhombus of given
dimensions.
2. Mark mid points of all sides &
name Those A,B,C,& D
3. Join these points to the ends of
smaller diagonals.
4. Mark points 1,2,3,4 as four
centers.
5. Taking 1 as center and 1-A
radius draw an arc AB.
6. Take 2 as center draw an arc CD.
7. Similarly taking 3 & 4 as centers
and 3-D radius draw arcs DA & BC.
ELLIPSE
DIRECTRIX-FOCUS METHOD
PROBLEM 6:- POINT F IS 50 MM FROM A LINE AB.A POINT P IS MOVING IN A PLANE
SUCH THAT THE RATIO OF IT’S DISTANCES FROM F AND LINE AB REMAINS CONSTANT
AND EQUALS TO 2/3 DRAW LOCUS OF POINT P. { ECCENTRICITY = 2/3 }
F ( focus)
DIRECTRIX
V
ELLIPSE
(vertex)
A
B
STEPS:
1 .Draw a vertical line AB and point F
50 mm from it.
2 .Divide 50 mm distance in 5 parts.
3 .Name 2nd
part from F as V. It is 20mm
and 30mm from F and AB line resp.
It is first point giving ratio of it’s
distances from F and AB 2/3 i.e 20/30
4 Form more points giving same ratio such
as 30/45, 40/60, 50/75 etc.
5.Taking 45,60 and 75mm distances from
line AB, draw three vertical lines to the
right side of it.
6. Now with 30, 40 and 50mm distances in
compass cut these lines above and below,
with F as center.
7. Join these points through V in smooth
curve.
This is required locus of P.It is an ELLIPSE.
30mm
45mm
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
5 4 3 2 1
PARABOLA
RECTANGLE METHOD
PROBLEM 7: A BALL THROWN IN AIR ATTAINS 100 M HIEGHT
AND COVERS HORIZONTAL DISTANCE 150 M ON GROUND.
Draw the path of the ball (projectile)-
STEPS:
1.Draw rectangle of above size and
divide it in two equal vertical parts
2.Consider left part for construction.
Divide height and length in equal
number of parts and name those
1,2,3,4,5& 6
3.Join vertical 1,2,3,4,5 & 6 to the
top center of rectangle
4.Similarly draw upward vertical
lines from horizontal1,2,3,4,5
And wherever these lines intersect
previously drawn inclined lines in
sequence Mark those points and
further join in smooth possible curve.
5.Repeat the construction on right side
rectangle also.Join all in sequence.
This locus is Parabola.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
C
A B
PARABOLA
METHOD OF TANGENTS
Problem no.8: Draw an isosceles triangle of 100 mm long base and
110 mm long altitude.Inscribe a parabola in it by method of tangents.
Solution Steps:
1. Construct triangle as per the given
dimensions.
2. Divide it’s both sides in to same no.of
equal parts.
3. Name the parts in ascending and
descending manner, as shown.
4. Join 1-1, 2-2,3-3 and so on.
5. Draw the curve as shown i.e.tangent to
all these lines. The above all lines being
tangents to the curve, it is called method
of tangents.
A
B
V
PARABOLA
(VERTEX)
F
( focus)
1 2 3 4
PARABOLA
DIRECTRIX-FOCUS METHOD
SOLUTION STEPS:
1.Locate center of line, perpendicular to
AB from point F. This will be initial
point P and also the vertex.
2.Mark 5 mm distance to its right side,
name those points 1,2,3,4 and from
those
draw lines parallel to AB.
3.Mark 5 mm distance to its left of P and
name it 1.
4.Take O-1 distance as radius and F as
center draw an arc
cutting first parallel line to AB. Name
upper point P1
and lower point P2
.
(FP1=O1)
5.Similarly repeat this process by taking
again 5mm to right and left and locate
P3
P4
.
6.Join all these points in smooth curve.
It will be the locus of P equidistance
from line AB and fixed point F.
PROBLEM 9: Point F is 50 mm from a vertical straight line AB.
Draw locus of point P, moving in a plane such that
it always remains equidistant from point F and line AB.
O
P1
P2
P
O
40 mm
30 mm
1
2
3
12 1 2 3
1
2
HYPERBOLA
THROUGH A POINT
OF KNOWN CO-ORDINATES
Solution Steps:
1)      Extend horizontal
line from P to right side.
2)      Extend vertical line
from P upward.
3)      On horizontal line
from P, mark some points
taking any distance and
name them after P-1,
2,3,4 etc.
4)      Join 1-2-3-4 points
to pole O. Let them cut
part [P-B] also at 1,2,3,4
points.
5)      From horizontal
1,2,3,4 draw vertical
lines downwards and
6)      From vertical 1,2,3,4
points [from P-B] draw
horizontal lines.
7)      Line from 1
horizontal and line from
1 vertical will meet at
P1
.Similarly mark P2
, P3
,
P4
points.
8)      Repeat the procedure
by marking four points
on upward vertical line
from P and joining all
those to pole O. Name
this points P6
, P7
, P8
etc.
and join them by smooth
Problem No.10: Point P is 40 mm and 30 mm from horizontal
and vertical axes respectively.Draw Hyperbola through it.
VOLUME:( M3
)
PRESSURE
(Kg/cm2
)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HYPERBOLA
P-V DIAGRAM
Problem no.11: A sample of gas is expanded in a cylinder
from 10 unit pressure to 1 unit pressure.Expansion follows
law PV=Constant.If initial volume being 1 unit, draw the
curve of expansion. Also Name the curve.
Form a table giving few more values of P & V
P V = C
+
10
5
4
2.5
2
1
1
2
2.5
4
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
++++++
=
=
=
=
=
=
Now draw a Graph of
Pressure against Volume.
It is a PV Diagram and it is Hyperbola.
Take pressure on vertical axis and
Volume on horizontal axis.
F ( focus)V
(vertex)
A
B
30mm
45mm
HYPERBOLA
DIRECTRIX
FOCUS METHOD
PROBLEM 12:- POINT F IS 50 MM FROM A LINE AB.A POINT P IS MOVING IN A PLANE
SUCH THAT THE RATIO OF IT’S DISTANCES FROM F AND LINE AB REMAINS CONSTANT
AND EQUALS TO 2/3 DRAW LOCUS OF POINT P. { ECCENTRICITY = 2/3 }
STEPS:
1 .Draw a vertical line AB and point F
50 mm from it.
2 .Divide 50 mm distance in 5 parts.
3 .Name 2nd
part from F as V. It is 20mm
and 30mm from F and AB line resp.
It is first point giving ratio of it’s
distances from F and AB 2/3 i.e 20/30
4 Form more points giving same ratio such
as 30/45, 40/60, 50/75 etc.
5.Taking 45,60 and 75mm distances from
line AB, draw three vertical lines to the
right side of it.
6. Now with 30, 40 and 50mm distances in
compass cut these lines above and below,
with F as center.
7. Join these points through V in smooth
curve.
This is required locus of P.It is an ELLIPSE.
D
F1 F2
1 2 3 4
A B
C
p1
p2
p3
p4
O
Q TANGENT
NORMAL
TO DRAW TANGENT & NORMAL
TO THE CURVE FROM A GIVEN POINT ( Q )
1. JOIN POINT Q TO F1 & F2
2. BISECT ANGLE F1Q F2 THE ANGLE BISECTOR IS NORMAL
3. A PERPENDICULAR LINE DRAWN TO IT IS TANGENT TO THE CURVE.
ELLIPSE
TANGENT & NORMAL
Problem 13:
ELLIPSE
TANGENT & NORMAL
F ( focus)
DIRECTRIX
V
ELLIPSE
(vertex)
A
B
T
T
N
N
Q
900
TO DRAW TANGENT & NORMAL
TO THE CURVE
FROM A GIVEN POINT ( Q )
1.JOIN POINT Q TO F.
2.CONSTRUCT 900 ANGLE WITH
THIS LINE AT POINT F
3.EXTEND THE LINE TO MEET DIRECTRIX
AT T
4. JOIN THIS POINT TO Q AND EXTEND. THIS IS
TANGENT TO ELLIPSE FROM Q
5.TO THIS TANGENT DRAW PERPENDICULAR
LINE FROM Q. IT IS NORMAL TO CURVE.
Problem 14:
A
B
PARABOLA
VERTEX F
( focus)
V
Q
T
N
N
T
900
TO DRAW TANGENT & NORMAL
TO THE CURVE
FROM A GIVEN POINT ( Q )
1.JOIN POINT Q TO F.
2.CONSTRUCT 900
ANGLE WITH
THIS LINE AT POINT F
3.EXTEND THE LINE TO MEET DIRECTRIX
AT T
4. JOIN THIS POINT TO Q AND EXTEND. THIS IS
TANGENT TO THE CURVE FROM Q
5.TO THIS TANGENT DRAW PERPENDICULAR
LINE FROM Q. IT IS NORMAL TO CURVE.
PARABOLA
TANGENT & NORMALProblem 15:
F ( focus)V
(vertex)
A
B
HYPERBOLA
TANGENT & NORMAL
QN
N
T
T
900
TO DRAW TANGENT & NORMAL
TO THE CURVE
FROM A GIVEN POINT ( Q )
1.JOIN POINT Q TO F.
2.CONSTRUCT 900
ANGLE WITH THIS LINE AT
POINT F
3.EXTEND THE LINE TO MEET DIRECTRIX AT T
4. JOIN THIS POINT TO Q AND EXTEND. THIS IS
TANGENT TO CURVE FROM Q
5.TO THIS TANGENT DRAW PERPENDICULAR
LINE FROM Q. IT IS NORMAL TO CURVE.
Problem 16
INVOLUTE CYCLOID SPIRAL HELIX
ENGINEERING CURVES
Part-II
(Point undergoing two types of displacements)
1. Involute of a circle
a)String Length = D
b)String Length > D
c)String Length < D
2. Pole having Composite
shape.
3. Rod Rolling over
a Semicircular Pole.
1. General Cycloid
2. Trochoid
( superior)
3. Trochoid
( Inferior)
4. Epi-Cycloid
5. Hypo-Cycloid
1. Spiral of
One Convolution.
2. Spiral of
Two Convolutions.
1. On Cylinder
2. On a Cone
Methods of Drawing
Tangents & Normals
To These Curves.
AND
CYCLOID:
IT IS A LOCUS OF A POINT ON THE
PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE WHICH
ROLLS ON A STRAIGHT LINE PATH.
INVOLUTE:
IT IS A LOCUS OF A FREE END OF A STRING
WHEN IT IS WOUND ROUND A CIRCULAR POLE
SPIRAL:
IT IS A CURVE GENERATED BY A POINT
WHICH REVOLVES AROUND A FIXED POINT
AND AT THE SAME MOVES TOWARDS IT.
HELIX:
IT IS A CURVE GENERATED BY A POINT WHICH
MOVES AROUND THE SURFACE OF A RIGHT CIRCULAR
CYLINDER / CONE AND AT THE SAME TIME ADVANCES IN AXIAL DIRECTION
AT A SPEED BEARING A CONSTANT RATIO TO THE SPPED OF ROTATION.
( for problems refer topic Development of surfaces)
DEFINITIONS
SUPERIORTROCHOID:
IF THE POINT IN THE DEFINATION
OF CYCLOID IS OUTSIDE THE CIRCLE
INFERIOR TROCHOID.:
IF IT IS INSIDE THE CIRCLE
EPI-CYCLOID
IF THE CIRCLE IS ROLLING ON
ANOTHER CIRCLE FROM OUTSIDE
HYPO-CYCLOID.
IF THE CIRCLE IS ROLLING FROM
INSIDE THE OTHER CIRCLE,
INVOLUTE OF A CIRCLEProblem no 17: Draw Involute of a circle.
String length is equal to the circumference of circle.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P
P8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P3
3
to
p
P4
4 to p
P5
5top
P7
7
to
p
P6
6top
P2
2top
P1
1top

D
A
Solution Steps:
1) Point or end P of string AP is
exactly D distance away from A.
Means if this string is wound round
the circle, it will completely cover
given circle. B will meet A after
winding.
2) Divide D (AP) distance into 8
number of equal parts.
3)  Divide circle also into 8 number
of equal parts.
4)  Name after A, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. up
to 8 on D line AP as well as on
circle (in anticlockwise direction).
5)  To radius C-1, C-2, C-3 up to C-8
draw tangents (from 1,2,3,4,etc to
circle).
6)  Take distance 1 to P in compass
and mark it on tangent from point 1
on circle (means one division less
than distance AP).
7)  Name this point P1
8)  Take 2-B distance in compass
and mark it on the tangent from
point 2. Name it point P2.
9)  Similarly take 3 to P, 4 to P, 5 to
P up to 7 to P distance in compass
and mark on respective tangents
and locate P3, P4, P5 up to P8 (i.e.
A) points and join them in smooth
curve it is an INVOLUTE of a given
circle.
INVOLUTE OF A CIRCLE
String length MORE than D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P3
3
to
p
P4
4 to p
P5
5top
P7
7
to
p
P6
6top
P2
2top
P1
1to
p
165 mm
(more than D)
D
p8
Solution Steps:
In this case string length is more
than  D.
But remember!
Whatever may be the length of
string, mark  D distance
horizontal i.e.along the string
and divide it in 8 number of
equal parts, and not any other
distance. Rest all steps are same
as previous INVOLUTE. Draw
the curve completely.
Problem 18: Draw Involute of a circle.
String length is MORE than the circumference of circle.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P3
3
to
p
P4
4 to p
P5
5top
P7
7
to
p
P6
6top
P2
2top
P1
1top
150 mm
(Less than D)
D
INVOLUTE OF A CIRCLE
String length LESS than D
Problem 19: Draw Involute of a circle.
String length is LESS than the circumference of circle.
Solution Steps:
In this case string length is Less
than  D.
But remember!
Whatever may be the length of
string, mark  D distance
horizontal i.e.along the string
and divide it in 8 number of
equal parts, and not any other
distance. Rest all steps are same
as previous INVOLUTE. Draw
the curve completely.
1
2
34
5
6
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
P
D/2
P1
1toP
P2
2
to
P
P3
3 to P
P4
4toP
P
AtoPP5
5toP
P6
6toP
INVOLUTE
OF
COMPOSIT SHAPED POLE
PROBLEM 20 : A POLE IS OF A SHAPE OF HALF HEXABON AND SEMICIRCLE.
ASTRING IS TO BE WOUND HAVING LENGTH EQUAL TO THE POLE PERIMETER
DRAW PATH OF FREE END P OF STRING WHEN WOUND COMPLETELY.
(Take hex 30 mm sides and semicircle of 60 mm diameter.)
SOLUTION STEPS:
Draw pole shape as per
dimensions.
Divide semicircle in 4
parts and name those
along with corners of
hexagon.
Calculate perimeter
length.
Show it as string AP.
On this line mark 30mm
from A
Mark and name it 1
Mark D/2 distance on it
from 1
And dividing it in 4 parts
name 2,3,4,5.
Mark point 6 on line 30
mm from 5
Now draw tangents from
all points of pole
and proper lengths as
done in all previous
involute’s problems and
complete the curve.
1
2
3
4
D
1
2
3
4
A
B
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
PROBLEM 21 : Rod AB 85 mm long rolls
over a semicircular pole without slipping
from it’s initially vertical position till it
becomes up-side-down vertical.
Draw locus of both ends A & B.
Solution Steps?
If you have studied previous problems
properly, you can surely solve this also.
Simply remember that this being a rod,
it will roll over the surface of pole.
Means when one end is approaching,
other end will move away from poll.
OBSERVE ILLUSTRATION CAREFULLY!
P
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
p1
p2
p3
p4
p5
p6
p7
p8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C
D
CYCLOIDPROBLEM 22: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT ON THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE
WHICH ROLLS ON STRAIGHT LINE PATH. Take Circle diameter as 50 mm
Solution Steps:
1)      From center C draw a horizontal line equal to D distance.
2)      Divide D distance into 8 number of equal parts and name them C1, C2, C3__ etc.
3)      Divide the circle also into 8 number of equal parts and in clock wise direction, after P name 1, 2, 3 up to 8.
4)      From all these points on circle draw horizontal lines. (parallel to locus of C)
5)      With a fixed distance C-P in compass, C1 as center, mark a point on horizontal line from 1. Name it P.
6)      Repeat this procedure from C2, C3, C4 upto C8 as centers. Mark points P2, P3, P4, P5 up to P8 on the
horizontal lines drawn from 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 respectively.
7)      Join all these points by curve. It is Cycloid.
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
p1
p2
p3
p4
p5
p6
p7
p8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C
D
SUPERIOR TROCHOID
P
PROBLEM 23: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT , 5 MM AWAY FROM THE PERIPHERY OF A
CIRCLE WHICH ROLLS ON STRAIGHT LINE PATH. Take Circle diameter as 50 mm
Solution Steps:
1)      Draw circle of given diameter and draw a horizontal line from it’s center C of length  D and divide it
in 8 number of equal parts and name them C1, C2, C3, up to C8.
2)      Draw circle by CP radius, as in this case CP is larger than radius of circle.
3)      Now repeat steps as per the previous problem of cycloid, by dividing this new circle into 8 number of
equal parts and drawing lines from all these points parallel to locus of C and taking CP radius wit
different positions of C as centers, cut these lines and get different positions of P and join
4)      This curve is called Superior Trochoid.
P
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
p1
p2
p3
p4
p5
p6
p7
p8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C
D
INFERIOR TROCHOID
PROBLEM 24: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT , 5 MM INSIDE THE PERIPHERY OF A
CIRCLE WHICH ROLLS ON STRAIGHT LINE PATH. Take Circle diameter as 50 mm
Solution Steps:
1)      Draw circle of given diameter and draw a horizontal line from it’s center C of length  D and divide it
in 8 number of equal parts and name them C1, C2, C3, up to C8.
2)      Draw circle by CP radius, as in this case CP is SHORTER than radius of circle.
3)      Now repeat steps as per the previous problem of cycloid, by dividing this new circle into 8 number
of equal parts and drawing lines from all these points parallel to locus of C and taking CP radius
with different positions of C as centers, cut these lines and get different positions of P and join
those in curvature.
4)      This curve is called Inferior Trochoid.
C
C1
C2
C3 C4
C
5
C
8
C6
C7
EPI CYCLOID :
P
O
R
r = CP
+
r
R
3600
=
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
Generating/
Rolling Circle
Directing Circle
PROBLEM 25: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT ON THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE
WHICH ROLLS ON A CURVED PATH. Take diameter of rolling Circle 50 mm
And radius of directing circle i.e. curved path, 75 mm.
Solution Steps:
1)  When smaller circle will roll on
larger circle for one revolution it will
cover  D distance on arc and it will be
decided by included arc angle .
2)  Calculate  by formula  = (r/R) x
3600.
3)  Construct angle  with radius OC
and draw an arc by taking O as center
OC as radius and form sector of angle
.
4)  Divide this sector into 8 number of
equal angular parts. And from C
onward name them C1, C2, C3 up to
C8.
5)  Divide smaller circle (Generating
circle) also in 8 number of equal parts.
And next to P in clockwise direction
name those 1, 2, 3, up to 8.
6)  With O as center, O-1 as radius
draw an arc in the sector. Take O-2, O-
3, O-4, O-5 up to O-8 distances with
center O, draw all concentric arcs in
sector. Take fixed distance C-P in
compass, C1 center, cut arc of 1 at P1.
Repeat procedure and locate P2, P3,
P4, P5 unto P8 (as in cycloid) and join
them by smooth curve. This is EPI –
CYCLOID.
HYPO CYCLOID
C
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6 P7
P8
P
1
2
3
6
5
7
4
C1
C2 C3
C4
C
5
C
6
C
7
C8
O
OC = R ( Radius of Directing Circle)
CP = r (Radius of Generating Circle)
+
r
R
3600
=
PROBLEM 26: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT ON THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE
WHICH ROLLS FROM THE INSIDE OF A CURVED PATH. Take diameter of
rolling circle 50 mm and radius of directing circle (curved path) 75 mm.
Solution Steps:
1)  Smaller circle is rolling
here, inside the larger
circle. It has to rotate
anticlockwise to move
ahead.
2)  Same steps should be
taken as in case of EPI –
CYCLOID. Only change is
in numbering direction of 8
number of equal parts on
the smaller circle.
3)  From next to P in
anticlockwise direction,
name 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8.
4)  Further all steps are
that of epi – cycloid. This
is called
HYPO – CYCLOID.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P2
P6
P1
P3
P5
P7
P4 O
SPIRALProblem 27: Draw a spiral of one convolution. Take distance PO 40 mm.
Solution Steps
1. With PO radius draw a circle
and divide it in EIGHT parts.
Name those 1,2,3,4, etc. up to 8
2 .Similarly divided line PO also in
EIGHT parts and name those
1,2,3,-- as shown.
3. Take o-1 distance from op line
and draw an arc up to O1 radius
vector. Name the point P1
4. Similarly mark points P2, P3, P4
up to P8
And join those in a smooth curve.
It is a SPIRAL of one convolution.
IMPORTANT APPROACH FOR CONSTRUCTION!
FIND TOTAL ANGULAR AND TOTAL LINEAR DISPLACEMENT
AND DIVIDE BOTH IN TO SAME NUMBER OF EQUAL PARTS.
16 13 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P
1,9
2,10
3,11
4,12
5,13
6,14
7,15
8,16
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13 P14
P15
SPIRAL
of
two convolutions
Problem 28
Point P is 80 mm from point O. It starts moving towards O and reaches it in two
revolutions around.it Draw locus of point P (To draw a Spiral of TWO convolutions).
IMPORTANT APPROACH FOR CONSTRUCTION!
FIND TOTAL ANGULAR AND TOTAL LINEAR DISPLACEMENT
AND DIVIDE BOTH IN TO SAME NUMBER OF EQUAL PARTS.
SOLUTION STEPS:
Total angular displacement here
is two revolutions And
Total Linear displacement here
is distance PO.
Just divide both in same parts i.e.
Circle in EIGHT parts.
( means total angular displacement
in SIXTEEN parts)
Divide PO also in SIXTEEN parts.
Rest steps are similar to the previous
problem.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P
P1
P
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HELIX
(UPON A CYLINDER)
PROBLEM: Draw a helix of one convolution, upon a cylinder.
Given 80 mm pitch and 50 mm diameter of a cylinder.
(The axial advance during one complete revolution is called
The pitch of the helix)
SOLUTION:
Draw projections of a cylinder.
Divide circle and axis in to same no. of equal parts. ( 8 )
Name those as shown.
Mark initial position of point ‘P’
Mark various positions of P as shown in animation.
Join all points by smooth possible curve.
Make upper half dotted, as it is going behind the solid
and hence will not be seen from front side.
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5P6
P7
P8
X Y
HELIX
(UPON A CONE)PROBLEM: Draw a helix of one convolution, upon a cone,
diameter of base 70 mm, axis 90 mm and 90 mm pitch.
(The axial advance during one complete revolution is called
The pitch of the helix)
SOLUTION:
Draw projections of a cone
Divide circle and axis in to same no. of equal parts. ( 8 )
Name those as shown.
Mark initial position of point ‘P’
Mark various positions of P as shown in animation.
Join all points by smooth possible curve.
Make upper half dotted, as it is going behind the solid
and hence will not be seen from front side.
Tangent
Normal
Q
Involute
Method of Drawing
Tangent & Normal
STEPS:
DRAW INVOLUTE AS USUAL.
MARK POINT Q ON IT AS DIRECTED.
JOIN Q TO THE CENTER OF CIRCLE C.
CONSIDERING CQ DIAMETER, DRAW
A SEMICIRCLE AS SHOWN.
MARK POINT OF INTERSECTION OF
THIS SEMICIRCLE AND POLE CIRCLE
AND JOIN IT TO Q.
THIS WILL BE NORMAL TO INVOLUTE.
DRAW A LINE AT RIGHT ANGLE TO
THIS LINE FROM Q.
IT WILL BE TANGENT TO INVOLUTE.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P
P8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INVOLUTE OF A CIRCLE

D
C
Q
N Normal
Tangent
CYCLOID
Method of Drawing
Tangent & Normal
STEPS:
DRAW CYCLOID AS USUAL.
MARK POINT Q ON IT AS DIRECTED.
WITH CP DISTANCE, FROM Q. CUT THE
POINT ON LOCUS OF C AND JOIN IT TO Q.
FROM THIS POINT DROP A PERPENDICULAR
ON GROUND LINE AND NAME IT N
JOIN N WITH Q.THIS WILL BE NORMAL TO
CYCLOID.
DRAW A LINE AT RIGHT ANGLE TO
THIS LINE FROM Q.
IT WILL BE TANGENT TO CYCLOID.
P
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
D
CYCLOID
C
CP
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P2
P6
P1
P3
P5
P7
P4 O
SPIRAL (ONE CONVOLUSION.)
Normal
Tangent
Q
Spiral.
Method of Drawing
Tangent & Normal
Constant of the Curve =
Difference in length of any radius vectors
Angle between the corresponding
radius vector in radian.
OP – OP2
/2
OP – OP2
1.57
= 3.185 m.m.
==
STEPS:
*DRAW SPIRAL AS USUAL.
DRAW A SMALL CIRCLE OF RADIUS EQUAL TO THE
CONSTANT OF CURVE CALCULATED ABOVE.
* LOCATE POINT Q AS DISCRIBED IN PROBLEM AND
THROUGH IT DRAW A TANGENTTO THIS SMALLER
CIRCLE.THIS IS A NORMAL TO THE SPIRAL.
*DRAW A LINE AT RIGHT ANGLE
*TO THIS LINE FROM Q.
IT WILL BE TANGENT TO CYCLOID.
LOCUS
It is a path traced out by a point moving in a plane,
in a particular manner, for one cycle of operation.
The cases are classified in THREE categories for easy understanding.
A} Basic Locus Cases.
B} Oscillating Link……
C} Rotating Link………
Basic Locus Cases:
Here some geometrical objects like point, line, circle will be described with there relative
Positions. Then one point will be allowed to move in a plane maintaining specific relation
with above objects. And studying situation carefully you will be asked to draw it’s locus.
Oscillating & Rotating Link:
Here a link oscillating from one end or rotating around it’s center will be described.
Then a point will be allowed to slide along the link in specific manner. And now studying
the situation carefully you will be asked to draw it’s locus.
STUDY TEN CASES GIVEN ON NEXT PAGES
A
B
p
4 3 2 1
F1 2 3 4
SOLUTION STEPS:
1.Locate center of line, perpendicular to
AB from point F. This will be initial
point P.
2.Mark 5 mm distance to its right side,
name those points 1,2,3,4 and from those
draw lines parallel to AB.
3.Mark 5 mm distance to its left of P and
name it 1.
4.Take F-1 distance as radius and F as
center draw an arc
cutting first parallel line to AB. Name
upper point P1
and lower point P2
.
5.Similarly repeat this process by taking
again 5mm to right and left and locate
P3
P4
.
6.Join all these points in smooth curve.
It will be the locus of P equidistance
from line AB and fixed point F.
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
PROBLEM 1.: Point F is 50 mm from a vertical straight line AB.
Draw locus of point P, moving in a plane such that
it always remains equidistant from point F and line AB.
Basic Locus Cases:
A
B
p
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
C
SOLUTION STEPS:
1.Locate center of line, perpendicular to
AB from the periphery of circle. This
will be initial point P.
2.Mark 5 mm distance to its right side,
name those points 1,2,3,4 and from those
draw lines parallel to AB.
3.Mark 5 mm distance to its left of P and
name it 1,2,3,4.
4.Take C-1 distance as radius and C as
center draw an arc cutting first parallel
line to AB. Name upper point P1
and
lower point P2
.
5.Similarly repeat this process by taking
again 5mm to right and left and locate
P3
P4
.
6.Join all these points in smooth curve.
It will be the locus of P equidistance
from line AB and given circle.
50 D
75 mm
PROBLEM 2 :
A circle of 50 mm diameter has it’s center 75 mm from a vertical
line AB.. Draw locus of point P, moving in a plane such that
it always remains equidistant from given circle and line AB.
Basic Locus Cases:
95 mm
30 D
60 D
p
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
C2C1
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
PROBLEM 3 :
Center of a circle of 30 mm diameter is 90 mm away from center of another circle of 60 mm diameter.
Draw locus of point P, moving in a plane such that it always remains equidistant from given two circles.
SOLUTION STEPS:
1.Locate center of line,joining two
centers but part in between periphery
of two circles.Name it P. This will be
initial point P.
2.Mark 5 mm distance to its right
side, name those points 1,2,3,4 and
from those draw arcs from C1
As center.
3. Mark 5 mm distance to its right
side, name those points 1,2,3,4 and
from those draw arcs from C2 As
center.
4.Mark various positions of P as per
previous problems and name those
similarly.
5.Join all these points in smooth
curve.
It will be the locus of P
equidistance from given two
circles.
Basic Locus Cases:
2CC1
30 D
60 D
350
C1
Solution Steps:
1) Here consider two pairs,
one is a case of two circles
with centres C1
and C2
and
draw locus of point P
equidistance from them.
(As per solution of case D
above).
2) Consider second case
that of fixed circle (C1
) and
fixed line AB and draw
locus of point P
equidistance from them.
(as per solution of case B
above).
3) Locate the point where
these two loci intersect
each other. Name it x. It
will be the point
equidistance from given
two circles and line AB.
4) Take x as centre and its
perpendicular distance on
AB as radius, draw a circle
which will touch given two
circles and line AB.
Problem 4:In the given situation there are two circles of
different diameters and one inclined line AB, as shown.
Draw one circle touching these three objects.
Basic Locus Cases:
P
A B
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
70 mm 30 mm
p1
p2
p3
p4
p5
p6
p7
p8
Problem 5:-Two points A and B are 100 mm apart.
There is a point P, moving in a plane such that the
difference of it’s distances from A and B always
remains constant and equals to 40 mm.
Draw locus of point P.
Basic Locus Cases:
Solution Steps:
1.Locate A & B points 100 mm apart.
2.Locate point P on AB line,
70 mm from A and 30 mm from B
As PA-PB=40 ( AB = 100 mm )
3.On both sides of P mark points 5
mm apart. Name those 1,2,3,4 as usual.
4.Now similar to steps of Problem 2,
Draw different arcs taking A & B centers
and A-1, B-1, A-2, B-2 etc as radius.
5. Mark various positions of p i.e. and join
them in smooth possible curve.
It will be locus of P
1)      Mark lower most
position of M on extension
of AB (downward) by taking
distance MN (40 mm) from
point B (because N can
not go beyond B ).
2)      Divide line (M initial
and M lower most ) into
eight to ten parts and mark
them M1
, M2
, M3
up to the
last position of M .
3)      Now take MN (40 mm)
as fixed distance in compass,
M1
center cut line CB in N1
.
4)      Mark point P1
on M1
N1
with same distance of MP
from M1
.
5)      Similarly locate M2
P2,
M3
P3
, M4
P4
and join all P
points.
It will be
locus of P.
Solution Steps:
600
900
M
N
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
N12
A
B
C
D
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M6
M12
M13
N13
p
p1
p2
p3
p4
p5
p6
p7
p8
p9
p10
p13
p11
p12
Problem 6:-Two points A and B are 100 mm apart.
There is a point P, moving in a plane such that the
difference of it’s distances from A and B always
remains constant and equals to 40 mm.
Draw locus of point P.
FORK & SLIDER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
p
p1
p2
p3
p4
p5
p6
p7
p8
O
A A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Problem No.7:
A Link OA, 80 mm long oscillates around O,
600
to right side and returns to it’s initial vertical
Position with uniform velocity.Mean while point
P initially on O starts sliding downwards and
reaches end A with uniform velocity.
Draw locus of point P
Solution Steps:
Point P- Reaches End A (Downwards)
1) Divide OA in EIGHT equal parts and from O to A after O
name 1, 2, 3, 4 up to 8. (i.e. up to point A).
2) Divide 600
angle into four parts (150
each) and mark each
point by A1
, A2
, A3
, A4
and for return A5
, A6
, A7
andA8
.
(Initial A point).
3) Take center O, distance in compass O-1 draw an arc upto
OA1
. Name this point as P1.
1)    Similarly O center O-2 distance mark P2
on line O-A2
.
2)    This way locate P3
, P4
, P5
, P6
, P7
and P8
and join them.
( It will be thw desired locus of P )
OSCILLATING LINK
p
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
O
A
Problem No 8:
A Link OA, 80 mm long oscillates around O,
600
to right side, 1200
to left and returns to it’s initial
vertical Position with uniform velocity.Mean while point
P initially on O starts sliding downwards, reaches end A
and returns to O again with uniform velocity.
Draw locus of point P
Solution Steps:
( P reaches A i.e. moving downwards.
& returns to O again i.e.moves upwards )
1.Here distance traveled by point P is PA.plus
AP.Hence divide it into eight equal parts.( so
total linear displacement gets divided in 16
parts) Name those as shown.
2.Link OA goes 600
to right, comes back to
original (Vertical) position, goes 600
to left and
returns to original vertical position. Hence
total angular displacement is 2400
.
Divide this also in 16 parts. (150
each.)
Name as per previous problem.(A, A1 A2 etc)
3.Mark different positions of P as per the
procedure adopted in previous case.
and complete the problem.
A2
A1
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
p8
p5
p6
p7
p2
p4
p1
p3
OSCILLATING LINK
A B
A1
A2
A4
A5
A3
A6
A7
P
p1 p2
p3
p4
p5
p6
p7
p8
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
Problem 9:
Rod AB, 100 mm long, revolves in clockwise direction for one revolution.
Meanwhile point P, initially on A starts moving towards B and reaches B.
Draw locus of point P.
ROTATING LINK
1)  AB Rod revolves around
center O for one revolution and
point P slides along AB rod and
reaches end B in one
revolution.
2)  Divide circle in 8 number of
equal parts and name in arrow
direction after A-A1, A2, A3, up
to A8.
3)  Distance traveled by point P
is AB mm. Divide this also into 8
number of equal parts.
4)  Initially P is on end A. When
A moves to A1, point P goes
one linear division (part) away
from A1. Mark it from A1 and
name the point P1.
5)   When A moves to A2, P will
be two parts away from A2
(Name it P2 ). Mark it as above
from A2.
6)   From A3 mark P3 three
parts away from P3.
7)   Similarly locate P4, P5, P6,
P7 and P8 which will be eight
parts away from A8. [Means P
has reached B].
8)   Join all P points by smooth
curve. It will be locus of P
A B
A1
A2
A4
A5
A3
A6
A7
P
p1
p2
p3
p4
p5
p6
p7
p8
1 2 3 4567
Problem 10 :
Rod AB, 100 mm long, revolves in clockwise direction for one revolution.
Meanwhile point P, initially on A starts moving towards B, reaches B
And returns to A in one revolution of rod.
Draw locus of point P.
Solution Steps
+ + + +
ROTATING LINK
1)   AB Rod revolves around center O
for one revolution and point P slides
along rod AB reaches end B and
returns to A.
2)   Divide circle in 8 number of equal
parts and name in arrow direction
after A-A1, A2, A3, up to A8.
3)   Distance traveled by point P is AB
plus AB mm. Divide AB in 4 parts so
those will be 8 equal parts on return.
4)   Initially P is on end A. When A
moves to A1, point P goes one linear
division (part) away from A1. Mark it
from A1 and name the point P1.
5)   When A moves to A2, P will be
two parts away from A2 (Name it P2 ).
Mark it as above from A2.
6)   From A3 mark P3 three parts
away from P3.
7)   Similarly locate P4, P5, P6, P7
and P8 which will be eight parts away
from A8. [Means P has reached B].
8)   Join all P points by smooth curve.
It will be locus of P
The Locus will follow
the loop path two times in one
revolution.
DRAWINGS:
( A Graphical Representation)
The Fact about:
If compared with Verbal or Written Description,
Drawings offer far better idea about the Shape, Size & Appearance of
any object or situation or location, that too in quite a less time.
Hence it has become the Best Media of Communication
not only in Engineering but in almost all Fields.
Drawings
(Some Types)
Nature Drawings
( landscape,
scenery etc.)
Geographical
Drawings
( maps etc.)
Botanical Drawings
( plants, flowers etc.)
Zoological Drawings
(creatures, animals etc.)
Portraits
( human faces,
expressions etc.)
Engineering Drawings,
(projections.)
Machine component DrawingsBuilding Related Drawings.
Orthographic Projections
(Fv,Tv & Sv.-Mech.Engg terms)
(Plan, Elevation- Civil Engg.terms)
(Working Drawings 2-D type)
Isometric ( Mech.Engg.Term.)
or Perspective(Civil Engg.Term)
(Actual Object Drawing 3-D)
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS:
Horizontal Plane (HP),
Vertical Frontal Plane ( VP )
Side Or Profile Plane ( PP)
Planes.
Pattern of planes & Pattern of views
Methods of drawing Orthographic Projections
Different Reference planes are
FV is a view projected on VP.
TV is a view projected on HP.
SV is a view projected on PP.
And
Different Views are Front View (FV), Top View (TV) and Side View (SV)
IMPORTANT TERMS OF ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS:
IT IS A TECHNICAL DRAWING IN WHICH DIFFERENT VIEWS OF AN OBJECT
ARE PROJECTED ON DIFFERENT REFERENCE PLANES
OBSERVING PERPENDICULAR TO RESPECTIVE REFERENCE PLANE
1
2
3

A.I.P.
 to Vp& to Hp

A.V.P.
 to Hp &  to Vp
PLANES
PRINCIPAL PLANES
HP AND VP
AUXILIARY PLANES
Auxiliary Vertical Plane
(A.V.P.)
Profile Plane
( P.P.)
Auxiliary Inclined Plane
(A.I.P.)
1
THIS IS A PICTORIAL SET-UP OF ALL THREE PLANES.
ARROW DIRECTION IS A NORMAL WAY OF OBSERVING THE OBJECT.
BUT IN THIS DIRECTION ONLY VPAND A VIEW ON IT (FV) CAN BE SEEN.
THE OTHER PLANES AND VIEWS ON THOSE CAN NOT BE SEEN.
X
Y
HP IS ROTATED DOWNWARD 900
AND
BROUGHT IN THE PLANE OF VP.
PP IS ROTATED IN RIGHT SIDE 900
AND
BROUGHT IN THE PLANE OF VP.
X
Y
X Y
VP
HP
PP
FV
ACTUAL PATTERN OF PLANES & VIEWS
OF ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
DRAWN IN
FIRST ANGLE METHOD OF PROJECTIONS
LSV
TV
PROCEDURE TO SOLVE ABOVE PROBLEM:-
TO MAKE THOSE PLANES ALSO VISIBLE FROM THE ARROW DIRECTION,
A) HP IS ROTATED 900
DOUNWARD
B) PP, 900
IN RIGHT SIDE DIRECTION.
THIS WAY BOTH PLANES ARE BROUGHT IN THE SAME PLANE CONTAINING VP.
PATTERN OF PLANES & VIEWS (First Angle Method)
2
Click to view Animation On clicking the button if a warning comes please click YES to continue, this program is
safe for your pc.
Methods of Drawing Orthographic Projections
First Angle Projections Method
Here views are drawn
by placing object
in 1st
Quadrant
( Fv above X-y, Tv below X-y )
Third Angle Projections Method
Here views are drawn
by placing object
in 3rd
Quadrant.
( Tv above X-y, Fv below X-y )
FV
TV
X Y X Y
G L
TV
FV
SYMBOLIC
PRESENTATION
OF BOTH METHODS
WITH AN OBJECT
STANDING ON HP ( GROUND)
ON IT’S BASE.
3
NOTE:-
HP term is used in 1st
Angle method
&
For the same
Ground term is used
in 3rd
Angle method of projections
FOR T.V.
FOR
S.V. FOR
F.V.
FIRST ANGLE
PROJECTION
IN THIS METHOD,
THE OBJECT IS ASSUMED TO BE
SITUATED IN FIRST QUADRANT
MEANS
ABOVE HP & INFRONT OF VP.
OBJECT IS INBETWEEN
OBSERVER & PLANE.
ACTUAL PATTERN OF
PLANES & VIEWS
IN
FIRST ANGLE METHOD
OF PROJECTIONS
X Y
VP
HP
PP
FV LSV
TV
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
IN THIS METHOD,
THE OBJECT IS ASSUMED TO BE
SITUATED IN THIRD QUADRANT
( BELOW HP & BEHIND OF VP. )
PLANES BEING TRANSPERENT
AND INBETWEEN
OBSERVER & OBJECT.
ACTUAL PATTERN OF
PLANES & VIEWS
OF
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTIONS
X Y
TV
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
LSV FV
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
{ MACHINE ELEMENTS }
OBJECT IS OBSERVED IN THREE DIRECTIONS.
THE DIRECTIONS SHOULD BE NORMAL
TO THE RESPECTIVE PLANES.
AND NOW PROJECT THREE DIFFERENT VIEWS ON THOSE PLANES.
THESE VEWS ARE FRONT VIEW , TOP VIEW AND SIDE VIEW.
FRONT VIEW IS A VIEW PROJECTED ON VERTICAL PLANE ( VP )
TOP VIEW IS A VIEW PROJECTED ON HORIZONTAL PLANE ( HP )
SIDE VIEW IS A VIEW PROJECTED ON PROFILE PLANE ( PP )
AND THEN STUDY NEXT 26 ILLUSTRATED CASES CAREFULLY.
TRY TO RECOGNIZE SURFACES
PERPENDICULAR TO THE ARROW DIRECTIONS
FIRST STUDY THE CONCEPT OF 1ST
AND 3RD
ANGLE
PROJECTION METHODS
FOR T.V.
FOR
S.V. FOR
F.V.
FIRST ANGLE
PROJECTION
IN THIS METHOD,
THE OBJECT IS ASSUMED TO BE
SITUATED IN FIRST QUADRANT
MEANS
ABOVE HP & INFRONT OF VP.
OBJECT IS INBETWEEN
OBSERVER & PLANE.
ACTUAL PATTERN OF
PLANES & VIEWS
IN
FIRST ANGLE METHOD
OF PROJECTIONS
X Y
VP
HP
PP
FV LSV
TV
ACTUAL PATTERN OF
PLANES & VIEWS
OF
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTIONS
X
TV
LSV FV
IN THIS METHOD,
THE OBJECT IS ASSUMED TO BE
SITUATED IN THIRD QUADRANT
( BELOW HP & BEHIND OF VP. )
PLANES BEING TRANSPERENT
AND INBETWEEN
OBSERVER & OBJECT.
FOR T.V.
FOR
S.V.
Y
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
x y
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
FOR
F.V.
FOR
S.V.
FOR T.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
1
FOR
F.V.
FOR
S.V.
FOR T.V.
X Y
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
2
FOR
F.V.
FOR
S.V.
FOR T.V.
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
X Y
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
3
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
FOR T.V.
FOR
S.V.
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FOR
F.V.
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
4
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
FOR
S.V.
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
5
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.FOR
S.V.
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
6
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
FOR
S.V.
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
7
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
X Y
50
20
25
25 20
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
8
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
FOR
S.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
9
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
FOR T.V.
FOR S.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
10
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
FOR T.V.
FOR
S.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
11
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
FOR T.V.
FOR
S.V. FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
12
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
x y
FV
35
35
10
TV
302010
40
70
O
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
13
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
ZSTUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
SV
TV
yx
FV
30
30
10
30 10 30
ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL
FOR T.V.
FOR
S.V. FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
14
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
x y
FV SV
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
TV
10
40 60
60
40
ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL
FOR T.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
15
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FOR T.V.
FOR
S.V. FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
16ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
x y
FV SV
ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL
40 60
60
40
10
TOP VIEW
40 20
30 SQUARE
20
50
60
30
10
F.V.
S.V.
O
FOR
S.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND SV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
17
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW
X Y
50
80
10
30 D
TV
O
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
18ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
40
10
45
FV
O
X Y
X Y
FV
O
40
10
10
TV
25
25
30 R
100
103010
20 D
FOR
F.V.
O
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
19
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FOR T.V.
O
20 D
30 D
60 D
TV
10
30
50
10
35
FV
X Y
RECT.
SLOT
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
20ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
TOP VIEW
O O
40
25
80
F.V.
10
15
25
25
25
25
10
S.V.
FOR
S.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND SV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
21
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
450
X
FV
Y
30
40
TV
30 D
40
40
15
O
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
22
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
O
O
20
20
15
40
100
30
60
30
20
20
50
HEX PART
FOR
S.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV ABD SV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
23
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW
O
10
30
10
80
30
T.V.
O
10
30
4020
F.V.
X Y
FOR T.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
24ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
LSV
Y
25
25
1050
FV
X
10 10 15
O
FOR
S.V.
FOR
F.V.
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND LSV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
25
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
YX
F.V. LEFT S.V.
20 2010
15
15
15
30
10
30
50
15
FOR
S.V.
FOR
F.V.
O
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN
DRAW FV AND SV OF THIS OBJECT
BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
26
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
TO DRAW PROJECTIONS OF ANY OBJECT,
ONE MUST HAVE FOLLOWING INFORMATION
A) OBJECT
{ WITH IT’S DESCRIPTION, WELL DEFINED.}
B) OBSERVER
{ ALWAYS OBSERVING PERPENDICULAR TO RESP. REF.PLANE}.
C) LOCATION OF OBJECT,
{ MEANS IT’S POSITION WITH REFFERENCE TO H.P. & V.P.}
TERMS ‘ABOVE’ & ‘BELOW’ WITH RESPECTIVE TO H.P.
AND TERMS ‘INFRONT’ & ‘BEHIND’ WITH RESPECTIVE TO V.P
FORM 4 QUADRANTS.
OBJECTS CAN BE PLACED IN ANY ONE OF THESE 4 QUADRANTS.
IT IS INTERESTING TO LEARN THE EFFECT ON THE POSITIONS OF VIEWS ( FV, TV )
OF THE OBJECT WITH RESP. TO X-Y LINE, WHEN PLACED IN DIFFERENT QUADRANTS.
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
OF POINTS, LINES, PLANES, AND SOLIDS.
STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS GIVEN ON HEXT PAGES AND NOTE THE RESULTS.TO MAKE IT EASY
HERE A POINT A IS TAKEN AS AN OBJECT. BECAUSE IT’S ALL VIEWS ARE JUST POINTS.
NOTATIONS
FOLLOWING NOTATIONS SHOULD BE FOLLOWED WHILE NAMEING
DIFFERENT VIEWS IN ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS.
IT’S FRONT VIEW a’ a’ b’
SAME SYSTEM OF NOTATIONS SHOULD BE FOLLOWED
INCASE NUMBERS, LIKE 1, 2, 3 – ARE USED.
OBJECT POINT A LINE AB
IT’S TOP VIEW a a b
IT’S SIDE VIEW a” a” b”
X
Y
1ST
Quad.2nd
Quad.
3rd
Quad. 4th
Quad.
X Y
VP
HP
Observer
THIS QUADRANT PATTERN,
IF OBSERVED ALONG X-Y LINE ( IN RED ARROW DIRECTION)
WILL EXACTLY APPEAR AS SHOWN ON RIGHT SIDE AND HENCE,
IT IS FURTHER USED TO UNDERSTAND ILLUSTRATION PROPERLLY.
HP
VP
a’
a
A
POINT A IN
1ST
QUADRANT
OBSERVER
VP
HP
POINT A IN
2ND
QUADRANT
OBSERVER
a’
a
A
OBSERVER
a
a’
POINT A IN
3RD
QUADRANT
HP
VP
A
OBSERVER
a
a’
POINT A IN
4TH
QUADRANT
HP
VP
A
Point A is
Placed In
different
quadrants
and it’s Fv & Tv
are brought in
same plane for
Observer to see
clearly.
Fv is visible as
it is a view on
VP. But as Tv is
is a view on Hp,
it is rotated
downward 900
,
In clockwise
direction.The
In front part of
Hp comes below
xy line and the
part behind Vp
comes above.
Observe and
note the
process.
A
a
a’
A
a
a’
A
a
a’
X
Y
X
Y
X
YFor Fv
For Tv
For Fv
For Tv
For Tv
For Fv
POINT A ABOVE HP
& INFRONT OF VP
POINT A IN HP
& INFRONT OF VP
POINT A ABOVE HP
& IN VP
PROJECTIONS OF A POINT IN FIRST QUADRANT.
PICTORIAL
PRESENTATION
PICTORIAL
PRESENTATION
ORTHOGRAPHIC PRESENTATIONS
OF ALL ABOVE CASES.
X Y
a
a’
VP
HP
X Y
a’
VP
HP
a X Y
a
VP
HP
a’
Fv above xy,
Tv below xy.
Fv above xy,
Tv on xy.
Fv on xy,
Tv below xy.
SIMPLE CASES OF THE LINE
1. A VERTICAL LINE ( LINE PERPENDICULAR TO HP & // TO VP)
2. LINE PARALLEL TO BOTH HP & VP.
3. LINE INCLINED TO HP & PARALLEL TO VP.
4. LINE INCLINED TO VP & PARALLEL TO HP.
5. LINE INCLINED TO BOTH HP & VP.
STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS GIVEN ON NEXT PAGE
SHOWING CLEARLY THE NATURE OF FV & TV
OF LINES LISTED ABOVE AND NOTE RESULTS.
PROJECTIONS OF STRAIGHT LINES.
INFORMATION REGARDING A LINE means
IT’S LENGTH,
POSITION OF IT’S ENDS WITH HP & VP
IT’S INCLINATIONS WITH HP & VP WILL BE GIVEN.
AIM:- TO DRAW IT’S PROJECTIONS - MEANS FV & TV.
X
Y
V.P.
X
Y
V.P. b’
a’
b
a
F.V.
T.V.
a b
a’
b’
B
A
TV
FV
A
B
X Y
H.P.
V.P.
a’
b’
a b
Fv
Tv
X Y
H.P.
V.P.
a b
a’ b’Fv
Tv
For Fv
For Tv
For Tv
For Fv
Note:
Fv is a vertical line
Showing True Length
&
Tv is a point.
Note:
Fv & Tv both are
// to xy
&
both show T. L.
1.
2.
A Line
perpendicular
to Hp
&
// to Vp
A Line
// to Hp
&
// to Vp
Orthographic Pattern
Orthographic Pattern
(Pictorial Presentation)
(Pictorial Presentation)
A Line inclined to Hp
and
parallel to Vp
(Pictorial presentation)
X
Y
V.P.
A
B
b’
a’
b
a


F.V.
T.V.
A Line inclined to Vp
and
parallel to Hp
(Pictorial presentation)
Ø
V.P.
a b
a’
b’
BA
Ø
F.V.
T.V.
X Y
H.P.
V.P.
F.V.
T.V.
a b
a’
b’

X Y
H.P.
V.P.
Øa
b
a’ b’
Tv
Fv
Tv inclined to xy
Fv parallel to xy.
3.
4.
Fv inclined to xy
Tv parallel to xy.
Orthographic Projections
X
Y
V.P.
For Fv
a’
b’
a b
B
A


For Tv
F.V.
T.V.
X
Y
V.P.
a’
b’
a b


F.V.
T.V.
For Fv
For Tv
B
A
X Y


H.P.
V.P.
a
b
FV
TV
a’
b’
A Line inclined to both
Hp and Vp
(Pictorial presentation)
5.
Note These Facts:-
Both Fv & Tv are inclined to xy.
(No view is parallel to xy)
Both Fv & Tv are reduced
lengths.
(No view shows True Length)
Orthographic Projections
Fv is seen on Vp clearly.
To see Tv clearly, HP is
rotated 900
downwards,
Hence it comes below xy.
On removal of object
i.e. Line AB
Fv as a image on Vp.
Tv as a image on Hp,
X Y
H.P.
V.P.
X Y

H.P.
V.P.
a
b
TV
a’
b’
FV
TV
b2
b1’
TL
X Y


H.P.
V.P.
a
b
FV
TV
a’
b’
Here TV (ab) is not // to XY line
Hence it’s corresponding FV
a’ b’ is not showing
True Length &
True Inclination with Hp.
In this sketch, TV is rotated
and made // to XY line.
Hence it’s corresponding
FV a’ b1’ Is showing
True Length
&
True Inclination with Hp.
Note the procedure
When Fv & Tv known,
How to find True Length.
(Views are rotated to determine
True Length & it’s inclinations
with Hp & Vp).
Note the procedure
When True Length is known,
How to locate Fv & Tv.
(Component a-1 of TL is drawn
which is further rotated
to determine Fv)
1
a
a’
b’
1’
b

b1
’


TL
b1
Ø
TL
Fv
Tv
Orthographic Projections
Means Fv & Tv of Line AB
are shown below,
with their apparent Inclinations
 & 
Here a -1 is component
of TL ab1 gives length of Fv.
Hence it is brought Up to
Locus of a’ and further rotated
to get point b’. a’ b’ will be Fv.
Similarly drawing component
of other TL(a’ b1‘) Tv can be drawn.

The most important diagram showing graphical relations
among all important parameters of this topic.
Study and memorize it as a CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
And use in solving various problems.
True Length is never rotated. It’s horizontal component
is drawn & it is further rotated to locate view.
Views are always rotated, made horizontal & further
extended to locate TL,  & Ø
Also Remember
Important
TEN parameters
to be remembered
with Notations
used here onward
Ø



1) True Length ( TL) – a’ b1’ & a b
2) Angle of TL with Hp -
3) Angle of TL with Vp –
4) Angle of FV with xy –
5) Angle of TV with xy –
6) LTV (length of FV) – Component (a-1)
7) LFV (length of TV) – Component (a’-1’)
8) Position of A- Distances of a & a’ from xy
9) Position of B- Distances of b & b’ from xy
10) Distance between End Projectors
X Y
H.P.
V.P.
1a
b

b1
Ø
TLTv
LFV
a’
b’
1’
b1
’

TL
Fv

LTV
Distance between
End Projectors.
 & Construct with a’
Ø & Construct with a
b & b1 on same locus.
b’ & b1’ on same locus.
NOTE this
a’
b’
a
b
X Y
b’1
b1
Ø

GROUP (A)
GENERAL CASES OF THE LINE INCLINED TO BOTH HP & VP
( based on 10 parameters).PROBLEM 1)
Line AB is 75 mm long and it is 300
&
400
Inclined to Hp & Vp respectively.
End A is 12mm above Hp and 10 mm
in front of Vp.
Draw projections. Line is in 1st
quadrant.
SOLUTION STEPS:
1) Draw xy line and one projector.
2) Locate a’ 12mm above xy line
& a 10mm below xy line.
3) Take 300
angle from a’ & 400
from
a and mark TL I.e. 75mm on both
lines. Name those points b1’ and b1
respectively.
4) Join both points with a’ and a resp.
5) Draw horizontal lines (Locus) from
both points.
6) Draw horizontal component of TL
a b1 from point b1 and name it 1.
( the length a-1 gives length of Fv
as we have seen already.)
7) Extend it up to locus of a’ and
rotating a’ as center locate b’
as shown. Join a’ b’ as Fv.
8) From b’ drop a projector down
ward & get point b. Join a & b
1
LFV
TL
TL
FV
TV
X y
a
a’
b1

450
TL
1
b’1b’
LFV
FV
TL
550
b
TV
PROBLEM 2:
Line AB 75mm long makes 450
inclination with Vp while it’s Fv makes 550
.
End A is 10 mm above Hp and 15 mm in front of Vp.If line is in 1st
quadrant
draw it’s projections and find it’s inclination with Hp.
LOCUS OF b
LOCUS OF
Solution Steps:-
1.Draw x-y line.
2.Draw one projector for a’ & a
3.Locate a’ 10mm above x-y &
Tv a 15 mm below xy.
4.Draw a line 450
inclined to xy
from point a and cut TL 75 mm
on it and name that point b1
Draw locus from point b1
5.Take 550
angle from a’ for Fv
above xy line.
6.Draw a vertical line from b1
up to locus of a and name it 1.
It is horizontal component of
TL & is LFV.
7.Continue it to locus of a’ and
rotate upward up to the line
of Fv and name it b’.This a’ b’
line is Fv.
8. Drop a projector from b’ on
locus from point b1 and
name intersecting point b.
Line a b is Tv of line AB.
9.Draw locus from b’ and from
a’ with TL distance cut point b1‘
10.Join a’ b1’ as TL and measure
it’s angle at a’.
It will be true angle of line with HP.
X
a’
y
a
b’
FV
500
b
600
b1
TL
b’1
TL


PROBLEM 3: Fv
of line AB is 500
inclined to xy and measures 55
mm long while it’s Tv is 600
inclined to xy line. If
end A is 10 mm above Hp and 15 mm in front of
Vp, draw it’s projections,find TL, inclinations of line
with Hp & Vp.
SOLUTION STEPS:
1.Draw xy line and one projector.
2.Locate a’ 10 mm above xy and
a 15 mm below xy line.
3.Draw locus from these points.
4.Draw Fv 500
to xy from a’ and
mark b’ Cutting 55mm on it.
5.Similarly draw Tv 600
to xy
from a & drawing projector from b’
Locate point b and join a b.
6.Then rotating views as shown,
locate True Lengths ab1 & a’b1’
and their angles with Hp and Vp.
X Y
a’
1’
a
b’1
LTV
TL
b1
1
b’
b
LFV
TVFV

TL

PROBLEM 4 :-
Line AB is 75 mm long .It’s Fv and Tv measure 50 mm & 60 mm long respectively.
End A is 10 mm above Hp and 15 mm in front of Vp. Draw projections of line AB
if end B is in first quadrant.Find angle with Hp and Vp.
SOLUTION STEPS:
1.Draw xy line and one projector.
2.Locate a’ 10 mm above xy and
a 15 mm below xy line.
3.Draw locus from these points.
4.Cut 60mm distance on locus of a’
& mark 1’ on it as it is LTV.
5.Similarly Similarly cut 50mm on
locus of a and mark point 1 as it is LFV.
6.From 1’ draw a vertical line upward
and from a’ taking TL ( 75mm ) in
compass, mark b’1 point on it.
Join a’ b’1 points.
7. Draw locus from b’1
8. With same steps below get b1 point
and draw also locus from it.
9. Now rotating one of the components
I.e. a-1 locate b’ and join a’ with it
to get Fv.
10. Locate tv similarly and measure
Angles  &
X Y
c’
c
LOCUS OF d & d1d d1
d’ d’1
TVFV
TL
TL


LOCUS OF d’ & d’1
PROBLEM 5 :-
T.V. of a 75 mm long Line CD, measures 50 mm.
End C is in Hp and 50 mm in front of Vp.
End D is 15 mm in front of Vp and it is above Hp.
Draw projections of CD and find angles with Hp and Vp.
SOLUTION STEPS:
1.Draw xy line and one projector.
2.Locate c’ on xy and
c 50mm below xy line.
3.Draw locus from these points.
4.Draw locus of d 15 mm below xy
5.Cut 50mm & 75 mm distances on
locus of d from c and mark points
d & d1 as these are Tv and line CD
lengths resp.& join both with c.
6.From d1 draw a vertical line upward
up to xy I.e. up to locus of c’ and
draw an arc as shown.
7 Then draw one projector from d to
meet this arc in d’ point & join c’ d’
8. Draw locus of d’ and cut 75 mm
on it from c’ as TL
9.Measure Angles  &
TRACES OF THE LINE:-
THESE ARE THE POINTS OF INTERSECTIONS OF A LINE ( OR IT’S EXTENSION )
WITH RESPECTIVE REFFERENCE PLANES.
A LINE ITSELF OR IT’S EXTENSION, WHERE EVER TOUCHES H.P.,
THAT POINT IS CALLED TRACE OF THE LINE ON H.P.( IT IS CALLED H.T.)
SIMILARLY, A LINE ITSELF OR IT’S EXTENSION, WHERE EVER TOUCHES V.P.,
THAT POINT IS CALLED TRACE OF THE LINE ON V.P.( IT IS CALLED V.T.)
V.T.:- It is a point on Vp.
Hence it is called Fv of a point in Vp.
Hence it’s Tv comes on XY line.( Here onward named as v )
H.T.:- It is a point on Hp.
Hence it is called Tv of a point in Hp.
Hence it’s Fv comes on XY line.( Here onward named as ’h’ )
GROUP (B)
PROBLEMS INVOLVING TRACES OF THE LINE.
1. Begin with FV. Extend FV up to XY line.
2. Name this point h’
( as it is a Fv of a point in Hp)
3. Draw one projector from h’.
4. Now extend Tv to meet this projector.
This point is HT
STEPS TO LOCATE HT.
(WHEN PROJECTIONS ARE GIVEN.)
1. Begin with TV. Extend TV up to XY line.
2. Name this point v
( as it is a Tv of a point in Vp)
3. Draw one projector from v.
4. Now extend Fv to meet this projector.
This point is VT
STEPS TO LOCATE VT.
(WHEN PROJECTIONS ARE GIVEN.)
h’
HTVT’
v
a’
x y
a
b’
FV
b
TV
Observe & note :-
1. Points h’ & v always on x-y line.
2. VT’ & v always on one projector.
3. HT & h’ always on one projector.
4. FV - h’- VT’ always co-linear.
5. TV - v - HT always co-linear.
These points are used to
solve next three problems.
x y
b’ b’1
a
v
VT’
a’
HT
b
h’
b1

300

450
PROBLEM 6 :- Fv of line AB makes 450
angle with XY line and measures 60 mm.
Line’s Tv makes 300
with XY line. End A is 15 mm above Hp and it’s VT is 10 mm
below Hp. Draw projections of line AB,determine inclinations with Hp & Vp and locate HT, VT.
15
10
SOLUTION STEPS:-
Draw xy line, one projector and
locate fv a’ 15 mm above xy.
Take 450
angle from a’ and
marking 60 mm on it locate point b’.
Draw locus of VT, 10 mm below xy
& extending Fv to this locus locate VT.
as fv-h’-vt’ lie on one st.line.
Draw projector from vt, locate v on xy.
From v take 300
angle downward as
Tv and it’s inclination can begin with v.
Draw projector from b’ and locate b I.e.Tv point.
Now rotating views as usual TL and
it’s inclinations can be found.
Name extension of Fv, touching xy as h’
and below it, on extension of Tv, locate HT.
a’
b’
FV
30
45
10
LOCUS OF b’ & b’1
X Y
450
VT’
v
HT
h’
LOCUS OF b & b1
100
a
b
TV
b’1

TL

TL
b1
PROBLEM 7 :
One end of line AB is 10mm above Hp and other end is 100 mm in-front of Vp.
It’s Fv is 450
inclined to xy while it’s HT & VT are 45mm and 30 mm below xy respectively.
Draw projections and find TL with it’s inclinations with Hp & VP.
SOLUTION STEPS:-
Draw xy line, one projector and
locate a’ 10 mm above xy.
Draw locus 100 mm below xy for points b & b1
Draw loci for VT and HT, 30 mm & 45 mm
below xy respectively.
Take 450
angle from a’ and extend that line backward
to locate h’ and VT, & Locate v on xy above VT.
Locate HT below h’ as shown.
Then join v – HT – and extend to get top view end b.
Draw projector upward and locate b’ Make a b & a’b’ dark.
Now as usual rotating views find TL and it’s inclinations.
X y
HT
VT
h’
a’
v
b’
a
b
80
50
b’1


TL
TL
FV
TV
b 1
10
35
55
Locus of a’
PROBLEM 8 :- Projectors drawn from HT and VT of a line AB
are 80 mm apart and those drawn from it’s ends are 50 mm apart.
End A is 10 mm above Hp, VT is 35 mm below Hp
while it’s HT is 45 mm in front of Vp. Draw projections,
locate traces and find TL of line & inclinations with Hp and Vp.
SOLUTION STEPS:-
1.Draw xy line and two projectors,
80 mm apart and locate HT & VT ,
35 mm below xy and 55 mm above xy
respectively on these projectors.
2.Locate h’ and v on xy as usual.
3.Now just like previous two problems,
Extending certain lines complete Fv & Tv
And as usual find TL and it’s inclinations.
b1
a’
FV
VT’
v
TV
X Y
b’
a
b


b1’
TL
TL
Then from point v & HT
angles can be drawn.
&
From point VT’ & h’
angles can be drawn. &
 &
Instead of considering a & a’ as projections of first point,
if v & VT’ are considered as first point , then true inclinations of line with
Hp & Vp i.e. angles  &  can be constructed with points VT’ & V respectively.
THIS CONCEPT IS USED TO SOLVE
NEXT THREE PROBLEMS.
PROBLEM 9 :-
Line AB 100 mm long is 300
and 450
inclined to Hp & Vp respectively.
End A is 10 mm above Hp and it’s VT is 20 mm below Hp
.Draw projections of the line and it’s HT.
X Y
VT’
v
10
20
Locus of a & a1’
 (300
)
(450
)
a1’
100 mm
b1’
b1
a1
100 mm
b’
a’
b
a
FV
TV
HT
h’
SOLUTION STEPS:-
Draw xy, one projector
and locate on it VT and V.
Draw locus of a’ 10 mm above xy.
Take 300
from VT and draw a line.
Where it intersects with locus of a’
name it a1’ as it is TL of that part.
From a1’ cut 100 mm (TL) on it and locate point b1’
Now from v take 450
and draw a line downwards
& Mark on it distance VT-a1’ I.e.TL of extension & name it a1
Extend this line by 100 mm and mark point b1.
Draw it’s component on locus of VT’
& further rotate to get other end of Fv i.e.b’
Join it with VT’ and mark intersection point
(with locus of a1’ ) and name it a’
Now as usual locate points a and b and h’ and HT.
PROBLEM 10 :-
A line AB is 75 mm long. It’s Fv & Tv make 450
and 600
inclinations with X-Y line resp
End A is 15 mm above Hp and VT is 20 mm below Xy line. Line is in first quadrant.
Draw projections, find inclinations with Hp & Vp. Also locate HT.
X Y
VT’
v
15
20
Locus of a & a1’ a1’
75 mm
b1’
b1
a1
75 mm
b’
a’
b
a
FV
TV
HT
h’
450
600


SOLUTION STEPS:-
Similar to the previous only change
is instead of line’s inclinations,
views inclinations are given.
So first take those angles from VT & v
Properly, construct Fv & Tv of extension,
then determine it’s TL( V-a1)
and on it’s extension mark TL of line
and proceed and complete it.
PROBLEM 11 :- The projectors drawn from VT & end A of line AB are 40mm apart.
End A is 15mm above Hp and 25 mm in front of Vp. VT of line is 20 mm below Hp.
If line is 75mm long, draw it’s projections, find inclinations with HP & Vp
X Y
40mm
15
20
25
v
VT’
a’
a
a1’
b1’b’
b
TV
FV
75m
m
b1


Draw two projectors for VT & end A
Locate these points and then
YES !
YOU CAN COMPLETE IT.
X
A.I.P.
GROUP (C)
CASES OF THE LINES IN A.V.P., A.I.P. & PROFILE PLANE.

a’
b’ Line AB is in AIP as shown in above figure no 1.
It’s FV (a’b’) is shown projected on Vp.(Looking in arrow direction)
Here one can clearly see that the
Inclination of AIP with HP = Inclination of FV with XY line
Line AB is in AVP as shown in above figure no 2..
It’s TV (a b) is shown projected on Hp.(Looking in arrow direction)
Here one can clearly see that the
Inclination of AVP with VP = Inclination of TV with XY line
A.V.P.

A
B

a b
B
A
PPVP
HP
a
b
a’
b’
a”
b”
X Y
FV
TV
LSV
A
B
a
b
a’
b’
For F.V.
For T.V.
LINE IN A PROFILE PLANE ( MEANS IN A PLANE PERPENDICULAR TO BOTH HP & VP)
Results:-
1. TV & FV both are vertical, hence arrive on one single projector.
2. It’s Side View shows True Length ( TL)
3. Sum of it’s inclinations with HP & VP equals to 900
(
4. It’s HT & VT arrive on same projector and can be easily located
From Side View.
 + = 900
)
OBSERVE CAREFULLY ABOVE GIVEN ILLUSTRATION AND 2nd
SOLVED PROBLEM.
ORTHOGRAPHIC PATTERN OF LINE IN PROFILE PLANE
HT
VT


PROBLEM 12 :- Line AB 80 mm long, makes 300
angle with Hp
and lies in an Aux.Vertical Plane 450
inclined to Vp.
End A is 15 mm above Hp and VT is 10 mm below X-y line.
Draw projections, fine angle with Vp and Ht.
VT
v
X Y
a
b
a’
b’
a1’
b1
’
Locus of b’
Locus of b’
10
15
HT
h’

b1

AVP 450
to VP
450
Locus of a’ & a1’
Simply consider inclination of AVP
as inclination of TV of our line,
well then?
You sure can complete it
as previous problems!
Go ahead!!
PROBLEM 13 :- A line AB, 75mm long, has one end A in Vp. Other end B is 15 mm above Hp
and 50 mm in front of Vp.Draw the projections of the line when sum of it’s
Inclinations with HP & Vp is 900
, means it is lying in a profile plane.
Find true angles with ref.planes and it’s traces.
a
b
HT
VT
X Y
a’
b’
Side View
( True Length )
a”
b”
(HT)
(VT)
HP
VP
Front view
top view
SOLUTION STEPS:-
After drawing xy line and one projector
Locate top view of A I.e point a on xy as
It is in Vp,
Locate Fv of B i.e.b’15 mm above xy as
it is above Hp.and Tv of B i.e. b, 50 mm
below xy asit is 50 mm in front of Vp
Draw side view structure of Vp and Hp
and locate S.V. of point B i.e. b’’
From this point cut 75 mm distance on Vp and
Mark a’’ as A is in Vp. (This is also VT of line.)
From this point draw locus to left & get a’
Extend SV up to Hp. It will be HT. As it is a Tv
Rotate it and bring it on projector of b.
Now as discussed earlier SV gives TL of line
and at the same time on extension up to Hp & Vp
gives inclinations with those panes.


APPLICATIONS OF PRINCIPLES OF PROJECTIONS OF LINES
IN SOLVING CASES OF DIFFERENT PRACTICAL SITUATIONS.
In these types of problems some situation in the field
or
some object will be described .
It’s relation with Ground ( HP )
And
a Wall or some vertical object ( VP ) will be given.
Indirectly information regarding Fv & Tv of some line or lines,
inclined to both reference Planes will be given
and
you are supposed to draw it’s projections
and
further to determine it’s true Length and it’s inclinations with ground.
Here various problems along with
actual pictures of those situations are given
for you to understand those clearly.
Now looking for views in given ARROW directions,
YOU are supposed to draw projections & find answers,
Off course you must visualize the situation properly.
CHECK YOUR ANSWERS
WITH THE SOLUTIONS
GIVEN IN THE END.
ALL THE BEST !!
Wall P
Wall Q
A
B
PROBLEM 14:-Two objects, a flower (A) and an orange (B) are within a rectangular compound wall,
whose P & Q are walls meeting at 900
. Flower A is 1M & 5.5 M from walls P & Q respectively.
Orange B is 4M & 1.5M from walls P & Q respectively. Drawing projection, find distance between them
If flower is 1.5 M and orange is 3.5 M above the ground. Consider suitable scale..
TV
FV
PROBLEM 15 :- Two mangos on a tree A & B are 1.5 m and 3.00 m above ground
and those are 1.2 m & 1.5 m from a 0.3 m thick wall but on opposite sides of it.
If the distance measured between them along the ground and parallel to wall is 2.6 m,
Then find real distance between them by drawing their projections.
FV
TV
A
B
0.3M THICK
PROBLEM 16 :- oa, ob & oc are three lines, 25mm, 45mm and 65mm
long respectively.All equally inclined and the shortest
is vertical.This fig. is TV of three rods OA, OB and OC
whose ends A,B & C are on ground and end O is 100mm
above ground. Draw their projections and find length of
each along with their angles with ground.
25mm
45 mm
65 mm
A
B
C
O
FV
TV
PROBLEM 17:- A pipe line from point A has a downward gradient 1:5 and it runs due East-South.
Another Point B is 12 M from A and due East of A and in same level of A. Pipe line from B runs
200
Due East of South and meets pipe line from A at point C.
Draw projections and find length of pipe line from B and it’s inclination with ground.
A
B
C
Downward Gradient 1:5
1
5
12 M
N
E
S
N
W
S
PROBLEM 18: A person observes two objects, A & B, on the ground, from a tower, 15 M high,
At the angles of depression 300
& 450
. Object A is is due North-West direction of observer and
object B is due West direction. Draw projections of situation and find distance of objects from
observer and from tower also.
A
B
O
300
450
4.5 M
7.5M
300
450
10 M
15 M
FV
TV
A
B
C
PROBLEM 19:-Guy ropes of two poles fixed at 4.5m and 7.5 m above ground,
are attached to a corner of a building 15 M high, make 300 and 450 inclinations
with ground respectively.The poles are 10 M apart. Determine by drawing their
projections,Length of each rope and distance of poles from building.
1.2 M
0.7
M
4 M
FV
TV
PROBLEM 20:- A tank of 4 M height is to be strengthened by four stay rods from each corner
by fixing their other ends to the flooring, at a point 1.2 M and 0.7 M from two adjacent walls respectively,
as shown. Determine graphically length and angle of each rod with flooring.
FV
2 M
1.5 M
5 M
A
B
C
D
Hook
TV
PROBLEM 21:- A horizontal wooden platform 2 M long and 1.5 M wide is supported by four chains
from it’s corners and chains are attached to a hook 5 M above the center of the platform.
Draw projections of the objects and determine length of each chain along with it’s inclination with ground.
H
PROBLEM 22.
A room is of size 6.5m L ,5m D,3.5m high.
An electric bulb hangs 1m below the center of ceiling.
A switch is placed in one of the corners of the room, 1.5m above the flooring.
Draw the projections an determine real distance between the bulb and switch.
Switch
Bulb
Front wall
Ceiling
Side wall
Observer
TV
L
D
H
PROBLEM 23:-
A PICTURE FRAME 2 M WIDE AND 1 M TALL IS RESTING ON HORIZONTAL WALL RAILING
MAKES 350
INCLINATION WITH WALL. IT IS ATTAACHED TO A HOOK IN THE WALL BY TWO STRINGS.
THE HOOK IS 1.5 M ABOVE WALL RAILING. DETERMINE LENGTH OF EACH CHAIN AND TRUE ANGLE BETWEEN THEM
350
1.5 M
1 M
2 M
Wall railing
FV
TV
X Y
c’
c
LOCUS OF d & d1d d1
d’ d’1
TV
FV
TL
TL


LOCUS OF d’ & d’1
PROBLEM NO.24
T.V. of a 75 mm long Line CD, measures 50 mm.
End C is 15 mm below Hp and 50 mm in front of Vp.
End D is 15 mm in front of Vp and it is above Hp.
Draw projections of CD and find angles with Hp and Vp.
SOME CASES OF THE LINE
IN DIFFERENT QUADRANTS.
REMEMBER:
BELOW HP- Means- Fv below xy
BEHIND V p- Means- Tv above xy.
X Y
a
a’ b
b’
TV
FV
LOCUS OF b’ & b’1
LOCUS OF b & b1
b’1
TL
 b1
TL

70
PROBLEM NO.25
End A of line AB is in Hp and 25 mm behind Vp.
End B in Vp.and 50mm above Hp.
Distance between projectors is 70mm.
Draw projections and find it’s inclinations with Ht, Vt.
X y
a
b’1
=300
p’1
a’
p’
b’
b b1
LOCUS OF b’ & b’1
LOCUS OF b & b1

p
35
25
TL
TL
FV
TV
PROBLEM NO.26
End A of a line AB is 25mm below Hp and 35mm behind Vp.
Line is 300 inclined to Hp.
There is a point P on AB contained by both HP & VP.
Draw projections, find inclination with Vp and traces.
a’
b’
a
b
b’1


TL
TL
FVTV
b1
75
35
Ht
VtX Y
25
55
PROBLEM NO.27
End A of a line AB is 25mm above Hp and end B is 55mm behind Vp.
The distance between end projectors is 75mm.
If both it’s HT & VT coincide on xy in a point,
35mm from projector of A and within two projectors,
Draw projections, find TL and angles and HT, VT.
PROJECTIONS OF PLANES
In this topic various plane figures are the objects.
What will be given in the problem?
1. Description of the plane figure.
2. It’s position with HP and VP.
In which manner it’s position with HP & VP will be described?
1.Inclination of it’s SURFACE with one of the reference planes will be given.
2. Inclination of one of it’s EDGES with other reference plane will be given
(Hence this will be a case of an object inclined to both reference Planes.)
To draw their projections means F.V, T.V. & S.V.
What is usually asked in the problem?
Study the illustration showing
surface & side inclination given on next page.
HP
a 1
b 1
c 1
d 1
VPVPVP
a’ d’
c’b’
For Fv
ForTv
For F.V.
ForT.V.
ForT.V.
For F.V.
HP
a
b c
d
a1’
d1’ c1’
b1’
HP
a1
b1 c1
d1
CASE OF A RECTANGLE – OBSERVE AND NOTE ALL STEPS.
SURFACE PARALLEL TO HP
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION
SURFACE INCLINED TO HP
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION
ONE SMALL SIDE INCLINED TO VP
PICTORIAL PRESENTATION
ORTHOGRAPHIC
TV-True Shape
FV- Line // to xy
ORTHOGRAPHIC
FV- Inclined to XY
TV- Reduced Shape
ORTHOGRAPHIC
FV- Apparent Shape
TV-Previous Shape
A B C
PROCEDURE OF SOLVING THE PROBLEM:
IN THREE STEPS EACH PROBLEM CAN BE SOLVED:( As Shown In Previous Illustration )
STEP 1. Assume suitable conditions & draw Fv & Tv of initial position.
STEP 2. Now consider surface inclination & draw 2nd
Fv & Tv.
STEP 3. After this,consider side/edge inclination and draw 3rd
( final) Fv & Tv.
ASSUMPTIONS FOR INITIAL POSITION:
(Initial Position means assuming surface // to HP or VP)
1.If in problem surface is inclined to HP – assume it // HP
Or If surface is inclined to VP – assume it // to VP
2. Now if surface is assumed // to HP- It’s TV will show True Shape.
And If surface is assumed // to VP – It’s FV will show True Shape.
3. Hence begin with drawing TV or FV as True Shape.
4. While drawing this True Shape –
keep one side/edge ( which is making inclination) perpendicular to xy line
( similar to pair no. on previous page illustration ).A
B
Now Complete STEP 2. By making surface inclined to the resp plane & project it’s other view.
(Ref. 2nd
pair on previous page illustration )
C
Now Complete STEP 3. By making side inclined to the resp plane & project it’s other view.
(Ref. 3nd
pair on previous page illustration )
APPLY SAME STEPS TO SOLVE NEXT ELEVEN PROBLEMS
X Y
a
b c
d
a’b’
c’d’
a1
b1 c1
d1
a1
b1
c1
d1
a’b’
d’c’ c’1 d’1
b’1 a’1
450
300
Problem 1:
Rectangle 30mm and 50mm
sides is resting on HP on one
small side which is 300
inclined
to VP,while the surface of the
plane makes 450
inclination with
HP. Draw it’s projections.
Read problem and answer following questions
1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP
2. Assumption for initial position? ------// to HP
3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV
4. Which side will be vertical? ---One small side.
Hence begin with TV, draw rectangle below X-Y
drawing one small side vertical.
Surface // to Hp Surface inclined to Hp
Side
Inclined
to Vp
Problem 2:
A 300
– 600
set square of longest side
100 mm long, is in VP and 300
inclined
to HP while it’s surface is 450
inclined
to VP.Draw it’s projections
(Surface & Side inclinations directly
given)
Read problem and answer following questions
1 .Surface inclined to which plane? ------- VP
2. Assumption for initial position? ------// to VP
3. So which view will show True shape? --- FV
4. Which side will be vertical? ------longest side.
c1
X Y
300
450
a’1
b’1
c’1
a
c
a’
a
b1
b’
b
a1b
c
a’1
b’1
c’1
c’
Hence begin with FV, draw triangle above X-Y
keeping longest side vertical.
Surface // to Vp Surface inclined to Vp
side inclined to Hp
c
c1
X Y
450
a’1
b’1
c’1
a
c
a’
a
b1
b’
b
a1b
a’1
b’1
c’1
c’
35
10
Problem 3:
A 300
– 600
set square of longest side
100 mm long is in VP and it’s surface
450
inclined to VP. One end of longest
side is 10 mm and other end is 35 mm
above HP. Draw it’s projections
(Surface inclination directly given.
Side inclination indirectly given)
Read problem and answer following questions
1 .Surface inclined to which plane? ------- VP
2. Assumption for initial position? ------// to VP
3. So which view will show True shape? --- FV
4. Which side will be vertical? ------longest side.
Hence begin with FV, draw triangle above X-Y
keeping longest side vertical.
First TWO steps are similar to previous problem.
Note the manner in which side inclination is given.
End A 35 mm above Hp & End B is 10 mm above Hp.
So redraw 2nd
Fv as final Fv placing these ends as said.
Read problem and answer following questions
1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP
2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP
3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV
4. Which side will be vertical? -------- any side.
Hence begin with TV,draw pentagon below
X-Y line, taking one side vertical.
Problem 4:
A regular pentagon of 30 mm sides is
resting on HP on one of it’s sides with it’s
surface 450
inclined to HP.
Draw it’s projections when the side in HP
makes 300
angle with VP
a’b’ d’
b1
d
c1
a
c’e’
b
c
d1
b’1
a1
e’1
c’1
d’1
a1
b1
c1d1
d’
a’b’
c’e’
e1
e1
a’1
X Y450
300
e
SURFACE AND SIDE INCLINATIONS
ARE DIRECTLY GIVEN.
Problem 5:
A regular pentagon of 30 mm sides is resting
on HP on one of it’s sides while it’s opposite
vertex (corner) is 30 mm above HP.
Draw projections when side in HP is 300
inclined to VP.
Read problem and answer following questions
1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP
2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP
3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV
4. Which side will be vertical? --------any side.
Hence begin with TV,draw pentagon below
X-Y line, taking one side vertical.
b’
d’
a’
c’e’
a1
b1
c1d1
e1
b1
c1
d1
a1
e1
b’1
e’1
c’1
d’1
a’1
X Ya’b’ d’c’e’
30
a
b
c
d
e
300
SURFACE INCLINATION INDIRECTLY GIVEN
SIDE INCLINATION DIRECTLY GIVEN:
ONLY CHANGE is
the manner in which surface inclination is described:
One side on Hp & it’s opposite corner 30 mm above Hp.
Hence redraw 1st
Fv as a 2nd
Fv making above arrangement.
Keep a’b’ on xy & d’ 30 mm above xy.
T L
a
d
c
b
a’ b’ d’ c’
X Ya’
b’ d’
c’
a1
b1
d1
c1
a
1
b
1
d
1
c
1
450
300 a’1
b’1
c’1
d’1
a1
b1
d1
c1
a
d
c
b
a’ b’ d’ c’
a’
b’ d’
c’
a
1
b
1
d
1
c
1
300
a’1
b’1
c’1
d’1
Problem 8: A circle of 50 mm diameter is
resting on Hp on end A of it’s diameter AC
which is 300
inclined to Hp while it’s Tv
is 450
inclined to Vp.Draw it’s projections.
Problem 9: A circle of 50 mm diameter is
resting on Hp on end A of it’s diameter AC
which is 300
inclined to Hp while it makes
450
inclined to Vp. Draw it’s projections.
Read problem and answer following questions
1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP
2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP
3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV
4. Which diameter horizontal? ---------- AC
Hence begin with TV,draw rhombus below
X-Y line, taking longer diagonal // to X-Y
The difference in these two problems is in step 3 only.
In problem no.8 inclination of Tv of that AC is
given,It could be drawn directly as shown in 3rd
step.
While in no.9 angle of AC itself i.e. it’s TL, is
given. Hence here angle of TL is taken,locus of c1
Is drawn and then LTV I.e. a1 c1 is marked and
final TV was completed.Study illustration carefully.
Note the difference in
construction of 3rd
step
in both solutions.
Problem 10: End A of diameter AB of a circle is in HP
A nd end B is in VP.Diameter AB, 50 mm long is
300
& 600
inclined to HP & VP respectively.
Draw projections of circle.
The problem is similar to previous problem of circle – no.9.
But in the 3rd
step there is one more change.
Like 9th
problem True Length inclination of dia.AB is definitely expected
but if you carefully note - the the SUM of it’s inclinations with HP & VP is 900
.
Means Line AB lies in a Profile Plane.
Hence it’s both Tv & Fv must arrive on one single projector.
So do the construction accordingly AND note the case carefully..
SOLVE SEPARATELY
ON DRAWING SHEET
GIVING NAMES TO VARIOUS
POINTS AS USUAL,
AS THE CASE IS IMPORTANT
TL
X Y
300
600
Read problem and answer following questions
1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP
2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP
3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV
4. Which diameter horizontal? ---------- AB
Hence begin with TV,draw CIRCLE below
X-Y line, taking DIA. AB // to X-Y
As 3rd
step
redraw 2nd
Tv keeping
side DE on xy line.
Because it is in VP
as said in problem.
X Y
a
b
c
d
e
f
Problem 11:
A hexagonal lamina has its one side in HP and
Its apposite parallel side is 25mm above Hp and
In Vp. Draw it’s projections.
Take side of hexagon 30 mm long.
ONLY CHANGE is the manner in which surface inclination
is described:
One side on Hp & it’s opposite side 25 mm above Hp.
Hence redraw 1st
Fv as a 2nd
Fv making above arrangement.
Keep a’b’ on xy & d’e’ 25 mm above xy.
25
f’ e’d’c’b’a’
f’
e’
d’
c’
b’
a’
a1
b1
c1
d1
e1
f1
c1
’
b’1a’1
f’1
d’1
e’1
f1
a1
c1
b1
d1e1
Read problem and answer following questions
1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP
2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP
3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV
4. Which diameter horizontal? ---------- AC
Hence begin with TV,draw rhombus below
X-Y line, taking longer diagonal // to X-Y
A B
C
H
H/3
G
X Y
a’
b’
c’
g’
b a,g c
b
a,g
c
450
a’1
c’1
b’1
g’1
FREELY SUSPENDED CASES.
1.In this case the plane of the figure always remains perpendicular to Hp.
2.It may remain parallel or inclined to Vp.
3.Hence TV in this case will be always a LINE view.
4.Assuming surface // to Vp, draw true shape in suspended position as FV.
(Here keep line joining point of contact & centroid of fig. vertical )
5.Always begin with FV as a True Shape but in a suspended position.
AS shown in 1st
FV.
IMPORTANT POINTS
Problem 12:
An isosceles triangle of 40 mm long
base side, 60 mm long altitude Is
freely suspended from one corner of
Base side.It’s plane is 450
inclined to
Vp. Draw it’s projections.
Similarly solve next problem
of Semi-circle
First draw a given triangle
With given dimensions,
Locate it’s centroid position
And
join it with point of suspension.
0.414R
G
A
P
20 mm
CG
X Y
e’
c’
d’
b’
a’
p’
g’
b c a p,g d e
b
c
a
p,g
d
e
Problem 13
:A semicircle of 100 mm diameter
is suspended from a point on its
straight edge 30 mm from the midpoint
of that edge so that the surface makes
an angle of 450
with VP.
Draw its projections.
First draw a given semicircle
With given diameter,
Locate it’s centroid position
And
join it with point of suspension.
1.In this case the plane of the figure always remains perpendicular to Hp.
2.It may remain parallel or inclined to Vp.
3.Hence TV in this case will be always a LINE view.
4.Assuming surface // to Vp, draw true shape in suspended position as FV.
(Here keep line joining point of contact & centroid of fig. vertical )
5.Always begin with FV as a True Shape but in a suspended position.
AS shown in 1st
FV.
IMPORTANT POINTS
To determine true shape of plane figure when it’s projections are given.
BY USING AUXILIARY PLANE METHOD
WHAT WILL BE THE PROBLEM?
Description of final Fv & Tv will be given.
You are supposed to determine true shape of that plane figure.
Follow the below given steps:
1. Draw the given Fv & Tv as per the given information in problem.
2. Then among all lines of Fv & Tv select a line showing True Length
(T.L.)
(It’s other view must be // to xy)
3. Draw x1-y1 perpendicular to this line showing T.L.
4. Project view on x1-y1 ( it must be a line view)
5. Draw x2-y2 // to this line view & project new view on it.
It will be the required answer i.e. True Shape.
The facts you must know:-
If you carefully study and observe the solutions of all previous problems,
You will find
IF ONE VIEW IS A LINE VIEW & THAT TOO PARALLEL TO XY LINE,
THEN AND THEN IT’S OTHER VIEW WILL SHOW TRUE SHAPE:
NOW FINAL VIEWS ARE ALWAYS SOME SHAPE, NOT LINE VIEWS:
SO APPLYING ABOVE METHOD:
WE FIRST CONVERT ONE VIEW IN INCLINED LINE VIEW .(By using x1y1 aux.plane)
THEN BY MAKING IT // TO X2-Y2 WE GET TRUE SHAPE.
Study Next
Four Cases
X Y
a
c
b
C’
b’
a’
10
15
15 TL
X1
Y1
C1
b1a1
a’1
b’1
c’1 TRUE SHAPE
900
X2
Y2
Problem 14 Tv is a triangle abc. Ab is 50 mm long, angle cab is 300 and angle cba is 650.
a’b’c’ is a Fv. a’ is 25 mm, b’ is 40 mm and c’ is 10 mm above Hp respectively. Draw projections
of that figure and find it’s true shape.
300 650
50 mm
s per the procedure-
irst draw Fv & Tv as per the data.
n Tv line ab is // to xy hence it’s other view a’b’ is TL. So draw x1y1 perpendicular to it.
roject view on x1y1.
a) First draw projectors from a’b’ & c’ on x1y1.
b) from xy take distances of a,b & c( Tv) mark on these projectors from x1y1. Name points a1b1 & c1.
c) This line view is an Aux.Tv. Draw x2y2 // to this line view and project Aux. Fv on it.
for that from x1y1 take distances of a’b’ & c’ and mark from x2y= on new projectors.
Name points a’1 b’1 & c’1 and join them. This will be the required true shape.
ALWAYS FOR NEW FV TAKE
DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS FV
AND FOR NEW TV, DISTANCES
OF PREVIOUS TV
REMEMBER!!
x1
y1
c’1
b’1
a’1
x2
y2
b1
c1
d1TRUE SHAPE
900
c’
T L
X Y
a’
b’
b
ca
10
20
15
15
1’
1
40
50
25
Problem 15: Fv & Tv of a triangular plate are shown.
Determine it’s true shape.
USE SAME PROCEDURE STEPS
OF PREVIOUS PROBLEM:
BUT THERE IS ONE DIFFICULTY:
NO LINE IS // TO XY IN ANY VIEW.
MEANS NO TL IS AVAILABLE.
IN SUCH CASES DRAW ONE LINE
// TO XY IN ANY VIEW & IT’S OTHER
VIEW CAN BE CONSIDERED AS TL
FOR THE PURPOSE.
HERE a’ 1’ line in Fv is drawn // to xy.
HENCE it’s Tv a-1 becomes TL.
THEN FOLLOW SAME STEPS AND
DETERMINE TRUE SHAPE.
(STUDY THE ILLUSTRATION)
ALWAYS FOR NEW FV TAKE
DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS FV
AND FOR NEW TV, DISTANCES
OF PREVIOUS TV
REMEMBER!!
y1
X2
X1
a1
c1
d1
b1
c’1
d’1
b’1
a’1
y2
TRUE SHAPEa
b
c
d YX
a’
d’
c’
b’
50 D.
50D
TL
PROBLEM 16: Fv & Tv both are circles of 50 mm diameter. Determine true shape of an elliptical plate.
ADOPT SAME PROCEDURE.
a c is considered as line // to xy.
Then a’c’ becomes TL for the purpose.
Using steps properly true shape can be
Easily determined.
Study the illustration.
ALWAYS, FOR NEW FV
TAKE DISTANCES OF
PREVIOUS FV AND
FOR NEW TV, DISTANCES
OF PREVIOUS TV
REMEMBER!!
a
b
c
d
e
a’
b’
e’
c’
d’
a1
b1
e1 d1
c1
300X Y
X1
Y1
450
TRUE
SHAPE
Problem 17 : Draw a regular pentagon of
30 mm sides with one side 300
inclined to xy.
This figure is Tv of some plane whose Fv is
A line 450
inclined to xy.
Determine it’s true shape.
IN THIS CASE ALSO TRUE LENGTH
IS NOT AVAILABLE IN ANY VIEW.
BUT ACTUALLY WE DONOT REQUIRE
TL TO FIND IT’S TRUE SHAPE, AS ONE
VIEW (FV) IS ALREADY A LINE VIEW.
SO JUST BY DRAWING X1Y1 // TO THIS
VIEW WE CAN PROJECT VIEW ON IT
AND GET TRUE SHAPE:
STUDY THE ILLUSTRATION..
ALWAYS FOR NEW FV
TAKE DISTANCES OF
PREVIOUS FV AND FOR
NEW TV, DISTANCES OF
PREVIOUS TV
REMEMBER!!
SOLIDS
To understand and remember various solids in this subject properly,
those are classified & arranged in to two major groups.
Group A
Solids having top and base of same shape
Cylinder
Prisms
Triangular Square Pentagonal Hexagonal
Cube
Triangular Square Pentagonal Hexagonal
Cone
Tetrahedron
Pyramids
( A solid having
six square faces)
( A solid having
Four triangular faces)
Group B
Solids having base of some shape
and just a point as a top, called
apex.
SOLIDS
Dimensional parameters of different solids.
Top
Rectangular
Face
Longer
Edge
Base
Edge
of
Base
Corner of
base
Corner of
base
Triangular
Face
Slant
Edge
Base
Apex
Square Prism Square Pyramid Cylinder Cone
Edge
of
Base
Base
Apex
Base
Generators
Imaginary lines
generating curved surface
of cylinder & cone.
Sections of solids( top & base not parallel) Frustum of cone & pyramids.
( top & base parallel to each other)
X Y
STANDING ON H.P
On it’s base.
RESTING ON H.P
On one point of base circle.
LYING ON H.P
On one generator.
(Axis perpendicular to Hp
And // to Vp.)
(Axis inclined to Hp
And // to Vp)
(Axis inclined to Hp
And // to Vp)
While observing Fv, x-y line represents Horizontal Plane. (Hp)
Axis perpendicular to Vp
And // to Hp
Axis inclined to Vp
And // to Hp
Axis inclined to Vp
And // to Hp
X Y
F.V. F.V. F.V.
T.V. T.V. T.V.
While observing Tv, x-y line represents Vertical Plane. (Vp)
STANDING ON V.P
On it’s base.
RESTING ON V.P
On one point of base circle.
LYING ON V.P
On one generator.
STEPS TO SOLVE PROBLEMS IN SOLIDS
Problem is solved in three steps:
STEP 1: ASSUME SOLID STANDING ON THE PLANE WITH WHICH IT IS MAKING INCLINATION.
( IF IT IS INCLINED TO HP, ASSUME IT STANDING ON HP)
( IF IT IS INCLINED TO VP, ASSUME IT STANDING ON VP)
IF STANDING ON HP - IT’S TV WILL BE TRUE SHAPE OF IT’S BASE OR TOP:
IF STANDING ON VP - IT’S FV WILL BE TRUE SHAPE OF IT’S BASE OR TOP.
BEGIN WITH THIS VIEW:
IT’S OTHER VIEW WILL BE A RECTANGLE ( IF SOLID IS CYLINDER OR ONE OF THE PRISMS):
IT’S OTHER VIEW WILL BE A TRIANGLE ( IF SOLID IS CONE OR ONE OF THE PYRAMIDS):
DRAW FV & TV OF THAT SOLID IN STANDING POSITION:
STEP 2: CONSIDERING SOLID’S INCLINATION ( AXIS POSITION ) DRAW IT’S FV & TV.
STEP 3: IN LAST STEP, CONSIDERING REMAINING INCLINATION, DRAW IT’S FINAL FV & TV.
AXIS
VERTICAL
AXIS
INCLINED HP
AXIS
INCLINED VP
AXIS
VERTICAL
AXIS
INCLINED HP
AXIS
INCLINED VP
AXIS TO VP
er
AXIS
INCLINED
VP
AXIS
INCLINED HP
AXIS TO VP
er AXIS
INCLINED
VP
AXIS
INCLINED HP
GENERAL PATTERN ( THREE STEPS ) OF SOLUTION:
GROUP B SOLID.
CONE
GROUPA SOLID.
CYLINDER
GROUP B SOLID.
CONE
GROUPA SOLID.
CYLINDER
Three steps
If solid is inclined to Hp
Three steps
If solid is inclined to Hp
Three steps
If solid is inclined to Vp
Study Next Twelve Problems and Practice them separately !!
Three steps
If solid is inclined to Vp
PROBLEM NO.1, 2, 3, 4 GENERAL CASES OF SOLIDS INCLINED TO HP & VP
PROBLEM NO. 5 & 6 CASES OF CUBE & TETRAHEDRON
PROBLEM NO. 7 CASE OF FREELY SUSPENDED SOLID WITH SIDE VIEW.
PROBLEM NO. 8 CASE OF CUBE ( WITH SIDE VIEW)
PROBLEM NO. 9 CASE OF TRUE LENGTH INCLINATION WITH HP & VP.
PROBLEM NO. 10 & 11 CASES OF COMPOSITE SOLIDS. (AUXILIARY PLANE)
PROBLEM NO. 12 CASE OF A FRUSTUM (AUXILIARY PLANE)
CATEGORIES OF ILLUSTRATED PROBLEMS!
X
Y
a
b c
d
o
o’
d’c’b’a’
o’
d’c’
b’a’
o1
d1
b1
c1
a1
a’1
d’1
c’1
b’1
o’1
o 1
d 1
b 1
c 1
a1
o1
d
1
b
1
c1
a1
(APEX
NEARER
TO V.P).
(APEX
AWAY
FROM V.P.)
Problem 1. A square pyramid, 40
mm base sides and axis 60 mm long,
has a triangular face on the ground
and the vertical plane containing the
axis makes an angle of 450
with the
VP. Draw its projections. Take apex
nearer to VP
Solution Steps :
Triangular face on Hp , means it is lying on Hp:
1.Assume it standing on Hp.
2.It’s Tv will show True Shape of base( square)
3.Draw square of 40mm sides with one side vertical Tv &
taking 50 mm axis project Fv. ( a triangle)
4.Name all points as shown in illustration.
5.Draw 2nd
Fv in lying position I.e.o’c’d’ face on xy. And project it’s Tv.
6.Make visible lines dark and hidden dotted, as per the procedure.
7.Then construct remaining inclination with Vp
( Vp containing axis ic the center line of 2nd
Tv.Make it 450
to xy as
shown take apex near to xy, as it is nearer to Vp) & project final Fv.
For dark and dotted lines
1.Draw proper outline of new view DARK. 2. Decide direction of an observer.
3. Select nearest point to observer and draw all lines starting from it-dark.
4. Select farthest point to observer and draw all lines (remaining)from it- dotted.
Problem 2:
A cone 40 mm diameter and 50 mm axis
is resting on one generator on Hp
which makes 300
inclination with Vp
Draw it’s projections.
h
a
b
c
d
e
g
f
X Ya’ b’ d’ e’c’ g
’
f’h’
o’
a’
h’b’
e’
c’g’
d’f’
o’
a1
h1
g1
f1
e1
d1
c1
b1
a1
c1
b1
d1
e1
f1
g1
h1
o1
a’1
b’1
c’1
d’1e’1
f’1
g’1
h’1
o1
o1
30
Solution Steps:
Resting on Hp on one generator, means lying on Hp:
1.Assume it standing on Hp.
2.It’s Tv will show True Shape of base( circle )
3.Draw 40mm dia. Circle as Tv &
taking 50 mm axis project Fv. ( a triangle)
4.Name all points as shown in illustration.
5.Draw 2nd
Fv in lying position I.e.o’e’ on xy. And
project it’s Tv below xy.
6.Make visible lines dark and hidden dotted,
as per the procedure.
7.Then construct remaining inclination with Vp
( generator o1e1 300
to xy as shown) & project final Fv.
For dark and dotted lines
1.Draw proper outline of new vie
DARK.
2. Decide direction of an observer.
3. Select nearest point to observer
and draw all lines starting from
it-dark.
4. Select farthest point to observer
and draw all lines (remaining)
from it- dotted.
a
bd
c
1
24
3
X Ya b d c
1 2 4 3
a’
b’
c’
d’
1’
2’
3’
4’
450
4’
3’
2’
1’
d’
c’
b’
a’
4’
3’
2’
1’
d’
c’
b’
a’
350
a1
b1
c1
d1
1
2
3
4
Problem 3:
A cylinder 40 mm diameter and 50 mm
axis is resting on one point of a base
circle on Vp while it’s axis makes 450
with Vp and Fv of the axis 350
with Hp.
Draw projections..
Solution Steps:
Resting on Vp on one point of base, means inclined to Vp:
1.Assume it standing on Vp
2.It’s Fv will show True Shape of base & top( circle )
3.Draw 40mm dia. Circle as Fv & taking 50 mm axis project Tv.
( a Rectangle)
4.Name all points as shown in illustration.
5.Draw 2nd
Tv making axis 450
to xy And project it’s Fv above xy.
6.Make visible lines dark and hidden dotted, as per the procedure.
7.Then construct remaining inclination with Hp
( Fv of axis I.e. center line of view to xy as shown) & project final Tv.
b b1
X Y
a
d
co
d’ c’b’a’
o’
d’
c’
b’
a’
o’
c1
a1
d1
o1
c 1
b 1
a 1
d 1
o 1
o’1
a’1
b’1
c’1
d’1
Problem 4:A square pyramid 30 mm base side
and 50 mm long axis is resting on it’s apex on Hp,
such that it’s one slant edge is vertical and a
triangular face through it is perpendicular to Vp.
Draw it’s projections.
Solution Steps :
1.Assume it standing on Hp but as said on apex.( inverted ).
2.It’s Tv will show True Shape of base( square)
3.Draw a corner case square of 30 mm sides as Tv(as shown)
Showing all slant edges dotted, as those will not be visible from top.
4.taking 50 mm axis project Fv. ( a triangle)
5.Name all points as shown in illustration.
6.Draw 2nd
Fv keeping o’a’ slant edge vertical & project it’s Tv
7.Make visible lines dark and hidden dotted, as per the procedure.
8.Then redrew 2nd
Tv as final Tv keeping a1o1d1 triangular face
perpendicular to Vp I.e.xy. Then as usual project final Fv.
Problem 5: A cube of 50 mm long
edges is so placed on Hp on one
corner that a body diagonal is
parallel to Hp and perpendicular to
Vp Draw it’s projections.
X Y
b
c
d
a
a’ d’ c’b’
a’
d’
c’
b’
a1
b1
d1
c1
a1
b1
d1
c1
1’
p’
p’
a’1
d’1
c’1
d’1
Solution Steps:
1.Assuming standing on Hp, begin with Tv,a square with all sides
equally inclined to xy.Project Fv and name all points of FV & TV.
2.Draw a body-diagonal joining c’ with 3’( This can become // to xy)
3.From 1’ drop a perpendicular on this and name it p’
4.Draw 2nd
Fv in which 1’-p’ line is vertical means c’-3’ diagonal
must be horizontal. .Now as usual project Tv..
6.In final Tv draw same diagonal is perpendicular to Vp as said in problem.
Then as usual project final FV.
1’3’ 1’
3’
Y
Problem 6:A tetrahedron of 50 mm
long edges is resting on one edge on
Hp while one triangular face containing
this edge is vertical and 450
inclined to
Vp. Draw projections.
X
T L
a o
b
c
b’a’ c’
o’
a’
a1
c1
o1
b1 a 1
o 1
b 1
900
450
c 1
c’1
b’c’
o’
a’1
o’1
b’1
IMPORTANT:
Tetrahedron is a
special type
of triangular
pyramid in which
base sides &
slant edges are
equal in length.
Solid of four faces.
Like cube it is also
described by One
dimension only..
Axis length
generally not given.
Solution Steps
As it is resting assume it standing on Hp.
Begin with Tv , an equilateral triangle as side case as shown:
First project base points of Fv on xy, name those & axis line.
From a’ with TL of edge, 50 mm, cut on axis line & mark o’
(as axis is not known, o’ is finalized by slant edge length)
Then complete Fv.
In 2nd
Fv make face o’b’c’ vertical as said in problem.
And like all previous problems solve completely.
FREELY SUSPENDED SOLIDS:
Positions of CG, on axis, from base, for different solids are shown below.
H
H/2
H/4
GROUPA SOLIDS
( Cylinder & Prisms)
GROUP B SOLIDS
( Cone & Pyramids)
CG
CG
X
Ya’ d’e’c’b’
o’
a
b
c
d
e
o
g’
H/4
H
LINE d’g’ VERTICAL
a’b’
c’
d’
o”
e’
g’
a1
b1
o1
e1
d1
c1
a”
e”
d”
c”
b”
FOR SIDE VIEW
Problem 7: A pentagonal pyramid
30 mm base sides & 60 mm long axis,
is freely suspended from one corner of
base so that a plane containing it’s axis
remains parallel to Vp.
Draw it’s three views.
IMPORTANT:
When a solid is freely
suspended from a
corner, then line
joining point of
contact & C.G.
remains vertical.
( Here axis shows
inclination with Hp.)
So in all such cases,
assume solid standing
on Hp initially.)
Solution Steps:
In all suspended cases axis shows inclination with Hp.
1.Hence assuming it standing on Hp, drew Tv - a regular pentagon,corner case.
2.Project Fv & locate CG position on axis – ( ¼ H from base.) and name g’ and
Join it with corner d’
3.As 2nd
Fv, redraw first keeping line g’d’ vertical.
4.As usual project corresponding Tv and then Side View looking from.
a’ d’ c’b’
b
c
d
a
a’
d’
c’
b’a1
b
d1
c1
d’’
c’’
a’’
b’’
X Y1’
1’
1’
Problem 8:
A cube of 50 mm long edges is so placed
on Hp on one corner that a body diagonal
through this corner is perpendicular to Hp
and parallel to Vp Draw it’s three views.
Solution Steps:
1.Assuming it standing on Hp begin with Tv, a square of corner case.
2.Project corresponding Fv.& name all points as usual in both views.
3.Join a’1’ as body diagonal and draw 2nd
Fv making it vertical (I’ on xy)
4.Project it’s Tv drawing dark and dotted lines as per the procedure.
5.With standard method construct Left-hand side view.
( Draw a 450
inclined Line in Tv region ( below xy).
Project horizontally all points of Tv on this line and
reflect vertically upward, above xy.After this, draw
horizontal lines, from all points of Fv, to meet these
lines. Name points of intersections and join properly.
For dark & dotted lines
locate observer on left side of Fv as shown.)
a1
h1
f1
e1
d1 c1
b1
g1
1
o1
400
Axis Tv Length
Axis Tv Length
Axis True Length
Locus of
Center 1
c’1
a’1
b’1
e’1
d’1
h’1
f’1
g’1
o’1
h
a
b
c
d
e
g
f
yX a’ b’ d’ e’c’ g’ f’h’
o’
a’
h’b’
e’
c’g’
d’f’
o’
450
a1
h1 f1
e1
d1
c1
b1
g1
o1
1
Problem 9: A right circular cone,
40 mm base diameter and 60 mm
long axis is resting on Hp on one
point of base circle such that it’s
axis makes 450
inclination with
Hp and 400
inclination with Vp.
Draw it’s projections.
This case resembles to problem no.7 & 9 from projections of planes topic.
In previous all cases 2nd
inclination was done by a parameter not showing TL.Like
Tv of axis is inclined to Vp etc. But here it is clearly said that the axis is 400
inclined
to Vp. Means here TL inclination is expected. So the same construction done in those
Problems is done here also. See carefully the final Tv and inclination taken there.
So assuming it standing on HP begin as usual.
450
(AVP
450
toVp)
y
1
X
1
F.V.
T.V.
Aux.F.V.
X Y
Problem 10: A triangular prism,
40 mm base side 60 mm axis
is lying on Hp on one rectangular face
with axis perpendicular to Vp.
One square pyramid is leaning on it’s face
centrally with axis // to vp. It’s base side is
30 mm & axis is 60 mm long resting on Hp
on one edge of base.Draw FV & TV of
both solids.Project another FV
on an AVP 450
inclined to VP.
Steps :
Draw Fv of lying prism
( an equilateral Triangle)
And Fv of a leaning pyramid.
Project Tv of both solids.
Draw x1y1 450
inclined to xy
and project aux.Fv on it.
Mark the distances of first FV
from first xy for the distances
of aux. Fv from x1y1 line.
Note the observer’s directions
Shown by arrows and further
steps carefully.
X Y
X1
Y1
o’
o
Fv
Tv
Aux.Tv
(AIP450
toHp)
450
Problem 11:A hexagonal prism of
base side 30 mm longand axis 40 mm long,
is standing on Hp on it’s base with
one base edge // to Vp.
A tetrahedron is placed centrally
on the top of it.The base of tetrahedron is
a triangle formed by joining alternate corners
of top of prism..Draw projections of both solids.
Project an auxiliary Tv on AIP 450
inclined to Hp.
TL
a’ b’ d’c’ e’f’
a
b c
d
ef
STEPS:
Draw a regular hexagon as Tv of
standing prism With one side // to xy
and name the top points.Project it’s Fv –
a rectangle and name it’s top.
Now join it’s alternate corners
a-c-e and the triangle formed is base
of a tetrahedron as said.
Locate center of this triangle
& locate apex o
Extending it’s axis line upward
mark apex o’
By cutting TL of edge of tetrahedron
equal to a-c. and complete Fv
of tetrahedron.
Draw an AIP ( x1y1) 450
inclined to xy
And project Aux.Tv on it by using similar
Steps like previous problem.
a1
b1
c1
d1
e1
f1
o1
X Y
X1
Y1
TL
AIP // to slant edge
Showing true length
i.e. a’- 1’
a’ b’ e’ c’ d’
1’ 2’5’ 3’4’
Fv
Tv
Aux.Tv
1
2
3
4
5
a
b
d
c
e
1 2
3
4
5
b1
c1
d1
e1
a1
Problem 12: A frustum of regular hexagonal pyramid is standing on it’s larger base
On Hp with one base side perpendicular to Vp.Draw it’s Fv & Tv.
Project it’s Aux.Tv on an AIP parallel to one of the slant edges showing TL.
Base side is 50 mm long , top side is 30 mm long and 50 mm is height of frustum.
1. SECTIONS OF SOLIDS.
2. DEVELOPMENT.
3. INTERSECTIONS.
ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS
OF
THE PRINCIPLES
OF
PROJECTIONS OF SOLIDES.
STUDY CAREFULLY
THE ILLUSTRATIONS GIVEN ON
NEXT SIX PAGES !
SECTIONING A SOLID.
An object ( here a solid ) is cut by
some imaginary cutting plane
to understand internal details of that
object.
The action of cutting is called
SECTIONING a solid
&
The plane of cutting is called
SECTION PLANE.
wo cutting actions means section planes are recommended.
Section Plane perpendicular to Vp and inclined to Hp.
( This is a definition of an Aux. Inclined Plane i.e. A.I.P.)
NOTE:- This section plane appears
as a straight line in FV.
Section Plane perpendicular to Hp and inclined to Vp.
( This is a definition of an Aux. Vertical Plane i.e. A.V.P.)
NOTE:- This section plane appears
as a straight line in TV.
emember:-
After launching a section plane
either in FV or TV, the part towards observer
is assumed to be removed.
As far as possible the smaller part is
assumed to be removed.
OBSERVER
ASSUME
UPPER PART
REMOVED SECTON
PLANE
IN
FV.
OBSERVER
ASSUME
LOWER PART
REMOVED
SECTON PLANE
IN TV.
(A)
(B)
ILLUSTRATION SHOWING
IMPORTANT TERMS
IN SECTIONING.
x y
TRUE SHAPE
Of SECTION
SECTION
PLANE
SECTION LINES
(450
to XY)
Apparent Shape
of section
SECTIONAL T.V.
For TV
For True Shape
Section Plane
Through Apex
Section Plane
Through Generators
Section Plane Parallel
to end generator.
Section Plane
Parallel to Axis.
Triangle Ellipse
Parabola
Hyperbola
Ellipse
Cylinder through
generators.
Sq. Pyramid through
all slant edges
Trapezium
Typical Section Planes
&
Typical Shapes
Of
Sections.
DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES OF SOLIDS.
MEANING:-
ASSUME OBJECT HOLLOW AND MADE-UP OF THIN SHEET. CUT OPEN IT FROM ONE SIDE AND
UNFOLD THE SHEET COMPLETELY. THEN THE SHAPE OF THAT UNFOLDED SHEET IS CALLED
DEVELOPMENT OF LATERLAL SUEFACES OF THAT OBJECT OR SOLID.
LATERLAL SURFACE IS THE SURFACE EXCLUDING SOLID’S TOP & BASE.
ENGINEERING APLICATION:
THERE ARE SO MANY PRODUCTS OR OBJECTS WHICH ARE DIFFICULT TO MANUFACTURE BY
CONVENTIONAL MANUFACTURING PROCESSES, BECAUSE OF THEIR SHAPES AND SIZES.
THOSE ARE FABRICATED IN SHEET METAL INDUSTRY BY USING
DEVELOPMENT TECHNIQUE. THERE IS A VAST RANGE OF SUCH OBJECTS.
EXAMPLES:-
Boiler Shells & chimneys, Pressure Vessels, Shovels, Trays, Boxes & Cartons, Feeding Hoppers,
Large Pipe sections, Body & Parts of automotives, Ships, Aeroplanes and many more.
WHAT IS
OUR OBJECTIVE
IN THIS TOPIC ?
To learn methods of development of surfaces of
different solids, their sections and frustums.
1. Development is different drawing than PROJECTIONS.
2. It is a shape showing AREA, means it’s a 2-D plain drawing.
3. Hence all dimensions of it must be TRUE dimensions.
4. As it is representing shape of an un-folded sheet, no edges can remain hidden
And hence DOTTED LINES are never shown on development.
But before going ahead,
note following
Important points.
Study illustrations given on next page carefully.
D
H
D
SS
H
L

 = R
L
+
3600
R=Base circle radius.
L=Slant height.
L= Slant edge.
S = Edge of base
L
S
S
H= Height S = Edge of base
H= Height D= base diameter
Development of lateral surfaces of different solids.
(Lateral surface is the surface excluding top & base)
Prisms: No.of Rectangles
Cylinder: A Rectangle
Cone: (Sector of circle) Pyramids: (No.of triangles)
Tetrahedron: Four Equilateral Triangles
All sides
equal in length
Cube: Six Squares.
L L

 = R
L
+
3600
R= Base circle radius of cone
L= Slant height of cone
L1 = Slant height of cut part.
Base side
Top side
L1
L= Slant edge of pyramid
L1 = Slant edge of cut part.
DEVELOPMENT OF
FRUSTUM OF CONE
DEVELOPMENT OF
FRUSTUM OF SQUARE PYRAMID
STUDY NEXT NINE PROBLEMS OF
SECTIONS & DEVELOPMENT
FRUSTUMS
X Y
X1
Y1
a’
b’e’
c’d’
A
B
C
E
D
a
e
d
b
c
TRUE
SHAPE
A B C D E A
DEVELOPMENT
a”
b”
c”d”
e”
Problem 1: A pentagonal prism , 30 mm base side & 50 mm axis
is standing on Hp on it’s base whose one side is perpendicular to Vp.
It is cut by a section plane 450
inclined to Hp, through mid point of axis.
Draw Fv, sec.Tv & sec. Side view. Also draw true shape of section and
Development of surface of remaining solid.
Solution Steps:for sectional views:
Draw three views of standing prism.
Locate sec.plane in Fv as described.
Project points where edges are getting
Cut on Tv & Sv as shown in illustration.
Join those points in sequence and show
Section lines in it.
Make remaining part of solid dark.
For True Shape:
Draw x1y1 // to sec. plane
Draw projectors on it from
cut points.
Mark distances of points
of Sectioned part from Tv,
on above projectors from
x1y1 and join in sequence.
Draw section lines in it.
It is required true shape.
For Development:
Draw development of entire solid. Name from
cut-open edge I.e. A. in sequence as shown.
Mark the cut points on respective edges.
Join them in sequence in st. lines.
Make existing parts dev.dark.
Y
h
a
b
c
d
e
g
f
X a’ b’ d’ e’c’ g’ f’h’
o’
X1
Y1
g” h”f” a”e” b”d” c”
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
G
H
SECTIONAL T.V
SECTIONAL S.V
TRUE
SH
APE
OF
SECTIO
N
DEVELOPMENT
SECTIO
N
PLANE
Problem 2: A cone, 50 mm base diameter and 70 mm axis is
standing on it’s base on Hp. It cut by a section plane 450
inclined
to Hp through base end of end generator.Draw projections,
sectional views, true shape of section and development of surfaces
of remaining solid.
Solution Steps:for sectional views:
Draw three views of standing cone.
Locate sec.plane in Fv as described.
Project points where generators are
getting Cut on Tv & Sv as shown in
illustration.Join those points in
sequence and show Section lines in it.
Make remaining part of solid dark.
For True Shape:
Draw x1y1 // to sec. plane
Draw projectors on it from
cut points.
Mark distances of points
of Sectioned part from Tv,
on above projectors from
x1y1 and join in sequence.
Draw section lines in it.
It is required true shape.
For Development:
Draw development of entire solid.
Name from cut-open edge i.e. A.
in sequence as shown.Mark the cut
points on respective edges.
Join them in sequence in
curvature. Make existing parts
dev.dark.
X Ye’a’ b’ d’c’ g’ f’h’
a’
h’b’
e’
c’g’
d’f’
o’
o’
Problem 3: A cone 40mm diameter and 50 mm axis is resting on one generator on Hp( lying on Hp)
which is // to Vp.. Draw it’s projections.It is cut by a horizontal section plane through it’s base
center. Draw sectional TV, development of the surface of the remaining part of cone.
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
G
H
O
a1
h1
g1
f1
e1
d1
c1
b1
o1
SECTIONAL T.V
DEVELOPMENT
(SHOWING TRUE SHAPE OF SECTION)
HORIZONTAL
SECTION PLANE
h
a
b
c
d
e
g
f
O
Follow similar solution steps for Sec.views - True shape – Development as per previous problem!
A.V.P300
inclined to Vp
Through mid-point of axis.
X Y
1,2
3,8
4,7
5,6
1
2
3 4
5
6
78
2
1
8
7
6
54
3
b’ f’a’ e’c’ d’
a
b
c
d
e
f
b’f’a’e’c’d’
a1
d1b1
e1
c1
f1
X1
Y1
AS SECTION PLANE IS IN T.V.,
CUT OPEN FROM BOUNDRY EDGE C1 FOR DEVELOPMENT.
TRUE SHAPE OF SECTION
C D E F A B C
DEVELOPMENT
SECTIONAL F.V.
Problem 4: A hexagonal prism. 30 mm base side &
55 mm axis is lying on Hp on it’s rect.face with axis
// to Vp. It is cut by a section plane normal to Hp and
300
inclined to Vp bisecting axis.
Draw sec. Views, true shape & development.
Use similar steps for sec.views & true shape.
NOTE: for development, always cut open object from
From an edge in the boundary of the view in which
sec.plane appears as a line.
Here it is Tv and in boundary, there is c1 edge.Hence
it is opened from c and named C,D,E,F,A,B,C.
Note the steps to locate
Points 1, 2 , 5, 6 in sec.Fv:
Those are transferred to
1st
TV, then to 1st
Fv and
Then on 2nd
Fv.
1’
2’
3’
4’
5’
6’
7’
7
1
5
4
3
2
6
7
1
6
5
4
3
2
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
4
4 5
3
6
2
7
1
A
B
C
D
E
A
F
G
O
O’
d’e’ c’f’ g’b’ a’
X Y
X1
Y1
TRUE SHAPE
F.V.
SECTIONAL
TOP VIEW.
DEVELOPMENT
Problem 5:A solid composed of a half-cone and half- hexagonal pyramid is
shown in figure.It is cut by a section plane 450
inclined to Hp, passing through
mid-point of axis.Draw F.v., sectional T.v.,true shape of section and
development of remaining part of the solid.
( take radius of cone and each side of hexagon 30mm long and axis 70mm.)
Note:
Fv & TV 8f two solids
sandwiched
Section lines style in both:
Development of
half cone & half pyramid:
o’
h
a
b
c
d
g
f
o e
a’ b’ c’ g’ d’f’ e’h’X Y
 = R
L
+
3600
R=Base circle radius.
L=Slant height.

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
O
1
3
2
4
7
6
5
L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1’
2’
3’ 4’5’
6’
7’
Problem 6: Draw a semicircle 0f 100 mm diameter and inscribe in it a largest
circle.If the semicircle is development of a cone and inscribed circle is some
curve on it, then draw the projections of cone showing that curve.
Solution Steps:
Draw semicircle of given diameter, divide it in 8 Parts and inscribe in it
a largest circle as shown.Name intersecting points 1, 2, 3 etc.
Semicircle being dev.of a cone it’s radius is slant height of cone.( L )
Then using above formula find R of base of cone. Using this data
draw Fv & Tv of cone and form 8 generators and name.
Take o -1 distance from dev.,mark on TL i.e.o’a’ on Fv & bring on o’b’
and name 1’ Similarly locate all points on Fv. Then project all on Tv
on respective generators and join by smooth curve.
L
TO DRAW PRINCIPAL
VIEWS FROM GIVEN
DEVELOPMENT.
h
a
b
c
d
g
f
e
o’
a’ b’ d’c’ g’ f’h’ e’
X Y
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
O L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
 = R
L
+
3600
R=Base circle radius.
L=Slant height.
1’
2’ 3’
4’
5’
6’
7’
1
2
3
4
5
67
Problem 7:Draw a semicircle 0f 100 mm diameter and inscribe in it a largest
rhombus.If the semicircle is development of a cone and rhombus is some curve
on it, then draw the projections of cone showing that curve.
TO DRAW PRINCIPAL
VIEWS FROM GIVEN
DEVELOPMENT.
Solution Steps:
Similar to previous
Problem:
a’ b’ c’ d’
o’
e’
a
b
c
d
o e
X Y
A
B
C
D
E
A
O
2
3
4
1
Problem 8: A half cone of 50 mm base diameter, 70 mm axis, is standing on it’s half base on HP with it’s flat face
parallel and nearer to VP.An inextensible string is wound round it’s surface from one point of base circle and
brought back to the same point.If the string is of shortest length, find it and show it on the projections of the cone.
1 2
3
4
1’
2’ 3’ 4’
TO DRAW A CURVE ON
PRINCIPAL VIEWS
FROM DEVELOPMENT. Concept: A string wound
from a point up to the same
Point, of shortest length
Must appear st. line on it’s
Development.
Solution steps:
Hence draw development,
Name it as usual and join
A to A This is shortest
Length of that string.
Further steps are as usual.
On dev. Name the points of
Intersections of this line with
Different generators.Bring
Those on Fv & Tv and join
by smooth curves.
Draw 4’ a’ part of string dotted
As it is on back side of cone.
X Y
e’a’ b’ d’c’ g’ f’h’
o’
h
a
b
c
d
e
g
f
O
DEVELOPMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
G
H
O
1
2
3
4
6 5
7
1’
2’
3’
4’
5’
6’
7’
1
2
3
4
56
7
HELIX CURVE
Problem 9: A particle which is initially on base circle of a cone, standing
on Hp, moves upwards and reaches apex in one complete turn around the cone.
Draw it’s path on projections of cone as well as on it’s development.
Take base circle diameter 50 mm and axis 70 mm long.
It’s a construction of curve
Helix of one turn on cone:
Draw Fv & Tv & dev.as usual
On all form generators & name.
Construction of curve Helix::
Show 8 generators on both views
Divide axis also in same parts.
Draw horizontal lines from those
points on both end generators.
1’ is a point where first horizontal
Line & gen. b’o’ intersect.
2’ is a point where second horiz.
Line & gen. c’o’ intersect.
In this way locate all points on Fv.
Project all on Tv.Join in curvature.
For Development:
Then taking each points true
Distance From resp.generator
from apex, Mark on development
& join.
INTERPENETRATION OF SOLIDS
WHEN ONE SOLID PENETRATES ANOTHER SOLID THEN THEIR SURFACES INTERSECT
AND
AT THE JUNCTION OF INTERSECTION A TYPICAL CURVE IS FORMED,
WHICH REMAINS COMMON TO BOTH SOLIDS.
THIS CURVE IS CALLED CURVE OF INTERSECTION
AND
IT IS A RESULT OF INTERPENETRATION OF SOLIDS.
PURPOSE OF DRAWING THESE CURVES:-
WHEN TWO OBJECTS ARE TO BE JOINED TOGATHER, MAXIMUM SURFACE CONTACT BETWEEN BOTH
BECOMES A BASIC REQUIREMENT FOR STRONGEST & LEAK-PROOF JOINT.
Curves of Intersections being common to both Intersecting solids,
show exact & maximum surface contact of both solids.
Study Following Illustrations Carefully.
Square Pipes. Circular Pipes. Square Pipes. Circular Pipes.
Minimum Surface Contact.
( Point Contact) (Maximum Surface Contact)
Lines of Intersections. Curves of Intersections.
A machine component having
two intersecting cylindrical
surfaces with the axis at
acute angle to each other.
Intersection of a Cylindrical
main and Branch Pipe.
Pump lid having shape of a
hexagonal Prism and
Hemi-sphere intersecting
each other.
Forged End of a
Connecting Rod.
A Feeding Hopper
In industry.
An Industrial Dust collector.
Intersection of two cylinders.
Two Cylindrical
surfaces.
SOME ACTUAL OBJECTS ARE SHOWN, SHOWING CURVES OF INTERSECTIONS.
BY WHITE ARROWS.
FOLLOWING CASES ARE SOLVED.
REFFER ILLUSTRATIONS
AND
NOTE THE COMMON
CONSTRUCTION
FOR ALL
1.CYLINDER TO CYLINDER2.
2.SQ.PRISM TO CYLINDER
3.CONE TO CYLINDER
4.TRIANGULAR PRISM TO CYLNDER
5.SQ.PRISM TO SQ.PRISM
6.SQ.PRISM TO SQ.PRISM
( SKEW POSITION)
7.SQARE PRISM TO CONE ( from top )
8.CYLINDER TO CONE
COMMON SOLUTION STEPS
One solid will be standing on HP
Other will penetrate horizontally.
Draw three views of standing solid.
Name views as per the illustrations.
Beginning with side view draw three
Views of penetrating solids also.
On it’s S.V. mark number of points
And name those(either letters or nos.)
The points which are on standard
generators or edges of standing solid,
( in S.V.) can be marked on respective
generators in Fv and Tv. And other
points from SV should be brought to
Tv first and then projecting upward
To Fv.
Dark and dotted line’s decision should
be taken by observing side view from
it’s right side as shown by arrow.
Accordingly those should be joined
by curvature or straight lines.
Note:
Incase cone is penetrating solid Side view is not necessary.
Similarly in case of penetration from top it is not
required.
X Y
1
2
3
4
a”
g” c”
e”
b”
f” d”
h”
4” 1”3” 2”1’ 2’4’ 3’
a’
b ’h’
c’g’
d’f’
a’
CASE 1.
CYLINDER STANDING
&
CYLINDER PENETRATING
Problem: A cylinder 50mm dia.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated
by another of 40 mm dia.and 70 mm axis horizontally Both axes intersect
& bisect each other. Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
X Y
a”
d” b”
c”
4” 1”3” 2”1’ 2’4’ 3’
1
2
3
4
a’
d’
b’
c’
a’
c’
d’
b’
CASE 2.
CYLINDER STANDING
&
SQ.PRISM PENETRATING
Problem: A cylinder 50mm dia.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated
by a square prism of 25 mm sides.and 70 mm axis, horizontally. Both axes
Intersect & bisect each other. All faces of prism are equally inclined to Hp.
Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
X Y
CASE 3.
CYLINDER STANDING
&
CONE PENETRATING
Problem: A cylinder of 80 mm diameter and 100 mm axis
is completely penetrated by a cone of 80 mm diameter and
120 mm long axis horizontally.Both axes intersect & bisect
each other. Draw projections showing curve of intersections.
1
2 8
3 7
4 6
5
7’
6’ 8’
1’ 5’
2’ 4’
3’
X Y
a”
d” b”
c”
a’
c’
a’
d’
b’
c’
d’
b’
1
2
3
4
1’ 2’4’ 3’ 4” 1”3” 2”
CASE 4.
SQ.PRISM STANDING
&
SQ.PRISM PENETRATING
Problem: A sq.prism 30 mm base sides.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated
by another square prism of 25 mm sides.and 70 mm axis, horizontally. Both axes
Intersects & bisect each other. All faces of prisms are equally inclined to Vp.
Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
X Y
1
2
3
4
4” 1”3” 2”1’ 2’4’ 3’
b
e
a
c
d
f
bb
c
d
e e
aa
f f
CASE 5. CYLINDER STANDING & TRIANGULAR PRISM PENETRATING
Problem: A cylinder 50mm dia.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated
by a triangular prism of 45 mm sides.and 70 mm axis, horizontally.
One flat face of prism is parallel to Vp and Contains axis of cylinder.
Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
X Y
a”
e”
b”
d”
1
2
3
4
1’ 2’4’ 3’ 4” 1”3” 2”
300
c”
f”
a’
f’
c’
d’
b’
e’
CASE 6.
SQ.PRISM STANDING
&
SQ.PRISM PENETRATING
(300
SKEW POSITION)
Problem: A sq.prism 30 mm base sides.and 70mm axis is
completely penetrated by another square prism of 25 mm side
s.and 70 mm axis, horizontally. Both axes Intersect & bisect
each other.Two faces of penetrating prism are 300
inclined to Hp.
Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
X Y
h
a
b
c
d
e
g
f
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
9
8
7
a’ b’h’ c’g’ d’f’ e’
5 mm OFF-SET
1’
2’
5’
4’
3’
6’
CASE 7.
CONE STANDING & SQ.PRISM PENETRATING
(BOTH AXES VERTICAL)
Problem: A cone70 mm base diameter and 90 mm axis
is completely penetrated by a square prism from top
with it’s axis // to cone’s axis and 5 mm away from it.
a vertical plane containing both axes is parallel to Vp.
Take all faces of sq.prism equally inclined to Vp.
Base Side of prism is 0 mm and axis is 100 mm long.
Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
CASE 8.
CONE STANDING
&
CYLINDER PENETRATING
h
a
b
c
d
e
g
f
a’ b’h’ c’g’ d’f’ e’ g” g”h” a”e” b”d” c”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X Y
o”o’
11
33
5 5
6
7,
8,22
4 4
Problem: A vertical cone, base diameter 75 mm and axis 100 mm long,
is completely penetrated by a cylinder of 45 mm diameter. The axis of the
cylinder is parallel to Hp and Vp and intersects axis of the cone at a point
28 mm above the base. Draw projections showing curves of intersection.
H
3-D DRAWINGS CAN BE DRAWN
IN NUMEROUS WAYS AS SHOWN BELOW.
ALL THESE DRAWINGS MAY BE CALLED
3-DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS,
OR PHOTOGRAPHIC
OR PICTORIAL DRAWINGS.
HERE NO SPECIFIC RELATION
AMONG H, L & D AXES IS MENTAINED.
H
NOW OBSERVE BELOW GIVEN DRAWINGS.
ONE CAN NOTE SPECIFIC INCLINATION
AMONG H, L & D AXES.
ISO MEANS SAME, SIMILAR OR EQUAL.
HERE ONE CAN FIND
EDUAL INCLINATION AMONG H, L & D AXES.
EACH IS 1200
INCLINED WITH OTHER TWO.
HENCE IT IS CALLED ISOMETRIC DRAWING
H
L
IT IS A TYPE OF PICTORIAL PROJECTION
IN WHICH ALL THREE DIMENSIONS OF
AN OBJECT ARE SHOWN IN ONE VIEW AND
IF REQUIRED, THEIR ACTUAL SIZES CAN BE
MEASURED DIRECTLY FROM IT.
IN THIS 3-D DRAWING OF AN OBJECT,
ALL THREE DIMENSIONAL AXES ARE
MENTAINED AT EQUAL INCLINATIONS
WITH EACH OTHER.( 1200
)
PURPOSE OF ISOMETRIC DRAWING IS TO UNDERSTAND
OVERALL SHAPE, SIZE & APPEARANCE OF AN OBJECT PRIOR TO IT’S PRODUCTION.
ISOMETRIC DRAWING TYPICAL CONDITION.
ISOMETRIC AXES, LINES AND PLANES:
The three lines AL, AD and AH, meeting at point A and making
1200
angles with each other are termed Isometric Axes.
The lines parallel to these axes are called Isometric Lines.
The planes representing the faces of of the cube as well as
other planes parallel to these planes are called Isometric Planes.
ISOMETRIC SCALE:
When one holds the object in such a way that all three dimensions
are visible then in the process all dimensions become proportionally
inclined to observer’s eye sight and hence appear apparent in lengths.
This reduction is 0.815 or 9 / 11 ( approx.) It forms a reducing scale which
Is used to draw isometric drawings and is called Isometric scale.
In practice, while drawing isometric projection, it is necessary to convert
true lengths into isometric lengths for measuring and marking the sizes.
This is conveniently done by constructing an isometric scale as described
on next page.
H
A
SOME IMPORTANT TERMS:
ISOMETRIC VIEW ISOMETRIC PROJECTION
H H
TYPES OF ISOMETRIC DRAWINGS
Drawn by using Isometric scale
( Reduced dimensions )
Drawn by using True scale
( True dimensions )
450
300
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
TRUE
LENG
THS
ISOM. LENGTHS
Isometric scale [ Line AC ]
required for Isometric Projection
A B
C
D
CONSTRUCTION OF ISOM.SCALE.
From point A, with line AB draw 300
and
450
inclined lines AC & AD resp on AD.
Mark divisions of true length and from
each division-point draw vertical lines
upto AC line.
The divisions thus obtained on AC
give lengths on isometric scale.
SHAPE Isometric view if the Shape is
F.V. or T.V.
TRIANGLE
A
B
RECTANGLE
D
C
H
L
D
A
B
C D
A
B
D
C
L
H
L
D
L
1
2
3
A
B
3
1
2
A
B
3
1
2
A
B
H
L
D L
1
2 3
4
PENTAGON
A
B C
D
E 1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
ISOMETRIC
OF
PLANE FIGURES
AS THESE ALL ARE
2-D FIGURES
WE REQUIRE ONLY TWO
ISOMETRIC AXES.
IF THE FIGURE IS FRONT
VIEW, H & L AXES ARE
REQUIRED.
IF THE FIGURE IS TOP
VIEW, D & L AXES ARE
REQUIRED.
Shapes containing
Inclined lines should
be enclosed in a
rectangle as shown.
Then first draw isom.
of that rectangle and
then inscribe that
shape as it is.
1
1
4
2
3
A B
D C
1
4
2
3
A
BD
C
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF A
CIRCLE IF IT IS A TV OR FV.
FIRST ENCLOSE IT IN A SQUARE.
IT’S ISOMETRIC IS A RHOMBUS WITH
D & L AXES FOR TOP VIEW.
THEN USE H & L AXES FOR ISOMETRIC
WHEN IT IS FRONT VIEW.
FOR CONSTRUCTION USE RHOMBUS
METHOD SHOWN HERE. STUDY IT.
2
25 R
100 MM
50 MM
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF THE FIGURE
SHOWN WITH DIMENTIONS (ON RIGHT SIDE)
CONSIDERING IT FIRST AS F.V. AND THEN T.V.
IF TOP VIEW
IF FRONT VIEW
3
CIRCLE
HEXAGON
SEMI CIRCLE
ISOMETRIC
OF
PLANE FIGURES
AS THESE ALL ARE
2-D FIGURES
WE REQUIRE ONLY
TWO ISOMETRIC
AXES.
IF THE FIGURE IS
FRONT VIEW, H & L
AXES ARE REQUIRED.
IF THE FIGURE IS TOP
VIEW, D & L AXES
ARE REQUIRED.
SHAPE IF F.V. IF T.V.
For Isometric of Circle/Semicircle use Rhombus method. Construct Rhombus
of sides equal to Diameter of circle always. ( Ref. topic ENGG. CURVES.)
For Isometric of
Circle/Semicircle
use Rhombus method.
Construct it of sides equal
to diameter of circle always.
( Ref. Previous two pages.)
4
D
L
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
D L
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF
PENTAGONAL PYRAMID
STANDING ON H.P.
(Height is added from center of pentagon)
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF BASE OF
PENTAGONAL PYRAMID
STANDING ON H.P.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
5
H
L
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF
PENTAGONALL PRISM
LYING ON H.P.
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF
HEXAGONAL PRISM
STANDING ON H.P.
6
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
CYLINDER LYING ON H.P.
CYLINDER STANDING ON H.P.
7
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
HALF CYLINDER
LYING ON H.P.
( with flat face // to H.P.)
HALF CYLINDER
STANDING ON H.P.
( ON IT’S SEMICIRCULAR BASE)
8
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF
A FRUSTOM OF SQUARE PYRAMID
STANDING ON H.P. ON IT’S LARGER BASE.
40 20
60
X Y
FV
TV
9
ISOMETRIC VIEW
OF
FRUSTOM OF PENTAGONAL PYRAMID
40
20
60
STUDY
ILLUSTRATION
1
2 3
4
y
A
B
C
D
E
40 20
60
x
FV
TV
PROJECTIONS OF FRUSTOM OF
PENTAGONAL PYRAMID ARE GIVEN.
DRAW IT’S ISOMETRIC VIEW.
SOLUTION STEPS:
FIRST DRAW ISOMETRIC
OF IT’S BASE.
THEN DRAWSAME SHAPE
AS TOP, 60 MM ABOVE THE
BASE PENTAGON CENTER.
THEN REDUCE THE TOP TO
20 MM SIDES AND JOIN WITH
THE PROPER BASE CORNERS.
10
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF
A FRUSTOM OF CONE
STANDING ON H.P. ON IT’S LARGER BASE.
FV
TV
40 20
60
X Y
11
50
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
PROBLEM: A SQUARE PYRAMID OF 30 MM BASE SIDES AND
50 MM LONG AXIS, IS CENTRALLY PLACED ON THE TOP OF A
CUBE OF 50 MM LONG EDGES.DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF THE PAIR.
50
30
12
a
b
co
p
p
a
b
c
o
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
PROBLEM: A TRIANGULAR PYRAMID
OF 30 MM BASE SIDES AND 50 MM
LONG AXIS, IS CENTRALLY PLACED
ON THE TOP OF A CUBE OF 50 MM
LONG EDGES.
DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF THE PAIR.
SOLUTION HINTS.
TO DRAW ISOMETRIC OF A CUBE IS SIMPLE. DRAW IT AS USUAL.
BUT FOR PYRAMID AS IT’S BASE IS AN EQUILATERAL TRIANGLE,
IT CAN NOT BE DRAWN DIRECTLY.SUPPORT OF IT’S TV IS REQUIRED.
SO DRAW TRIANGLE AS A TV, SEPARATELY AND NAME VARIOUS POINTS AS SHOWN.
AFTER THIS PLACE IT ON THE TOP OF CUBE AS SHOWN.
THEN ADD HEIGHT FROM IT’S CENTER AND COMPLETE IT’S ISOMETRIC AS SHOWN.
13
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
50
50
30 D
30
10
30
+
FV
TV
PROBLEM:
A SQUARE PLATE IS PIERCED THROUGH CENTRALLY
BY A CYLINDER WHICH COMES OUT EQUALLY FROM BOTH FACES
OF PLATE. IT’S FV & TV ARE SHOWN. DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW.
14
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
30
10
30
60 D
40 SQUARE
FV
TV
PROBLEM:
A CIRCULAR PLATE IS PIERCED THROUGH CENTRALLY
BY A SQUARE PYRAMID WHICH COMES OUT EQUALLY FROM BOTH FACES
OF PLATE. IT’S FV & TV ARE SHOWN. DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW.
15
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
X Y
30 D50 D
10
40
20
40
FV
TV
F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
16
P
r
R
R
r
P
C
C = Center of Sphere.
P = Point of contact
R = True Radius of Sphere
r = Isometric Radius.
R
r
Iso-Direction
P
r
R
C
r
r
ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS OF SPHERE & HEMISPHERE
r
R
450
300
TO DRAW ISOMETRIC PROJECTION
OF A HEMISPHERE
TO DRAW ISOMETRIC PROJECTION OF A SPHERE
1. FIRST DRAW ISOMETRIC OF SQUARE PLATE.
2. LOCATE IT’S CENTER. NAME IT P.
3. FROM PDRAW VERTICAL LINE UPWARD, LENGTH ‘ r mm’
AND LOCATE CENTER OF SPHERE “C”
4. ‘C’ AS CENTER, WITH RADIUS ‘R’ DRAW CIRCLE.
THIS IS ISOMETRIC PROJECTION OF A SPHERE.
Adopt same procedure.
Draw lower semicircle only.
Then around ‘C’ construct
Rhombus of Sides equal to
Isometric Diameter.
For this use iso-scale.
Then construct ellipse in
this Rhombus as usual
And Complete
Isometric-Projection
of Hemi-sphere.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
Isom. Scale
17
P
r
R
r
r
50 D
30 D
50 D
50
r
R
450
300
PROBLEM:
A HEMI-SPHERE IS CENTRALLY PLACED
ON THE TOP OF A FRUSTOM OF CONE.
DRAW ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS OF THE ASSEMBLY.
FIRST CONSTRUCT ISOMETRIC SCALE.
USE THIS SCALE FOR ALL DIMENSIONS
IN THIS PROBLEM.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
18
a
b c
d
1
2
3
4
o
1’
4’3’
2’
1
2
4
3
X Y
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
A SQUARE PYRAMID OF 40 MM BASE SIDES AND 60 MM AXIS
IS CUT BY AN INCLINED SECTION PLANE THROUGH THE MID POINT
OF AXIS AS SHOWN.DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF SECTION OF PYRAMID.
19
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
X Y
50
20
25
25 20
O
O
F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
20
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
x y
FV
TV
35
35
10
302010
40
70
O
O
F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
21
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
x y
FV
SV
TV
30
30
10
30 10 30
ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL
F.V. & T.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
22
x y
FV SV
TV
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
10
40 60
60
40
ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL
F.V. & T.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
24
x y
FV SV
TV
ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL
40 60
60
40
10
F.V. & T.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
25
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
L.H.SIDE VIEW
x y
20
20
20
50
20 20 20
20
30
O
O
F.V. & T.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
26
40 20
30 SQUARE
20
50
60
30
10
F.V.
S.V.
O
O
F.V. and S.V.of an object are given.
Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
27
40
10
50
80
10
30 D 45
FV
TV
O
O
F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
28
O
FV
TV
X YO
40
10
25
25
30 R
10
100
103010
20 D
F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
29
O
O
10
30
50
10
35
20 D
30 D
60 D
FV
TV
X Y
RECT.
SLOT
F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
30
O
10
O
40
25 15
25
25
25
2580
10
F.V. S.V.
F.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
31
O
450
X
TV
FV
Y
30 D
30
40
40
40
15
O
F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
32
O
O
20
20
15
30
60
30
20
20
40
100
50
HEX PART
F.V. and S.V.of an object are given.
Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
33
O
O
10
10
30
10
30
4020
80
30
F.V.
T.V.
X Y
F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
34
FV LSV
X Y
10
O
FV LSV
X Y
10 10 15
25
25
1050O
F.V. and S.V.of an object are given.
Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
35
36
NOTE THE SMALL CHZNGE IN 2ND
FV & SV.
DRAW ISOMETRIC ACCORDINGLY.
YX
F.V. LEFT S.V.
30 20 2010
15
15
15
30
50
10
15
O
O
F.V. and S.V.of an object are given.
Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
37
30
40
10
60
30
40
F.V. S.V.
O
O
F.V. and S.V.of an object are given.
Draw it’s isometric view.
Z
STUDY
ILLUSTRATIONS
38
PROJECTIONS OF STRAIGHT LINES
1. A line AB is in first quadrant. Its ends A and B are 25mm and 65mm in front of VP
respectively. The distance between the end projectors is 75mm. The line is inclined at 300
to
VP and its VT is 10mm above HP. Draw the projections of AB and determine its true length
and HT and inclination with HP.
2. A line AB measures 100mm. The projections through its VT and end A are 50mm apart.
The point A is 35mm above HP and 25mm in front VP. The VT is 15mm above HP. Draw the
projections of line and determine its HT and Inclinations with HP and VP.
3. Draw the three views of line AB, 80mm long, when it is lying in profile plane and inclined
at 350
to HP. Its end A is in HP and 20mm in front of VP, while other end B is in first
quadrant. Determine also its traces.
4. A line AB 75 mm long, has its one end A in VP and other end B 15mm above HP and
50mm in front of VP. Draw the projections of line when sum of inclinations with HP and VP
is 900
. Determine the true angles of inclination and show traces.
5. A line AB is 75mm long and lies in an auxiliary inclined plane (AIP) which makes an
angle of 450
with the HP. The front view of the line measures 55mm. The end A is in VP and
20mm above HP. Draw the projections of the line AB and find its inclination with HP and
VP.
6. Line AB lies in an AVP 500
inclined to Vp while line is 300
inclined to Hp. End A is 10
mm above Hp. & 15 mm in front of Vp.Distance between projectors is 50 mm.Draw
projections and find TL and inclination of line with Vp. Locate traces also.
EXERCISES:
APPLICATIONS OF LINES
Room , compound wall cases
7) A room measures 8m x 5m x4m high. An electric point hang in the center of ceiling and 1m
below it. A thin straight wire connects the point to the switch in one of the corners of the room and
2m above the floor. Draw the projections of the and its length and slope angle with the floor.
8) A room is of size 6m5m3.5m high. Determine graphically the real distance between the top
corner and its diagonally apposite bottom corners. consider appropriate scale
9) Two pegs A and B are fixed in each of the two adjacent side walls of the rectangular room 3m x
4m sides. Peg A is 1.5m above the floor, 1.2m from the longer side wall and is protruding 0.3m
from the wall. Peg B is 2m above the floor, 1m from other side wall and protruding 0.2m from the
wall. Find the distance between the ends of the two pegs. Also find the height of the roof if the
shortest distance between peg A and and center of the ceiling is 5m.
10) Two fan motors hang from the ceiling of a hall 12m x 5m x 8m high at heights of 4m and 6m
respectively. Determine graphically the distance between the motors. Also find the distance of
each motor from the top corner joining end and front wall.
11) Two mangos on a two tree are 2m and 3m above the ground level and 1.5m and 2.5m from a
0.25m thick wall but on apposite sides of it. Distances being measured from the center line of the
wall. The distance between the apples, measured along ground and parallel to the wall is 3m.
Determine the real distance between the ranges.
POLES,ROADS, PIPE LINES,, NORTH- EAST-SOUTH WEST, SLOPE AND GRADIENT CASES.
12)Three vertical poles AB, CD and EF are lying along the corners of equilateral triangle lying on the
ground of 100mm sides. Their lengths are 5m, 8m and 12m respectively. Draw their projections and find
real distance between their top ends.
13) A straight road going up hill from a point A due east to another point B is 4km long and has a slop of
250
. Another straight road from B due 300
east of north to a point C is also 4 kms long but going
downward and has slope of 150
. Find the length and slope of the straight road connecting A and C.
14) An electric transmission line laid along an uphill from the hydroelectric power station due west to a
substation is 2km long and has a slop of 300
. Another line from the substation, running W 450
N to
village, is 4km long and laid on the ground level. Determine the length and slope of the proposed
telephone line joining the the power station and village.
15) Two wire ropes are attached to the top corner of a 15m high building. The other end of one wire rope
is attached to the top of the vertical pole 5m high and the rope makes an angle of depression of 450
. The
rope makes 300
angle of depression and is attached to the top of a 2m high pole. The pole in the top view
are 2m apart. Draw the projections of the wire ropes.
16) Two hill tops A and B are 90m and 60m above the ground level respectively. They are observed from
the point C, 20m above the ground. From C angles and elevations for A and B are 450
and 300
respectively. From B angle of elevation of A is 450
. Determine the two distances between A, B and C.
PROJECTIONS OF PLANES:-
1. A thin regular pentagon of 30mm sides has one side // to Hp and 300
inclined to Vp while its surface is 450
inclines to Hp. Draw its projections.
2. A circle of 50mm diameter has end A of diameter AB in Hp and AB diameter 300 inclined to Hp. Draw its
projections if
a) the TV of same diameter is 450
inclined to Vp, OR b) Diameter AB is in profile plane.
3. A thin triangle PQR has sides PQ = 60mm. QR = 80mm. and RP = 50mm. long respectively. Side PQ rest on
ground and makes 300
with Vp. Point P is 30mm in front of Vp and R is 40mm above ground. Draw its
projections.
4. An isosceles triangle having base 60mm long and altitude 80mm long appears as an equilateral triangle of
60mm sides with one side 300
inclined to XY in top view. Draw its projections.
5. A 300
-600
set-square of 40mm long shortest side in Hp appears is an isosceles triangle in its TV. Draw
projections of it and find its inclination with Hp.
6. A rhombus of 60mm and 40mm long diagonals is so placed on Hp that in TV it appears as a square of 40mm
long diagonals. Draw its FV.
7. Draw projections of a circle 40 mm diameter resting on Hp on a point A on the circumference with its surface 300
inclined to Hp and 450
to Vp.
8. A top view of plane figure whose surface is perpendicular to Vp and 600
inclined to Hp is regular hexagon of 30mm
sides with one side 300
inclined to xy.Determine it’s true shape.
9. Draw a rectangular abcd of side 50mm and 30mm with longer 350
with XY, representing TV of a quadrilateral plane
ABCD. The point A and B are 25 and 50mm above Hp respectively. Draw a suitable Fv and determine its true
shape.
10.Draw a pentagon abcde having side 500
to XY, with the side ab =30mm, bc = 60mm, cd =50mm, de = 25mm and
angles abc 1200
, cde 1250
. A figure is a TV of a plane whose ends A,B and E are 15, 25 and 35mm above Hp
respectively. Complete the projections and determine the true shape of the plane figure.0
PROJECTIONS OF SOLIDS
1. Draw the projections of a square prism of 25mm sides base and 50mm long axis. The prism is
resting with one of its corners in VP and axis inclined at 300
to VP and parallel to HP.
2. A pentagonal pyramid, base 40mm side and height 75mm rests on one edge on its base on the
ground so that the highest point in the base is 25mm. above ground. Draw the projections when the
axis is parallel to Vp. Draw an another front view on an AVP inclined at 300
to edge on which it is
resting so that the base is visible.
3. A square pyramid of side 30mm and axis 60 mm long has one of its slant edges inclined at 450
to
HP and a plane containing that slant edge and axis is inclined at 300
to VP. Draw the projections.
4. A hexagonal prism, base 30mm sides and axis 75mm long, has an edge of the base parallel to the
HP and inclined at 450
to the VP. Its axis makes an angle of 600
with the HP. Draw its projections.
Draw another top view on an auxiliary plane inclined at 500
to the HP.
5. Draw the three views of a cone having base 50 mm diameter and axis 60mm long It is resting on a
ground on a point of its base circle. The axis is inclined at 400
to ground and at 300
to VP.
6. Draw the projections of a square prism resting on an edge of base on HP. The axis makes an angle
of 300
with VP and 450
with HP. Take edge of base 25mm and axis length as 125mm.
7. A right pentagonal prism is suspended from one of its corners of base. Draw the projections (three
views) when the edge of base apposite to the point of suspension makes an angle of 300
to VP. Take
base side 30mm and axis length 60mm.s
8. A cone base diameter 50mm and axis 70mm long, is freely suspended from a point on the rim of its
base. Draw the front view and the top view when the plane containing its axis is perpendicular to HP
and makes an angle of 450
with VP.
9. A cube of 40mm long edges is resting on the ground with its vertical faces equally inclined to
the VP. A right circular cone base 25mm diameter and height 50mm is placed centrally on the top
of the cube so that their axis are in a straight line. Draw the front and top views of the solids.
Project another top view on an AIP making 450
with the HP
10.A square bar of 30mm base side and 100mm long is pushed through the center of a cylindrical
block of 30mm thickness and 70mm diameter, so that the bar comes out equally through the block
on either side. Draw the front view, top view and side view of the solid when the axis of the bar is
inclined at 300
to HP and parallel to VP, the sides of a bar being 450
to VP.
11.A cube of 50mm long edges is resting on the ground with its vertical faces equally inclined to
VP. A hexagonal pyramid , base 25mm side and axis 50mm long, is placed centrally on the top of
the cube so that their axes are in a straight line and two edges of its base are parallel to VP. Draw
the front view and the top view of the solids, project another top view on an AIP making an angle
of 450
with the HP.
12.A circular block, 75mm diameter and 25mm thick is pierced centrally through its flat faces by a
square prism of 35mm base sides and 125mm long axis, which comes out equally on both sides of
the block. Draw the projections of the solids when the combined axis is parallel to HP and inclined
at 300
to VP, and a face of the prism makes an angle of 300
with HP. Draw side view also.
CASES OF COMPOSITE SOLIDS.
1) A square pyramid of 30mm base sides and 50mm long axis is resting on its base in HP. Edges of base is equally
inclined to VP. It is cut by section plane perpendicular to VP and inclined at 450 to HP. The plane cuts the axis at 10mm
above the base. Draw the projections of the solid and show its development.
2) A hexagonal pyramid, edge of base 30mm and axis 75mm, is resting on its edge on HP which is perpendicular toVP.
The axis makes an angle of 300to HP. the solid is cut by a section plane perpendicular to both HP and VP, and passing
through the mid point of the axis. Draw the projections showing the sectional view, true shape of section and
development of surface of a cut pyramid containing apex.
3) A cone of base diameter 60mm and axis 80mm, long has one of its generators in VP and parallel to HP. It is cut by a
section plane perpendicular HP and parallel to VP. Draw the sectional FV, true shape of section and develop the lateral
surface of the cone containing the apex.
4) A cube of 50mm long slid diagonal rest on ground on one of its corners so that the solid diagonal is vertical and an
edge through that corner is parallel to VP. A horizontal section plane passing through midpoint of vertical solid diagonal
cuts the cube. Draw the front view of the sectional top view and development of surface.
5) A vertical cylinder cut by a section plane perpendicular to VP and inclined to HP in such a way that the true shape of
a section is an ellipse with 50mm and 80mm as its minor and major axes. The smallest generator on the cylinder is
20mm long after it is cut by a section plane. Draw the projections and show the true shape of the section. Also find the
inclination of the section plane with HP. Draw the development of the lower half of the cylinder.
6) A cube of 75mm long edges has its vertical faces equally inclined to VP. It is cut by a section plane perpendicular to
VP such that the true shape of section is regular hexagon. Determine the inclination of cutting plane with HP.Draw the
sectional top view and true shape of section.
7) The pyramidal portion of a half pyramidal and half conical solid has a base ofthree sides, each 30mm long. The
length of axis is 80mm. The solid rest on its base with the side of the pyramid base perpendicular to VP. A plane parallel
to VP cuts the solid at a distance of 10mm from the top view of the axis. Draw sectional front view and true shape of
section. Also develop the lateral surface of the cut solid.
SECTION & DEVELOPMENT
8) A hexagonal pyramid having edge to edge distance 40mm and height 60mm has its base in HP and an edge
of base perpendicular to VP. It is cut by a section plane, perpendicular to VP and passing through a point on
the axis 10mm from the base. Draw three views of solid when it is resting on its cut face in HP, resting the
larger part of the pyramid. Also draw the lateral surface development of the pyramid.
9) A cone diameter of base 50mm and axis 60mm long is resting on its base on ground. It is cut by a section
plane perpendicular to VP in such a way that the true shape of a section is a parabola having base 40mm. Draw
three views showing section, true shape of section and development of remaining surface of cone removing its
apex.
10) A hexagonal pyramid, base 50mm side and axis 100mm long is lying on ground on one of its triangular
faces with axis parallel to VP. A vertical section plane, the HT of which makes an angle of 300 with the
reference line passes through center of base, the apex being retained. Draw the top view, sectional front view
and the development of surface of the cut pyramid containing apex.
11) Hexagonal pyramid of 40mm base side and height 80mm is resting on its base on ground. It is cut by a
section plane parallel to HP and passing through a point on the axis 25mm from the apex. Draw the projections
of the cut pyramid. A particle P, initially at the mid point of edge of base, starts moving over the surface and
reaches the mid point of apposite edge of the top face. Draw the development of the cut pyramid and show the
shortest path of particle P. Also show the path in front and top views
12) A cube of 65 mm long edges has its vertical face equally inclined to the VP. It is cut by a section plane,
perpendicular to VP, so that the true shape of the section is a regular hexagon, Determine the inclination of the
cutting plane with the HP and draw the sectional top view and true shape of the section.
PROBLEM 14:-Two objects, a flower (A) and an orange (B) are within a rectangular compound wall,
whose P & Q are walls meeting at 900
. Flower A is 1.5M & 1 M from walls P & Q respectively.
Orange B is 3.5M & 5.5M from walls P & Q respectively. Drawing projection, find distance between
them If flower is 1.5 M and orange is 3.5 M above the ground. Consider suitable scale..
a
b
a’
b’ b’1
x y
1.5M
3,5M
1M
1.5M
3.6M
5.5M
Wall P
Wall Q
TL (answer)
A
B
Wall Q
Wall P
F.V.
a
b
a’
b’
3.00 m
1.5m
2.6m
1.2m
1.5m
b1’
Wall thickness
0.3m
WALL
X Y(GL)
REAL DISTANCE BETWEEN
MANGOS A & B IS = a’ b1’
PROBLEM 15 :- Two mangos on a tree A & B are 1.5 m and 3.00 m above ground
and those are 1.2 m & 1.5 m from a 0.3 m thick wall but on opposite sides of it.
If the distance measured between them along the ground and parallel to wall is 2.6 m,
Then find real distance between them by drawing their projections.
TV
0.3M THICKA
B
100
25
45 65
a
b
c
o
a’b’ c’
o’
TL1
TL2
TL3
c1’b1’ a1’
PROBLEM 16 :-
oa, ob & oc are three lines, 25mm, 45mm and 65mm
long respectively.All equally inclined and the shortest
is vertical.This fig. is TV of three rods OA, OB and OC
whose ends A,B & C are on ground and end O is 100mm
above ground. Draw their projections and find length of
each along with their angles with ground.
A
O
B
C
Fv
Tv
Answers:
TL1 TL2 & TL3
x y
PROBLEM 17:- A pipe line from point A has a downward gradient 1:5 and it runs due South - East.
Another Point B is 12 M from A and due East of A and in same level of A. Pipe line from B runs
150
Due East of South and meets pipe line from A at point C.
Draw projections and find length of pipe line from B and it’s inclination with ground.
A
B
C
Downward Gradient 1:5
1
5
12 M
N
E
S
1
5
a b
c
x y
150
450
12m
N
EAST
SOUTH
W
DUE
SOUTH
-EAST
a’ b’
c’2c’ c’1
TL ( answer)
TL ( answer) = a’ c’2
= Inclination of pipe line BC
FV
TV
PROBLEM 18: A person observes two objects, A & B, on the ground, from a tower, 15 M high,
At the angles of depression 300
& 450
. Object A is is due North-West direction of observer and
object B is due West direction. Draw projections of situation and find distance of objects from
observer and from tower also.
N
W
S
A
B
O
300
450
W
S
E
N
o
a
b
o’
a’1 b’a’
300
450
15M
Answers:
Distances of objects
from observe
o’a’1 & o’b’
From tower
oa & ob
7.5M10 M
FV
TV
B
4.5 M
300
450
15 M
A
C
PROBLEM 19:-Guy ropes of two poles fixed at 4.5m and 7.5 m above ground,
are attached to a corner of a building 15 M high, make 300
and 450
inclinations
with ground respectively.The poles are 10 M apart. Determine by drawing their
projections,Length of each rope and distance of poles from building.
c’
a b
c
a’
b’
c1’ c’2
12M
15M
4.5M
7.5M
300
450
Answers:
Length of Rope BC= b’c’2
Length of Rope AC= a’c’1
Distances of poles from building = ca & cb
1.2 M
0.7
M
4 M
FV
TV
PROBLEM 20:- A tank of 4 M height is to be strengthened by four stay rods from each corner
by fixing their other ends to the flooring, at a point 1.2 M and 0.7 M from two adjacent walls respectively,
as shown. Determine graphically length and angle of each rod with flooring.
A
B
0.7 M
1.2 M
a
b
a’
b’b’1
True Length
Answers:
Length of each rod
= a’b’1
Angle with Hp.
=
X Y
TV
FV
A
B
C
D
Hook
TV
PROBLEM 21:- A horizontal wooden platform 2 M long and 1.5 M wide is supported by four chains
from it’s corners and chains are attached to a hook 5 M above the center of the platform.
Draw projections of the objects and determine length of each chain along with it’s inclination
with ground.
H
(GL)
a b
cd
h
a’d’ b’c’
h’
5 M
2 M
1.5 M
x y
TL
d’1
Answers:
Length of each chain
= a’d’1
Angle with Hp.
=
PROBLEM 22.
A room is of size 6.5m L ,5m D,3.5m high.
An electric bulb hangs 1m below the center of ceiling.
A switch is placed in one of the corners of the room, 1.5m above the flooring.
Draw the projections an determine real distance between the bulb and switch.
Switch
Bulb
Front wall
Ceiling
Side wall
Observer
TV
L D
H
B- Bulb
A-Switch
Answer :- a’ b’1
a
b
x y
a’
b’ b’1
6.5m
3.5m
5m
1m
1.5
PROBLEM 23:-
A PICTURE FRAME 2 M WIDE AND 1 M TALL IS RESTING ON HORIZONTAL WALL RAILING
MAKES 350
INCLINATION WITH WALL. IT IS ATTAACHED TO A HOOK IN THE WALL BY TWO STRINGS.
THE HOOK IS 1.5 M ABOVE WALL RAILING. DETERMINE LENGTH OF EACH CHAIN AND TRUE ANGLE BETWEEN THEM
350
1.5 M
1 M
2 M
Wall railing
FV
TV
A
B
C
D
ad
h
bc
a1
b1
a’b’
c’d’ (wall railing)
(frame)
(chains)
Answers:
Length of each chain= hb1
True angle between chains =
(chains)
X Y
h’
1.5M
1M

More Related Content

PPS
1080093 634446814277798750
PPT
Eg whole subject
PPT
Full engineering-graphics
PPTX
Engneering drawing
PPTX
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS-ED-FOR-BE/B.TECH-STUDENTS
PDF
Engineering graphics A to Z
PPT
( Engineering-graphics) for-be-students .(EG).
PPS
Engg graphics complete course
 
1080093 634446814277798750
Eg whole subject
Full engineering-graphics
Engneering drawing
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS-ED-FOR-BE/B.TECH-STUDENTS
Engineering graphics A to Z
( Engineering-graphics) for-be-students .(EG).
Engg graphics complete course
 

What's hot (20)

PPT
Engineering Graphics Notes gtu (EG)
PPT
Engineering Graphics PPT By A.D Rajput
PPSX
Engineering graphics
PPS
Mechanical Drafting (Engineering Drawing)- Complete syllabus
PPTX
Introduction To Engineering Graphics
PPS
Engineering graphics by harshid panchal
PPSX
Engineering graphics
 
PDF
Engg. drawing lab manual
PPT
ENGINEERING DRAWING JNTUH
 
PPTX
Drawing tools unit 1
PDF
Scales pp
PPT
Slideshare Engineering Graphics
PPT
Chapter 4 isometric_drawing
PPT
Scales
PDF
Engineering graphics
PPTX
Engineering graphics 2110013
PDF
Ge6152 engineering graphics jan 2014 an
PPTX
4.scale engineering108.com
PPT
Lesson 2 orthographic drawing - tdj3 m0
PPS
Dimensioning
Engineering Graphics Notes gtu (EG)
Engineering Graphics PPT By A.D Rajput
Engineering graphics
Mechanical Drafting (Engineering Drawing)- Complete syllabus
Introduction To Engineering Graphics
Engineering graphics by harshid panchal
Engineering graphics
 
Engg. drawing lab manual
ENGINEERING DRAWING JNTUH
 
Drawing tools unit 1
Scales pp
Slideshare Engineering Graphics
Chapter 4 isometric_drawing
Scales
Engineering graphics
Engineering graphics 2110013
Ge6152 engineering graphics jan 2014 an
4.scale engineering108.com
Lesson 2 orthographic drawing - tdj3 m0
Dimensioning
Ad

Similar to Engineering graphics Sheet for BE Students (20)

PPT
EG PPT.ppt_Engineering Graphics_presentation
PPT
Engineering_Graphics.ppt
PPT
BE sem 1 Engineering Graphics(E.G.) full course ppt
PPT
Engineering drawing
PPT
Engineering_Graphics.ppt
PPT
Engineering_Graphics.ppt
PPT
Part 1 03235264565566546655555555145.ppt
PPTX
COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING GRAPHICS.pptx
PPT
Graphics-full ppt.ppt
PPTX
suresh Engineering Grpaphics.pptxgjhjdhjdhjdjhhj
PPT
Engineering-Drawing-Part-1[1].ppt
PPT
COMPLETE-engineering-graphics PPT.ppt
PPSX
Fundamentals of Engineering graphics.pptx
PPSX
Engineering-drawing and power point s.ppsx
PPSX
Engineering Graphics
PPT
Engineering Graphics to engineering stud
PPSX
Engineering graphics
PPT
Engineering-Drawing is a broad subject in mechanical
PPT
Engineering drawing-part-1
PPS
Scales(thedirectdata[1].com)
EG PPT.ppt_Engineering Graphics_presentation
Engineering_Graphics.ppt
BE sem 1 Engineering Graphics(E.G.) full course ppt
Engineering drawing
Engineering_Graphics.ppt
Engineering_Graphics.ppt
Part 1 03235264565566546655555555145.ppt
COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING GRAPHICS.pptx
Graphics-full ppt.ppt
suresh Engineering Grpaphics.pptxgjhjdhjdhjdjhhj
Engineering-Drawing-Part-1[1].ppt
COMPLETE-engineering-graphics PPT.ppt
Fundamentals of Engineering graphics.pptx
Engineering-drawing and power point s.ppsx
Engineering Graphics
Engineering Graphics to engineering stud
Engineering graphics
Engineering-Drawing is a broad subject in mechanical
Engineering drawing-part-1
Scales(thedirectdata[1].com)
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
IOT PPTs Week 10 Lecture Material.pptx of NPTEL Smart Cities contd
PPTX
Sustainable Sites - Green Building Construction
PDF
R24 SURVEYING LAB MANUAL for civil enggi
PDF
Mitigating Risks through Effective Management for Enhancing Organizational Pe...
PPTX
web development for engineering and engineering
PDF
July 2025 - Top 10 Read Articles in International Journal of Software Enginee...
PPTX
MCN 401 KTU-2019-PPE KITS-MODULE 2.pptx
PPTX
KTU 2019 -S7-MCN 401 MODULE 2-VINAY.pptx
PPTX
OOP with Java - Java Introduction (Basics)
PPTX
bas. eng. economics group 4 presentation 1.pptx
PPTX
Geodesy 1.pptx...............................................
PPTX
M Tech Sem 1 Civil Engineering Environmental Sciences.pptx
PPTX
Welding lecture in detail for understanding
PDF
Well-logging-methods_new................
PPTX
Recipes for Real Time Voice AI WebRTC, SLMs and Open Source Software.pptx
PDF
Enhancing Cyber Defense Against Zero-Day Attacks using Ensemble Neural Networks
PPTX
Foundation to blockchain - A guide to Blockchain Tech
DOCX
ASol_English-Language-Literature-Set-1-27-02-2023-converted.docx
PDF
Mohammad Mahdi Farshadian CV - Prospective PhD Student 2026
PPT
Mechanical Engineering MATERIALS Selection
IOT PPTs Week 10 Lecture Material.pptx of NPTEL Smart Cities contd
Sustainable Sites - Green Building Construction
R24 SURVEYING LAB MANUAL for civil enggi
Mitigating Risks through Effective Management for Enhancing Organizational Pe...
web development for engineering and engineering
July 2025 - Top 10 Read Articles in International Journal of Software Enginee...
MCN 401 KTU-2019-PPE KITS-MODULE 2.pptx
KTU 2019 -S7-MCN 401 MODULE 2-VINAY.pptx
OOP with Java - Java Introduction (Basics)
bas. eng. economics group 4 presentation 1.pptx
Geodesy 1.pptx...............................................
M Tech Sem 1 Civil Engineering Environmental Sciences.pptx
Welding lecture in detail for understanding
Well-logging-methods_new................
Recipes for Real Time Voice AI WebRTC, SLMs and Open Source Software.pptx
Enhancing Cyber Defense Against Zero-Day Attacks using Ensemble Neural Networks
Foundation to blockchain - A guide to Blockchain Tech
ASol_English-Language-Literature-Set-1-27-02-2023-converted.docx
Mohammad Mahdi Farshadian CV - Prospective PhD Student 2026
Mechanical Engineering MATERIALS Selection

Engineering graphics Sheet for BE Students

  • 1. Contents 1. Scales 2. Engineering Curves - I 3. Engineering Curves - II 4. Loci of Points 5. Orthographic Projections - Basics 6. Conversion of Pictorial View into Orthographic Views 7. Projections of Points and Lines 8. Projection of Planes 9. Projection of Solids EXIT 10. Sections & Development 11. Intersection of Surfaces 12. Isometric Projections 13. Exercises 14. Solutions – Applications of Lines
  • 2. Scales 1. Basic Information 2. Types and important units 3. Plain Scales (3 Problems) 4. Diagonal Scales - information 5. Diagonal Scales (3 Problems) 6. Comparative Scales (3 Problems) 7. Vernier Scales - information 8. Vernier Scales (2 Problems) 9. Scales of Cords - construction 10. Scales of Cords (2 Problems)
  • 3. Engineering Curves – I 1. Classification 2. Conic sections - explanation 3. Common Definition 4. Ellipse – ( six methods of construction) 5. Parabola – ( Three methods of construction) 6. Hyperbola – ( Three methods of construction ) 7. Methods of drawing Tangents & Normals ( four cases)
  • 4. Engineering Curves – II 1. Classification 2. Definitions 3. Involutes - (five cases) 4. Cycloid 5. Trochoids – (Superior and Inferior) 6. Epic cycloid and Hypo - cycloid 7. Spiral (Two cases) 8. Helix – on cylinder & on cone 9. Methods of drawing Tangents and Normals (Three cases)
  • 5. Loci of Points 1. Definitions - Classifications 2. Basic locus cases (six problems) 3. Oscillating links (two problems) 4. Rotating Links (two problems)
  • 6. Orthographic Projections - Basics 1. Drawing – The fact about 2. Drawings - Types 3. Orthographic (Definitions and Important terms) 4. Planes - Classifications 5. Pattern of planes & views 6. Methods of orthographic projections 7. 1st angle and 3rd angle method – two illustrations
  • 7. Conversion of pictorial views in to orthographic views. 1. Explanation of various terms 2. 1st angle method - illustration 3. 3rd angle method – illustration 4. To recognize colored surfaces and to draw three Views 5. Seven illustrations (no.1 to 7) draw different orthographic views 6. Total nineteen illustrations ( no.8 to 26)
  • 8. Projection of Points and Lines 1. Projections – Information 2. Notations 3. Quadrant Structure. 5. Projections of a Point – in 1st quadrant. 6. Lines – Objective & Types. 7. Simple Cases of Lines. 8. Lines inclined to one plane. 9. Lines inclined to both planes. 10. Imp. Observations for solution 11. Important Diagram & Tips. 12. Group A problems 1 to 5 13. Traces of Line ( HT & VT ) 14. To locate Traces. 15. Group B problems: No. 6 to 8 16. HT-VT additional information. 17. Group B1 problems: No. 9 to 11 18. Group B1 problems: No. 9 to 1 4. Object in different Quadrants – Effect on position of views. 19. Lines in profile plane 20. Group C problems: No.12 & 13 21. Applications of Lines:: Information 22. Group D: Application Problems: 14 to 23
  • 9. Projections of Planes: 1. About the topic: 2. Illustration of surface & side inclination. 3. Procedure to solve problem & tips: 4. Problems:1 to 5: Direct inclinations: 5. Problems:6 to 11: Indirect inclinations: 6. Freely suspended cases: Info: 7. Problems: 12 & 13 8. Determination of True Shape: Info: 9. Problems: 14 to 17
  • 10. Projections of Solids: 1. Classification of Solids: 2. Important parameters: 3. Positions with Hp & Vp: Info: 4. Pattern of Standard Solution. 5. Problem no 1,2,3,4: General cases: 6. Problem no 5 & 6 (cube & tetrahedron) 7. Problem no 7 : Freely suspended: 8. Problem no 8 : Side view case: 9. Problem no 9 : True length case: 10. Problem no 10 & 11 Composite solids: 11. Problem no 12 : Frustum & auxiliary plane:
  • 11. Section & Development 1. Applications of solids: 2. Sectioning a solid: Information: 3. Sectioning a solid: Illustration Terms: 4. Typical shapes of sections & planes: 5. Development: Information: 6. Development of diff. solids: 7. Development of Frustums: 8. Problems: Standing Prism & Cone: no. 1 & 2 9. Problems: Lying Prism & Cone: no.3 & 4 10. Problem: Composite Solid no. 5 11. Problem: Typical cases no.6 to 9
  • 12. Intersection of Surfaces: 1. Essential Information: 2. Display of Engineering Applications: 3. Solution Steps to solve Problem: 4. Case 1: Cylinder to Cylinder: 5. Case 2: Prism to Cylinder: 6. Case 3: Cone to Cylinder 7. Case 4: Prism to Prism: Axis Intersecting. 8. Case 5: Triangular Prism to Cylinder 9. Case 6: Prism to Prism: Axis Skew 10. Case 7 Prism to Cone: from top: 11. Case 8: Cylinder to Cone:
  • 13. Isometric Projections 1. Definitions and explanation 2. Important Terms 3. Types. 4. Isometric of plain shapes-1. 5. Isometric of circle 6. Isometric of a part of circle 7. Isometric of plain shapes-2 8. Isometric of solids & frustums (no.5 to 16) 9. Isometric of sphere & hemi-sphere (no.17 & 18) 10. Isometric of Section of solid.(no.19) 11. Illustrated nineteen Problem (no.20 to 38)
  • 14. OBJECTIVE OF THIS CD Sky is the limit for vision. Vision and memory are close relatives. Anything in the jurisdiction of vision can be memorized for a long period. We may not remember what we hear for a long time, but we can easily remember and even visualize what we have seen years ago. So vision helps visualization and both help in memorizing an event or situation. Video effects are far more effective, is now an established fact. Every effort has been done in this CD, to bring various planes, objects and situations in-front of observer, so that he/she can further visualize in proper direction and reach to the correct solution, himself. Off-course this all will assist & give good results only when one will practice all these methods and techniques by drawing on sheets with his/her own hands, other wise not! So observe each illustration carefully note proper notes given everywhere Go through the Tips given & solution steps carefully Discuss your doubts with your teacher and make practice yourself. Then success is yours !! Go ahead confidently! CREATIVE TECHNIQUES wishes you best luck !
  • 15. FOR FULL SIZE SCALE R.F.=1 OR ( 1:1 ) MEANS DRAWING & OBJECT ARE OF SAME SIZE. Other RFs are described as 1:10, 1:100, 1:1000, 1:1,00,000 SCALES DIMENSIONS OF LARGE OBJECTS MUST BE REDUCED TO ACCOMMODATE ON STANDARD SIZE DRAWING SHEET.THIS REDUCTION CREATES A SCALE OF THAT REDUCTION RATIO, WHICH IS GENERALLY A FRACTION.. SUCH A SCALE IS CALLED REDUCING SCALE AND THAT RATIO IS CALLED REPRESENTATIVE FACTOR. SIMILARLY IN CASE OF TINY OBJECTS DIMENSIONS MUST BE INCREASED FOR ABOVE PURPOSE. HENCE THIS SCALE IS CALLED ENLARGING SCALE. HERE THE RATIO CALLED REPRESENTATIVE FACTOR IS MORE THAN UNITY. REPRESENTATIVE FACTOR (R.F.) = = = = A USE FOLLOWING FORMULAS FOR THE CALCULATIONS IN THIS TOPIC. B LENGTH OF SCALE = R.F. MAX. LENGTH TO BE MEASURED.X DIMENSION OF DRAWING DIMENSION OF OBJECT LENGTH OF DRAWING ACTUAL LENGTH AREA OF DRAWING ACTUAL AREA VOLUME AS PER DRWG. ACTUAL VOLUME V V 3
  • 16. 1. PLAIN SCALES ( FOR DIMENSIONS UP TO SINGLE DECIMAL) 2. DIAGONAL SCALES ( FOR DIMENSIONS UP TO TWO DECIMALS) 3. VERNIER SCALES ( FOR DIMENSIONS UP TO TWO DECIMALS) 4. COMPARATIVE SCALES ( FOR COMPARING TWO DIFFERENT UNITS) 5. SCALE OF CORDS ( FOR MEASURING/CONSTRUCTING ANGLES) TYPES OF SCALES: = 10 HECTOMETRES = 10 DECAMETRES = 10 METRES = 10 DECIMETRES = 10 CENTIMETRES = 10 MILIMETRES 1 KILOMETRE 1 HECTOMETRE 1 DECAMETRE 1 METRE 1 DECIMETRE 1 CENTIMETRE BE FRIENDLY WITH THESE UNITS.
  • 17. 0 1 2 3 4 510 PLAIN SCALE:-This type of scale represents two units or a unit and it’s sub-division. METERS DECIMETERS R.F. = 1/100 4 M 6 DM PLANE SCALE SHOWING METERS AND DECIMETERS. PLAIN SCALE PROBLEM NO.1:- Draw a scale 1 cm = 1m to read decimeters, to measure maximum distance of 6 m. Show on it a distance of 4 m and 6 dm. CONSTRUCTION:- a) Calculate R.F.= R.F.= 1cm/ 1m = 1/100 Length of scale = R.F. X max. distance = 1/100 X 600 cm = 6 cms b) Draw a line 6 cm long and divide it in 6 equal parts. Each part will represent larger division unit. c) Sub divide the first part which will represent second unit or fraction of first unit. d) Place ( 0 ) at the end of first unit. Number the units on right side of Zero and subdivisions on left-hand side of Zero. Take height of scale 5 to 10 mm for getting a look of scale. e) After construction of scale mention it’s RF and name of scale as shown. f) Show the distance 4 m 6 dm on it as shown. DIMENSION OF DRAWING DIMENSION OF OBJECT
  • 18. PROBLEM NO.2:- In a map a 36 km distance is shown by a line 45 cms long. Calculate the R.F. and construct a plain scale to read kilometers and hectometers, for max. 12 km. Show a distance of 8.3 km on it. CONSTRUCTION:- a) Calculate R.F. R.F.= 45 cm/ 36 km = 45/ 36 . 1000 . 100 = 1/ 80,000 Length of scale = R.F. max. distance = 1/ 80000 12 km = 15 cm b) Draw a line 15 cm long and divide it in 12 equal parts. Each part will represent larger division unit. c) Sub divide the first part which will represent second unit or fraction of first unit. d) Place ( 0 ) at the end of first unit. Number the units on right side of Zero and subdivisions on left-hand side of Zero. Take height of scale 5 to 10 mm for getting a look of scale. e) After construction of scale mention it’s RF and name of scale as shown. f) Show the distance 8.3 km on it as shown. KILOMETERS HECTOMETERS 8KM 3HM R.F. = 1/80,000 PLANE SCALE SHOWING KILOMETERS AND HECTOMETERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1110 5 PLAIN SCALE
  • 19. PROBLEM NO.3:- The distance between two stations is 210 km. A passenger train covers this distance in 7 hours. Construct a plain scale to measure time up to a single minute. RF is 1/200,000 Indicate the distance traveled by train in 29 minutes. CONSTRUCTION:- a) 210 km in 7 hours. Means speed of the train is 30 km per hour ( 60 minutes) Length of scale = R.F. max. distance per hour = 1/ 2,00,000 30km = 15 cm b) 15 cm length will represent 30 km and 1 hour i.e. 60 minutes. Draw a line 15 cm long and divide it in 6 equal parts. Each part will represent 5 km and 10 minutes. c) Sub divide the first part in 10 equal parts,which will represent second unit or fraction of first unit. Each smaller part will represent distance traveled in one minute. d) Place ( 0 ) at the end of first unit. Number the units on right side of Zero and subdivisions on left-hand side of Zero. Take height of scale 5 to 10 mm for getting a proper look of scale. e) Show km on upper side and time in minutes on lower side of the scale as shown. After construction of scale mention it’s RF and name of scale as shown. f) Show the distance traveled in 29 minutes, which is 14.5 km, on it as shown. PLAIN SCALE 0 10 20 30 40 5010 MINUTESMIN R.F. = 1/100 PLANE SCALE SHOWING METERS AND DECIMETERS. KMKM 0 5 10 15 20 255 2.5 DISTANCE TRAVELED IN 29 MINUTES. 14.5 KM
  • 20. We have seen that the plain scales give only two dimensions, such as a unit and it’s subunit or it’s fraction. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’ 8’ 9’ 10’ X Y Z The principle of construction of a diagonal scale is as follows. Let the XY in figure be a subunit. From Y draw a perpendicular YZ to a suitable height. Join XZ. Divide YZ in to 10 equal parts. Draw parallel lines to XY from all these divisions and number them as shown. From geometry we know that similar triangles have their like sides proportional. Consider two similar triangles XYZ and 7’ 7Z, we have 7Z / YZ = 7’7 / XY (each part being one unit) Means 7’ 7 = 7 / 10. x X Y = 0.7 XY :. Similarly 1’ – 1 = 0.1 XY 2’ – 2 = 0.2 XY Thus, it is very clear that, the sides of small triangles, which are parallel to divided lines, become progressively shorter in length by 0.1 XY. The solved examples ON NEXT PAGES will make the principles of diagonal scales clear. The diagonal scales give us three successive dimensions that is a unit, a subunit and a subdivision of a subunit. DIAGONAL SCALE
  • 21. R.F. = 1 / 40,00,000 DIAGONAL SCALE SHOWING KILOMETERS. 0 100 200 300 400 500100 50 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 KM KM KM 569 km 459 km 336 km 222 km PROBLEM NO. 4 : The distance between Delhi and Agra is 200 km. In a railway map it is represented by a line 5 cm long. Find it’s R.F. Draw a diagonal scale to show single km. And maximum 600 km. Indicate on it following distances. 1) 222 km 2) 336 km 3) 459 km 4) 569 km SOLUTION STEPS: RF = 5 cm / 200 km = 1 / 40, 00, 000 Length of scale = 1 / 40, 00, 000 X 600 X 105 = 15 cm Draw a line 15 cm long. It will represent 600 km.Divide it in six equal parts.( each will represent 100 km.) Divide first division in ten equal parts.Each will represent 10 km.Draw a line upward from left end and mark 10 parts on it of any distance. Name those parts 0 to 10 as shown.Join 9th sub-division of horizontal scale with 10th division of the vertical divisions. Then draw parallel lines to this line from remaining sub divisions and complete diagonal scale. DIAGONAL SCALE
  • 22. PROBLEM NO.5: A rectangular plot of land measuring 1.28 hectors is represented on a map by a similar rectangle of 8 sq. cm. Calculate RF of the scale. Draw a diagonal scale to read single meter. Show a distance of 438 m on it. Draw a line 15 cm long. It will represent 600 m.Divide it in six equal parts. ( each will represent 100 m.) Divide first division in ten equal parts.Each will represent 10 m. Draw a line upward from left end and mark 10 parts on it of any distance. Name those parts 0 to 10 as shown.Join 9th sub-division of horizontal scale with 10th division of the vertical divisions. Then draw parallel lines to this line from remaining sub divisions and complete diagonal scale. DIAGONAL SCALE SOLUTION : 1 hector = 10, 000 sq. meters 1.28 hectors = 1.28 X 10, 000 sq. meters = 1.28 X 104 X 104 sq. cm 8 sq. cm area on map represents = 1.28 X 104 X 104 sq. cm on land 1 cm sq. on map represents = 1.28 X 10 4 X 104 / 8 sq cm on land 1 cm on map represent = 1.28 X 10 4 X 104 / 8 cm = 4, 000 cm 1 cm on drawing represent 4, 000 cm, Means RF = 1 / 4000 Assuming length of scale 15 cm, it will represent 600 m. 0 100 200 300 400 500100 50 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 M M M 438 meters R.F. = 1 / 4000 DIAGONAL SCALE SHOWING METERS.
  • 23. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CENTIMETRES MM CM R.F. = 1 / 2.5 DIAGONAL SCALE SHOWING CENTIMETERS. 0 5 10 155 4 3 2 1 PROBLEM NO.6:. Draw a diagonal scale of R.F. 1: 2.5, showing centimeters and millimeters and long enough to measure up to 20 centimeters. SOLUTION STEPS: R.F. = 1 / 2.5 Length of scale = 1 / 2.5 X 20 cm. = 8 cm. 1.Draw a line 8 cm long and divide it in to 4 equal parts. (Each part will represent a length of 5 cm.) 2.Divide the first part into 5 equal divisions. (Each will show 1 cm.) 3.At the left hand end of the line, draw a vertical line and on it step-off 10 equal divisions of any length. 4.Complete the scale as explained in previous problems. Show the distance 13.4 cm on it. 13 .4 CM DIAGONAL SCALE
  • 24. COMPARATIVE SCALES: These are the Scales having same R.F. but graduated to read different units. These scales may be Plain scales or Diagonal scales and may be constructed separately or one above the other. EXAMPLE NO. 7 : A distance of 40 miles is represented by a line 8 cm long. Construct a plain scale to read 80 miles. Also construct a comparative scale to read kilometers upto 120 km ( 1 m = 1.609 km ) SOLUTION STEPS: Scale of Miles: 40 miles are represented = 8 cm 80 miles = 16 cm R.F. = 8 / 40 X 1609 X 1000 X 100 = 1 / 8, 04, 500 CONSTRUCTION: Take a line 16 cm long and divide it into 8 parts. Each will represent 10 miles. Subdivide the first part and each sub-division will measure single mile. Scale of Km: Length of scale = 1 / 8,04,500 X 120 X 1000 X 100 = 14. 90 cm CONSTRUCTION: On the top line of the scale of miles cut off a distance of 14.90 cm and divide it into 12 equal parts. Each part will represent 10 km. Subdivide the first part into 10 equal parts. Each subdivision will show single km. 10 100 20 305 50 60 70 MILES40 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 KM 5 R.F. = 1 / 804500 COMPARATIVE SCALE SHOWING MILES AND KILOMETERS
  • 25. COMPARATIVE SCALE: EXAMPLE NO. 8 : A motor car is running at a speed of 60 kph. On a scale of RF = 1 / 4,00,000 show the distance traveled by car in 47 minutes. SOLUTION STEPS: Scale of km. length of scale = RF X 60 km = 1 / 4,00,000 X 60 X 105 = 15 cm. CONSTRUCTION: Draw a line 15 cm long and divide it in 6 equal parts. ( each part will represent 10 km.) Subdivide 1st part in `0 equal subdivisions. ( each will represent 1 km.) Time Scale: Same 15 cm line will represent 60 minutes. Construct the scale similar to distance scale. It will show minimum 1 minute & max. 60min. 10 100 20 305 50 KM40 10 100 20 305 50 MINUTES40 MIN. KM 47 MINUTES 47 KM R.F. = 1 / 4,00,000 COMPARATIVE SCALE SHOWING MINUTES AND KILOMETERS
  • 26. EXAMPLE NO. 9 : A car is traveling at a speed of 60 km per hour. A 4 cm long line represents the distance traveled by the car in two hours. Construct a suitable comparative scale up to 10 hours. The scale should be able to read the distance traveled in one minute. Show the time required to cover 476 km and also distance in 4 hours and 24 minutes. COMPARATIVE SCALE: SOLUTION: 4 cm line represents distance in two hours , means for 10 hours scale, 20 cm long line is required, as length of scale.This length of scale will also represent 600 kms. ( as it is a distance traveled in 10 hours) CONSTRUCTION: Distance Scale ( km) Draw a line 20 cm long. Divide it in TEN equal parts.( Each will show 60 km) Sub-divide 1st part in SIX subdivisions.( Each will represent 10 km) At the left hand end of the line, draw a vertical line and on it step-off 10 equal divisions of any length. And complete the diagonal scale to read minimum ONE km. Time scale: Draw a line 20 cm long. Divide it in TEN equal parts.( Each will show 1 hour) Sub-divide 1st part in SIX subdivisions.( Each will represent 10 minutes) At the left hand end of the line, draw a vertical line and on it step-off 10 equal divisions of any length. And complete the diagonal scale to read minimum ONE minute. 10 5 0 kM kM 060 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540 060 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 HOURS MIN. 10 5 0 KILOMETERSDISTANCE SCALE TO MEASURE MIN 1 KM TIME SCALE TO MEASURE MIN 1 MINUTE. 4 hrs 24 min. ( 264 kms ) 476 kms ( 7 hrs 56 min.)
  • 27. Figure to the right shows a part of a plain scale in which length A-O represents 10 cm. If we divide A-O into ten equal parts, each will be of 1 cm. Now it would not be easy to divide each of these parts into ten equal divisions to get measurements in millimeters. Now if we take a length BO equal to 10 + 1 = 11 such equal parts, thus representing 11 cm, and divide it into ten equal divisions, each of these divisions will represent 11 / 10 – 1.1 cm. The difference between one part of AO and one division of BO will be equal 1.1 – 1.0 = 0.1 cm or 1 mm. This difference is called Least Count of the scale. Minimum this distance can be measured by this scale. The upper scale BO is the vernier.The combination of plain scale and the vernier is vernier scale. Vernier Scales: These scales, like diagonal scales , are used to read to a very small unit with great accuracy. It consists of two parts – a primary scale and a vernier. The primary scale is a plain scale fully divided into minor divisions. As it would be difficult to sub-divide the minor divisions in ordinary way, it is done with the help of the vernier. The graduations on vernier are derived from those on the primary scale. 9.9 7.7 5.5 3.3 1.1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0A 0B
  • 28. Example 10: Draw a vernier scale of RF = 1 / 25 to read centimeters upto 4 meters and on it, show lengths 2.39 m and 0.91 m .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .99 .77 .55 .33 .11 01.1 0 1 2 31.0 SOLUTION: Length of scale = RF X max. Distance = 1 / 25 X 4 X 100 = 16 cm CONSTRUCTION: ( Main scale) Draw a line 16 cm long. Divide it in 4 equal parts. ( each will represent meter ) Sub-divide each part in 10 equal parts. ( each will represent decimeter ) Name those properly. CONSTRUCTION: ( vernier) Take 11 parts of Dm length and divide it in 10 equal parts. Each will show 0.11 m or 1.1 dm or 11 cm and construct a rectangle Covering these parts of vernier. TO MEASURE GIVEN LENGTHS: (1) For 2.39 m : Subtract 0.99 from 2.39 i.e. 2.39 - .99 = 1.4 m The distance between 0.99 ( left of Zero) and 1.4 (right of Zero) is 2.39 m (2) For 0.91 m : Subtract 0.11 from 0.91 i.e. 0.91 – 0.11 =0.80 m The distance between 0.11 and 0.80 (both left side of Zero) is 0.91 m 1.4 2.39 m 0.91 m METERS METERS Vernier Scale
  • 29. Example 11: A map of size 500cm X 50cm wide represents an area of 6250 sq.Kms. Construct a vernier scaleto measure kilometers, hectometers and decameters and long enough to measure upto 7 km. Indicate on it a) 5.33 km b) 59 decameters. Vernier Scale SOLUTION: RF = = = 2 / 105 Length of scale = RF X max. Distance = 2 / 105 X 7 kms = 14 cm AREA OF DRAWING ACTUAL AREAV 500 X 50 cm sq. 6250 km sq.V CONSTRUCTION: ( vernier) Take 11 parts of hectometer part length and divide it in 10 equal parts. Each will show 1.1 hm m or 11 dm and Covering in a rectangle complete scale. CONSTRUCTION: ( Main scale) Draw a line 14 cm long. Divide it in 7 equal parts. ( each will represent km ) Sub-divide each part in 10 equal parts. ( each will represent hectometer ) Name those properly. KILOMETERSHECTOMETERS 0 1 2 310 4 5 6 90 70 50 30 10 99 77 55 33 11 Decameters TO MEASURE GIVEN LENGTHS: a) For 5.33 km : Subtract 0.33 from 5.33 i.e. 5.33 - 0.33 = 5.00 The distance between 33 dm ( left of Zero) and 5.00 (right of Zero) is 5.33 k m (b) For 59 dm : Subtract 0.99 from 0.59 i.e. 0.59 – 0.99 = - 0.4 km ( - ve sign means left of Zero) The distance between 99 dm and - .4 km is 59 dm (both left side of Zero) 5.33 km59 dm
  • 31. 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 00 0 10 20 4030 7050 60 9080 OA OA B O1 A1 B1 x z y PROBLEM 12: Construct any triangle and measure it’s angles by using scale of cords. CONSTRUCTION: First prepare Scale of Cords for the problem. Then construct a triangle of given sides. ( You are supposed to measure angles x, y and z) To measure angle at x: Take O-A distance in compass from cords scale and mark it on lower side of triangle as shown from corner x. Name O & A as shown. Then O as center, O-A radius draw an arc upto upper adjacent side.Name the point B. Take A-B cord in compass and place on scale of cords from Zero. It will give value of angle at x To measure angle at y: Repeat same process from O1. Draw arc with radius O1A1. Place Cord A1B1 on scale and get angle at y. To measure angle at z: Subtract the SUM of these two angles from 1800 to get angle at z. SCALE OF CORDS 0 10 20 40 30 70 5060 90 80 0 10 20 40 30 70 50 60 90 80 300550 Angle at z = 180 – ( 55 + 30 ) = 950
  • 32. 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 00 0 10 20 4030 7050 60 9080 OA PROBLEM 12: Construct 250 and 1150 angles with a horizontal line , by using scale of cords. CONSTRUCTION: First prepare Scale of Cords for the problem. Then Draw a horizontal line. Mark point O on it. To construct 250 angle at O. Take O-A distance in compass from cords scale and mark it on on the line drawn, from O Name O & A as shown. Then O as center, O-A radius draw an arc upward.. Take cord length of 250 angle from scale of cords in compass and from A cut the arc at point B.Join B with O. The angle AOB is thus 250 To construct 1150 angle at O. This scale can measure or construct angles upto 900 only directly. Hence Subtract 1150 from 1800. We get 750 angle , which can be constructed with this scale. Extend previous arc of OA radius and taking cord length of 750 in compass cut this arc at B1 with A as center. Join B1 with O. Now angle AOB1 is 750 and angle COB1 is 1150 . SCALE OF CORDS B1 750 1150 0 10 20 40 30 70 50 60 90 80 B 250 0 10 20 40 30 70 5060 90 80 A O O C A To construct 250 angle at O. To construct 1150 angle at O.
  • 33. ENGINEERING CURVES Part- I {Conic Sections} ELLIPSE 1.Concentric Circle Method 2.Rectangle Method 3.Oblong Method 4.Arcs of Circle Method 5.Rhombus Metho 6.Basic Locus Method (Directrix – focus) HYPERBOLA 1.Rectangular Hyperbola (coordinates given) 2 Rectangular Hyperbola (P-V diagram - Equation given) 3.Basic Locus Method (Directrix – focus) PARABOLA 1.Rectangle Method 2 Method of Tangents ( Triangle Method) 3.Basic Locus Method (Directrix – focus) Methods of Drawing Tangents & Normals To These Curves.
  • 34. CONIC SECTIONS ELLIPSE, PARABOLA AND HYPERBOLA ARE CALLED CONIC SECTIONS BECAUSE THESE CURVES APPEAR ON THE SURFACE OF A CONE WHEN IT IS CUT BY SOME TYPICAL CUTTING PLANES. Section Plane Through Generators Ellipse Section Plane Parallel to end generator. Parabola Section Plane Parallel to Axis. Hyperbola OBSERVE ILLUSTRATIONS GIVEN BELOW..
  • 35. These are the loci of points moving in a plane such that the ratio of it’s distances from a fixed point And a fixed line always remains constant. The Ratio is called ECCENTRICITY. (E) A) For Ellipse E<1 B) For Parabola E=1 C) For Hyperbola E>1 SECOND DEFINATION OF AN ELLIPSE:- It is a locus of a point moving in a plane such that the SUM of it’s distances from TWO fixed points always remains constant. {And this sum equals to the length of major axis.} These TWO fixed points are FOCUS 1 & FOCUS 2 Refer Problem nos. 6. 9 & 12 Refer Problem no.4 Ellipse by Arcs of Circles Method. COMMON DEFINATION OF ELLIPSE, PARABOLA & HYPERBOLA:
  • 36. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BA D C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Steps: 1. Draw both axes as perpendicular bisectors of each other & name their ends as shown. 2. Taking their intersecting point as a center, draw two concentric circles considering both as respective diameters. 3. Divide both circles in 12 equal parts & name as shown. 4. From all points of outer circle draw vertical lines downwards and upwards respectively. 5.From all points of inner circle draw horizontal lines to intersect those vertical lines. 6. Mark all intersecting points properly as those are the points on ellipse. 7. Join all these points along with the ends of both axes in smooth possible curve. It is required ellipse. Problem 1 :- Draw ellipse by concentric circle method. Take major axis 100 mm and minor axis 70 mm long. ELLIPSE BY CONCENTRIC CIRCLE METHOD
  • 37. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 2 1A B C D Problem 2 Draw ellipse by Rectangle method. Take major axis 100 mm and minor axis 70 mm long. Steps: 1 Draw a rectangle taking major and minor axes as sides. 2. In this rectangle draw both axes as perpendicular bisectors of each other.. 3. For construction, select upper left part of rectangle. Divide vertical small side and horizontal long side into same number of equal parts.( here divided in four parts) 4. Name those as shown.. 5. Now join all vertical points 1,2,3,4, to the upper end of minor axis. And all horizontal points i.e.1,2,3,4 to the lower end of minor axis. 6. Then extend C-1 line upto D-1 and mark that point. Similarly extend C-2, C-3, C-4 lines up to D-2, D-3, & D-4 lines. 7. Mark all these points properly and join all along with ends A and D in smooth possible curve. Do similar construction in right side part.along with lower half of the rectangle.Join all points in smooth curve. It is required ellipse. ELLIPSE BY RECTANGLE METHOD
  • 38. C D 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 2 1A B 1 2 3 4 Problem 3:- Draw ellipse by Oblong method. Draw a parallelogram of 100 mm and 70 mm long sides with included angle of 750. Inscribe Ellipse in it. STEPS ARE SIMILAR TO THE PREVIOUS CASE (RECTANGLE METHOD) ONLY IN PLACE OF RECTANGLE, HERE IS A PARALLELOGRAM. ELLIPSE BY OBLONG METHOD
  • 39. F1 F2 1 2 3 4 A B C D p1 p2 p3 p4 ELLIPSE BY ARCS OF CIRCLE METHOD O PROBLEM 4. MAJOR AXIS AB & MINOR AXIS CD ARE 100 AMD 70MM LONG RESPECTIVELY .DRAW ELLIPSE BY ARCS OF CIRLES METHOD. STEPS: 1.Draw both axes as usual.Name the ends & intersecting point 2.Taking AO distance I.e.half major axis, from C, mark F1 & F2 On AB . ( focus 1 and 2.) 3.On line F1- O taking any distance, mark points 1,2,3, & 4 4.Taking F1 center, with distance A-1 draw an arc above AB and taking F2 center, with B-1 distance cut this arc. Name the point p1 5.Repeat this step with same centers but taking now A-2 & B-2 distances for drawing arcs. Name the point p2 6.Similarly get all other P points. With same steps positions of P can be located below AB. 7.Join all points by smooth curve to get an ellipse/ As per the definition Ellipse is locus of point P moving in a plane such that the SUM of it’s distances from two fixed points (F1 & F2) remains constant and equals to the length of major axis AB.(Note A .1+ B .1=A . 2 + B. 2 = AB)
  • 40. 1 4 2 3 A B D C ELLIPSE BY RHOMBUS METHOD PROBLEM 5. DRAW RHOMBUS OF 100 MM & 70 MM LONG DIAGONALS AND INSCRIBE AN ELLIPSE IN IT. STEPS: 1. Draw rhombus of given dimensions. 2. Mark mid points of all sides & name Those A,B,C,& D 3. Join these points to the ends of smaller diagonals. 4. Mark points 1,2,3,4 as four centers. 5. Taking 1 as center and 1-A radius draw an arc AB. 6. Take 2 as center draw an arc CD. 7. Similarly taking 3 & 4 as centers and 3-D radius draw arcs DA & BC.
  • 41. ELLIPSE DIRECTRIX-FOCUS METHOD PROBLEM 6:- POINT F IS 50 MM FROM A LINE AB.A POINT P IS MOVING IN A PLANE SUCH THAT THE RATIO OF IT’S DISTANCES FROM F AND LINE AB REMAINS CONSTANT AND EQUALS TO 2/3 DRAW LOCUS OF POINT P. { ECCENTRICITY = 2/3 } F ( focus) DIRECTRIX V ELLIPSE (vertex) A B STEPS: 1 .Draw a vertical line AB and point F 50 mm from it. 2 .Divide 50 mm distance in 5 parts. 3 .Name 2nd part from F as V. It is 20mm and 30mm from F and AB line resp. It is first point giving ratio of it’s distances from F and AB 2/3 i.e 20/30 4 Form more points giving same ratio such as 30/45, 40/60, 50/75 etc. 5.Taking 45,60 and 75mm distances from line AB, draw three vertical lines to the right side of it. 6. Now with 30, 40 and 50mm distances in compass cut these lines above and below, with F as center. 7. Join these points through V in smooth curve. This is required locus of P.It is an ELLIPSE. 30mm 45mm
  • 42. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 PARABOLA RECTANGLE METHOD PROBLEM 7: A BALL THROWN IN AIR ATTAINS 100 M HIEGHT AND COVERS HORIZONTAL DISTANCE 150 M ON GROUND. Draw the path of the ball (projectile)- STEPS: 1.Draw rectangle of above size and divide it in two equal vertical parts 2.Consider left part for construction. Divide height and length in equal number of parts and name those 1,2,3,4,5& 6 3.Join vertical 1,2,3,4,5 & 6 to the top center of rectangle 4.Similarly draw upward vertical lines from horizontal1,2,3,4,5 And wherever these lines intersect previously drawn inclined lines in sequence Mark those points and further join in smooth possible curve. 5.Repeat the construction on right side rectangle also.Join all in sequence. This locus is Parabola. .
  • 43. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 C A B PARABOLA METHOD OF TANGENTS Problem no.8: Draw an isosceles triangle of 100 mm long base and 110 mm long altitude.Inscribe a parabola in it by method of tangents. Solution Steps: 1. Construct triangle as per the given dimensions. 2. Divide it’s both sides in to same no.of equal parts. 3. Name the parts in ascending and descending manner, as shown. 4. Join 1-1, 2-2,3-3 and so on. 5. Draw the curve as shown i.e.tangent to all these lines. The above all lines being tangents to the curve, it is called method of tangents.
  • 44. A B V PARABOLA (VERTEX) F ( focus) 1 2 3 4 PARABOLA DIRECTRIX-FOCUS METHOD SOLUTION STEPS: 1.Locate center of line, perpendicular to AB from point F. This will be initial point P and also the vertex. 2.Mark 5 mm distance to its right side, name those points 1,2,3,4 and from those draw lines parallel to AB. 3.Mark 5 mm distance to its left of P and name it 1. 4.Take O-1 distance as radius and F as center draw an arc cutting first parallel line to AB. Name upper point P1 and lower point P2 . (FP1=O1) 5.Similarly repeat this process by taking again 5mm to right and left and locate P3 P4 . 6.Join all these points in smooth curve. It will be the locus of P equidistance from line AB and fixed point F. PROBLEM 9: Point F is 50 mm from a vertical straight line AB. Draw locus of point P, moving in a plane such that it always remains equidistant from point F and line AB. O P1 P2
  • 45. P O 40 mm 30 mm 1 2 3 12 1 2 3 1 2 HYPERBOLA THROUGH A POINT OF KNOWN CO-ORDINATES Solution Steps: 1)      Extend horizontal line from P to right side. 2)      Extend vertical line from P upward. 3)      On horizontal line from P, mark some points taking any distance and name them after P-1, 2,3,4 etc. 4)      Join 1-2-3-4 points to pole O. Let them cut part [P-B] also at 1,2,3,4 points. 5)      From horizontal 1,2,3,4 draw vertical lines downwards and 6)      From vertical 1,2,3,4 points [from P-B] draw horizontal lines. 7)      Line from 1 horizontal and line from 1 vertical will meet at P1 .Similarly mark P2 , P3 , P4 points. 8)      Repeat the procedure by marking four points on upward vertical line from P and joining all those to pole O. Name this points P6 , P7 , P8 etc. and join them by smooth Problem No.10: Point P is 40 mm and 30 mm from horizontal and vertical axes respectively.Draw Hyperbola through it.
  • 46. VOLUME:( M3 ) PRESSURE (Kg/cm2 ) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 HYPERBOLA P-V DIAGRAM Problem no.11: A sample of gas is expanded in a cylinder from 10 unit pressure to 1 unit pressure.Expansion follows law PV=Constant.If initial volume being 1 unit, draw the curve of expansion. Also Name the curve. Form a table giving few more values of P & V P V = C + 10 5 4 2.5 2 1 1 2 2.5 4 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ++++++ = = = = = = Now draw a Graph of Pressure against Volume. It is a PV Diagram and it is Hyperbola. Take pressure on vertical axis and Volume on horizontal axis.
  • 47. F ( focus)V (vertex) A B 30mm 45mm HYPERBOLA DIRECTRIX FOCUS METHOD PROBLEM 12:- POINT F IS 50 MM FROM A LINE AB.A POINT P IS MOVING IN A PLANE SUCH THAT THE RATIO OF IT’S DISTANCES FROM F AND LINE AB REMAINS CONSTANT AND EQUALS TO 2/3 DRAW LOCUS OF POINT P. { ECCENTRICITY = 2/3 } STEPS: 1 .Draw a vertical line AB and point F 50 mm from it. 2 .Divide 50 mm distance in 5 parts. 3 .Name 2nd part from F as V. It is 20mm and 30mm from F and AB line resp. It is first point giving ratio of it’s distances from F and AB 2/3 i.e 20/30 4 Form more points giving same ratio such as 30/45, 40/60, 50/75 etc. 5.Taking 45,60 and 75mm distances from line AB, draw three vertical lines to the right side of it. 6. Now with 30, 40 and 50mm distances in compass cut these lines above and below, with F as center. 7. Join these points through V in smooth curve. This is required locus of P.It is an ELLIPSE.
  • 48. D F1 F2 1 2 3 4 A B C p1 p2 p3 p4 O Q TANGENT NORMAL TO DRAW TANGENT & NORMAL TO THE CURVE FROM A GIVEN POINT ( Q ) 1. JOIN POINT Q TO F1 & F2 2. BISECT ANGLE F1Q F2 THE ANGLE BISECTOR IS NORMAL 3. A PERPENDICULAR LINE DRAWN TO IT IS TANGENT TO THE CURVE. ELLIPSE TANGENT & NORMAL Problem 13:
  • 49. ELLIPSE TANGENT & NORMAL F ( focus) DIRECTRIX V ELLIPSE (vertex) A B T T N N Q 900 TO DRAW TANGENT & NORMAL TO THE CURVE FROM A GIVEN POINT ( Q ) 1.JOIN POINT Q TO F. 2.CONSTRUCT 900 ANGLE WITH THIS LINE AT POINT F 3.EXTEND THE LINE TO MEET DIRECTRIX AT T 4. JOIN THIS POINT TO Q AND EXTEND. THIS IS TANGENT TO ELLIPSE FROM Q 5.TO THIS TANGENT DRAW PERPENDICULAR LINE FROM Q. IT IS NORMAL TO CURVE. Problem 14:
  • 50. A B PARABOLA VERTEX F ( focus) V Q T N N T 900 TO DRAW TANGENT & NORMAL TO THE CURVE FROM A GIVEN POINT ( Q ) 1.JOIN POINT Q TO F. 2.CONSTRUCT 900 ANGLE WITH THIS LINE AT POINT F 3.EXTEND THE LINE TO MEET DIRECTRIX AT T 4. JOIN THIS POINT TO Q AND EXTEND. THIS IS TANGENT TO THE CURVE FROM Q 5.TO THIS TANGENT DRAW PERPENDICULAR LINE FROM Q. IT IS NORMAL TO CURVE. PARABOLA TANGENT & NORMALProblem 15:
  • 51. F ( focus)V (vertex) A B HYPERBOLA TANGENT & NORMAL QN N T T 900 TO DRAW TANGENT & NORMAL TO THE CURVE FROM A GIVEN POINT ( Q ) 1.JOIN POINT Q TO F. 2.CONSTRUCT 900 ANGLE WITH THIS LINE AT POINT F 3.EXTEND THE LINE TO MEET DIRECTRIX AT T 4. JOIN THIS POINT TO Q AND EXTEND. THIS IS TANGENT TO CURVE FROM Q 5.TO THIS TANGENT DRAW PERPENDICULAR LINE FROM Q. IT IS NORMAL TO CURVE. Problem 16
  • 52. INVOLUTE CYCLOID SPIRAL HELIX ENGINEERING CURVES Part-II (Point undergoing two types of displacements) 1. Involute of a circle a)String Length = D b)String Length > D c)String Length < D 2. Pole having Composite shape. 3. Rod Rolling over a Semicircular Pole. 1. General Cycloid 2. Trochoid ( superior) 3. Trochoid ( Inferior) 4. Epi-Cycloid 5. Hypo-Cycloid 1. Spiral of One Convolution. 2. Spiral of Two Convolutions. 1. On Cylinder 2. On a Cone Methods of Drawing Tangents & Normals To These Curves. AND
  • 53. CYCLOID: IT IS A LOCUS OF A POINT ON THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE WHICH ROLLS ON A STRAIGHT LINE PATH. INVOLUTE: IT IS A LOCUS OF A FREE END OF A STRING WHEN IT IS WOUND ROUND A CIRCULAR POLE SPIRAL: IT IS A CURVE GENERATED BY A POINT WHICH REVOLVES AROUND A FIXED POINT AND AT THE SAME MOVES TOWARDS IT. HELIX: IT IS A CURVE GENERATED BY A POINT WHICH MOVES AROUND THE SURFACE OF A RIGHT CIRCULAR CYLINDER / CONE AND AT THE SAME TIME ADVANCES IN AXIAL DIRECTION AT A SPEED BEARING A CONSTANT RATIO TO THE SPPED OF ROTATION. ( for problems refer topic Development of surfaces) DEFINITIONS SUPERIORTROCHOID: IF THE POINT IN THE DEFINATION OF CYCLOID IS OUTSIDE THE CIRCLE INFERIOR TROCHOID.: IF IT IS INSIDE THE CIRCLE EPI-CYCLOID IF THE CIRCLE IS ROLLING ON ANOTHER CIRCLE FROM OUTSIDE HYPO-CYCLOID. IF THE CIRCLE IS ROLLING FROM INSIDE THE OTHER CIRCLE,
  • 54. INVOLUTE OF A CIRCLEProblem no 17: Draw Involute of a circle. String length is equal to the circumference of circle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P P8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P3 3 to p P4 4 to p P5 5top P7 7 to p P6 6top P2 2top P1 1top  D A Solution Steps: 1) Point or end P of string AP is exactly D distance away from A. Means if this string is wound round the circle, it will completely cover given circle. B will meet A after winding. 2) Divide D (AP) distance into 8 number of equal parts. 3)  Divide circle also into 8 number of equal parts. 4)  Name after A, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. up to 8 on D line AP as well as on circle (in anticlockwise direction). 5)  To radius C-1, C-2, C-3 up to C-8 draw tangents (from 1,2,3,4,etc to circle). 6)  Take distance 1 to P in compass and mark it on tangent from point 1 on circle (means one division less than distance AP). 7)  Name this point P1 8)  Take 2-B distance in compass and mark it on the tangent from point 2. Name it point P2. 9)  Similarly take 3 to P, 4 to P, 5 to P up to 7 to P distance in compass and mark on respective tangents and locate P3, P4, P5 up to P8 (i.e. A) points and join them in smooth curve it is an INVOLUTE of a given circle.
  • 55. INVOLUTE OF A CIRCLE String length MORE than D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P3 3 to p P4 4 to p P5 5top P7 7 to p P6 6top P2 2top P1 1to p 165 mm (more than D) D p8 Solution Steps: In this case string length is more than  D. But remember! Whatever may be the length of string, mark  D distance horizontal i.e.along the string and divide it in 8 number of equal parts, and not any other distance. Rest all steps are same as previous INVOLUTE. Draw the curve completely. Problem 18: Draw Involute of a circle. String length is MORE than the circumference of circle.
  • 56. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P3 3 to p P4 4 to p P5 5top P7 7 to p P6 6top P2 2top P1 1top 150 mm (Less than D) D INVOLUTE OF A CIRCLE String length LESS than D Problem 19: Draw Involute of a circle. String length is LESS than the circumference of circle. Solution Steps: In this case string length is Less than  D. But remember! Whatever may be the length of string, mark  D distance horizontal i.e.along the string and divide it in 8 number of equal parts, and not any other distance. Rest all steps are same as previous INVOLUTE. Draw the curve completely.
  • 57. 1 2 34 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A P D/2 P1 1toP P2 2 to P P3 3 to P P4 4toP P AtoPP5 5toP P6 6toP INVOLUTE OF COMPOSIT SHAPED POLE PROBLEM 20 : A POLE IS OF A SHAPE OF HALF HEXABON AND SEMICIRCLE. ASTRING IS TO BE WOUND HAVING LENGTH EQUAL TO THE POLE PERIMETER DRAW PATH OF FREE END P OF STRING WHEN WOUND COMPLETELY. (Take hex 30 mm sides and semicircle of 60 mm diameter.) SOLUTION STEPS: Draw pole shape as per dimensions. Divide semicircle in 4 parts and name those along with corners of hexagon. Calculate perimeter length. Show it as string AP. On this line mark 30mm from A Mark and name it 1 Mark D/2 distance on it from 1 And dividing it in 4 parts name 2,3,4,5. Mark point 6 on line 30 mm from 5 Now draw tangents from all points of pole and proper lengths as done in all previous involute’s problems and complete the curve.
  • 58. 1 2 3 4 D 1 2 3 4 A B A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 PROBLEM 21 : Rod AB 85 mm long rolls over a semicircular pole without slipping from it’s initially vertical position till it becomes up-side-down vertical. Draw locus of both ends A & B. Solution Steps? If you have studied previous problems properly, you can surely solve this also. Simply remember that this being a rod, it will roll over the surface of pole. Means when one end is approaching, other end will move away from poll. OBSERVE ILLUSTRATION CAREFULLY!
  • 59. P C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C D CYCLOIDPROBLEM 22: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT ON THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE WHICH ROLLS ON STRAIGHT LINE PATH. Take Circle diameter as 50 mm Solution Steps: 1)      From center C draw a horizontal line equal to D distance. 2)      Divide D distance into 8 number of equal parts and name them C1, C2, C3__ etc. 3)      Divide the circle also into 8 number of equal parts and in clock wise direction, after P name 1, 2, 3 up to 8. 4)      From all these points on circle draw horizontal lines. (parallel to locus of C) 5)      With a fixed distance C-P in compass, C1 as center, mark a point on horizontal line from 1. Name it P. 6)      Repeat this procedure from C2, C3, C4 upto C8 as centers. Mark points P2, P3, P4, P5 up to P8 on the horizontal lines drawn from 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 respectively. 7)      Join all these points by curve. It is Cycloid.
  • 60. C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C D SUPERIOR TROCHOID P PROBLEM 23: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT , 5 MM AWAY FROM THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE WHICH ROLLS ON STRAIGHT LINE PATH. Take Circle diameter as 50 mm Solution Steps: 1)      Draw circle of given diameter and draw a horizontal line from it’s center C of length  D and divide it in 8 number of equal parts and name them C1, C2, C3, up to C8. 2)      Draw circle by CP radius, as in this case CP is larger than radius of circle. 3)      Now repeat steps as per the previous problem of cycloid, by dividing this new circle into 8 number of equal parts and drawing lines from all these points parallel to locus of C and taking CP radius wit different positions of C as centers, cut these lines and get different positions of P and join 4)      This curve is called Superior Trochoid.
  • 61. P C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C D INFERIOR TROCHOID PROBLEM 24: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT , 5 MM INSIDE THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE WHICH ROLLS ON STRAIGHT LINE PATH. Take Circle diameter as 50 mm Solution Steps: 1)      Draw circle of given diameter and draw a horizontal line from it’s center C of length  D and divide it in 8 number of equal parts and name them C1, C2, C3, up to C8. 2)      Draw circle by CP radius, as in this case CP is SHORTER than radius of circle. 3)      Now repeat steps as per the previous problem of cycloid, by dividing this new circle into 8 number of equal parts and drawing lines from all these points parallel to locus of C and taking CP radius with different positions of C as centers, cut these lines and get different positions of P and join those in curvature. 4)      This curve is called Inferior Trochoid.
  • 62. C C1 C2 C3 C4 C 5 C 8 C6 C7 EPI CYCLOID : P O R r = CP + r R 3600 = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Generating/ Rolling Circle Directing Circle PROBLEM 25: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT ON THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE WHICH ROLLS ON A CURVED PATH. Take diameter of rolling Circle 50 mm And radius of directing circle i.e. curved path, 75 mm. Solution Steps: 1)  When smaller circle will roll on larger circle for one revolution it will cover  D distance on arc and it will be decided by included arc angle . 2)  Calculate  by formula  = (r/R) x 3600. 3)  Construct angle  with radius OC and draw an arc by taking O as center OC as radius and form sector of angle . 4)  Divide this sector into 8 number of equal angular parts. And from C onward name them C1, C2, C3 up to C8. 5)  Divide smaller circle (Generating circle) also in 8 number of equal parts. And next to P in clockwise direction name those 1, 2, 3, up to 8. 6)  With O as center, O-1 as radius draw an arc in the sector. Take O-2, O- 3, O-4, O-5 up to O-8 distances with center O, draw all concentric arcs in sector. Take fixed distance C-P in compass, C1 center, cut arc of 1 at P1. Repeat procedure and locate P2, P3, P4, P5 unto P8 (as in cycloid) and join them by smooth curve. This is EPI – CYCLOID.
  • 63. HYPO CYCLOID C P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P 1 2 3 6 5 7 4 C1 C2 C3 C4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C8 O OC = R ( Radius of Directing Circle) CP = r (Radius of Generating Circle) + r R 3600 = PROBLEM 26: DRAW LOCUS OF A POINT ON THE PERIPHERY OF A CIRCLE WHICH ROLLS FROM THE INSIDE OF A CURVED PATH. Take diameter of rolling circle 50 mm and radius of directing circle (curved path) 75 mm. Solution Steps: 1)  Smaller circle is rolling here, inside the larger circle. It has to rotate anticlockwise to move ahead. 2)  Same steps should be taken as in case of EPI – CYCLOID. Only change is in numbering direction of 8 number of equal parts on the smaller circle. 3)  From next to P in anticlockwise direction, name 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8. 4)  Further all steps are that of epi – cycloid. This is called HYPO – CYCLOID.
  • 64. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P2 P6 P1 P3 P5 P7 P4 O SPIRALProblem 27: Draw a spiral of one convolution. Take distance PO 40 mm. Solution Steps 1. With PO radius draw a circle and divide it in EIGHT parts. Name those 1,2,3,4, etc. up to 8 2 .Similarly divided line PO also in EIGHT parts and name those 1,2,3,-- as shown. 3. Take o-1 distance from op line and draw an arc up to O1 radius vector. Name the point P1 4. Similarly mark points P2, P3, P4 up to P8 And join those in a smooth curve. It is a SPIRAL of one convolution. IMPORTANT APPROACH FOR CONSTRUCTION! FIND TOTAL ANGULAR AND TOTAL LINEAR DISPLACEMENT AND DIVIDE BOTH IN TO SAME NUMBER OF EQUAL PARTS.
  • 65. 16 13 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P 1,9 2,10 3,11 4,12 5,13 6,14 7,15 8,16 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 SPIRAL of two convolutions Problem 28 Point P is 80 mm from point O. It starts moving towards O and reaches it in two revolutions around.it Draw locus of point P (To draw a Spiral of TWO convolutions). IMPORTANT APPROACH FOR CONSTRUCTION! FIND TOTAL ANGULAR AND TOTAL LINEAR DISPLACEMENT AND DIVIDE BOTH IN TO SAME NUMBER OF EQUAL PARTS. SOLUTION STEPS: Total angular displacement here is two revolutions And Total Linear displacement here is distance PO. Just divide both in same parts i.e. Circle in EIGHT parts. ( means total angular displacement in SIXTEEN parts) Divide PO also in SIXTEEN parts. Rest steps are similar to the previous problem.
  • 66. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P P1 P P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HELIX (UPON A CYLINDER) PROBLEM: Draw a helix of one convolution, upon a cylinder. Given 80 mm pitch and 50 mm diameter of a cylinder. (The axial advance during one complete revolution is called The pitch of the helix) SOLUTION: Draw projections of a cylinder. Divide circle and axis in to same no. of equal parts. ( 8 ) Name those as shown. Mark initial position of point ‘P’ Mark various positions of P as shown in animation. Join all points by smooth possible curve. Make upper half dotted, as it is going behind the solid and hence will not be seen from front side.
  • 67. P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5P6 P7 P8 X Y HELIX (UPON A CONE)PROBLEM: Draw a helix of one convolution, upon a cone, diameter of base 70 mm, axis 90 mm and 90 mm pitch. (The axial advance during one complete revolution is called The pitch of the helix) SOLUTION: Draw projections of a cone Divide circle and axis in to same no. of equal parts. ( 8 ) Name those as shown. Mark initial position of point ‘P’ Mark various positions of P as shown in animation. Join all points by smooth possible curve. Make upper half dotted, as it is going behind the solid and hence will not be seen from front side.
  • 68. Tangent Normal Q Involute Method of Drawing Tangent & Normal STEPS: DRAW INVOLUTE AS USUAL. MARK POINT Q ON IT AS DIRECTED. JOIN Q TO THE CENTER OF CIRCLE C. CONSIDERING CQ DIAMETER, DRAW A SEMICIRCLE AS SHOWN. MARK POINT OF INTERSECTION OF THIS SEMICIRCLE AND POLE CIRCLE AND JOIN IT TO Q. THIS WILL BE NORMAL TO INVOLUTE. DRAW A LINE AT RIGHT ANGLE TO THIS LINE FROM Q. IT WILL BE TANGENT TO INVOLUTE. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P P8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INVOLUTE OF A CIRCLE  D C
  • 69. Q N Normal Tangent CYCLOID Method of Drawing Tangent & Normal STEPS: DRAW CYCLOID AS USUAL. MARK POINT Q ON IT AS DIRECTED. WITH CP DISTANCE, FROM Q. CUT THE POINT ON LOCUS OF C AND JOIN IT TO Q. FROM THIS POINT DROP A PERPENDICULAR ON GROUND LINE AND NAME IT N JOIN N WITH Q.THIS WILL BE NORMAL TO CYCLOID. DRAW A LINE AT RIGHT ANGLE TO THIS LINE FROM Q. IT WILL BE TANGENT TO CYCLOID. P C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 D CYCLOID C CP
  • 70. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P2 P6 P1 P3 P5 P7 P4 O SPIRAL (ONE CONVOLUSION.) Normal Tangent Q Spiral. Method of Drawing Tangent & Normal Constant of the Curve = Difference in length of any radius vectors Angle between the corresponding radius vector in radian. OP – OP2 /2 OP – OP2 1.57 = 3.185 m.m. == STEPS: *DRAW SPIRAL AS USUAL. DRAW A SMALL CIRCLE OF RADIUS EQUAL TO THE CONSTANT OF CURVE CALCULATED ABOVE. * LOCATE POINT Q AS DISCRIBED IN PROBLEM AND THROUGH IT DRAW A TANGENTTO THIS SMALLER CIRCLE.THIS IS A NORMAL TO THE SPIRAL. *DRAW A LINE AT RIGHT ANGLE *TO THIS LINE FROM Q. IT WILL BE TANGENT TO CYCLOID.
  • 71. LOCUS It is a path traced out by a point moving in a plane, in a particular manner, for one cycle of operation. The cases are classified in THREE categories for easy understanding. A} Basic Locus Cases. B} Oscillating Link…… C} Rotating Link……… Basic Locus Cases: Here some geometrical objects like point, line, circle will be described with there relative Positions. Then one point will be allowed to move in a plane maintaining specific relation with above objects. And studying situation carefully you will be asked to draw it’s locus. Oscillating & Rotating Link: Here a link oscillating from one end or rotating around it’s center will be described. Then a point will be allowed to slide along the link in specific manner. And now studying the situation carefully you will be asked to draw it’s locus. STUDY TEN CASES GIVEN ON NEXT PAGES
  • 72. A B p 4 3 2 1 F1 2 3 4 SOLUTION STEPS: 1.Locate center of line, perpendicular to AB from point F. This will be initial point P. 2.Mark 5 mm distance to its right side, name those points 1,2,3,4 and from those draw lines parallel to AB. 3.Mark 5 mm distance to its left of P and name it 1. 4.Take F-1 distance as radius and F as center draw an arc cutting first parallel line to AB. Name upper point P1 and lower point P2 . 5.Similarly repeat this process by taking again 5mm to right and left and locate P3 P4 . 6.Join all these points in smooth curve. It will be the locus of P equidistance from line AB and fixed point F. P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 PROBLEM 1.: Point F is 50 mm from a vertical straight line AB. Draw locus of point P, moving in a plane such that it always remains equidistant from point F and line AB. Basic Locus Cases:
  • 73. A B p 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 C SOLUTION STEPS: 1.Locate center of line, perpendicular to AB from the periphery of circle. This will be initial point P. 2.Mark 5 mm distance to its right side, name those points 1,2,3,4 and from those draw lines parallel to AB. 3.Mark 5 mm distance to its left of P and name it 1,2,3,4. 4.Take C-1 distance as radius and C as center draw an arc cutting first parallel line to AB. Name upper point P1 and lower point P2 . 5.Similarly repeat this process by taking again 5mm to right and left and locate P3 P4 . 6.Join all these points in smooth curve. It will be the locus of P equidistance from line AB and given circle. 50 D 75 mm PROBLEM 2 : A circle of 50 mm diameter has it’s center 75 mm from a vertical line AB.. Draw locus of point P, moving in a plane such that it always remains equidistant from given circle and line AB. Basic Locus Cases:
  • 74. 95 mm 30 D 60 D p 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 C2C1 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 PROBLEM 3 : Center of a circle of 30 mm diameter is 90 mm away from center of another circle of 60 mm diameter. Draw locus of point P, moving in a plane such that it always remains equidistant from given two circles. SOLUTION STEPS: 1.Locate center of line,joining two centers but part in between periphery of two circles.Name it P. This will be initial point P. 2.Mark 5 mm distance to its right side, name those points 1,2,3,4 and from those draw arcs from C1 As center. 3. Mark 5 mm distance to its right side, name those points 1,2,3,4 and from those draw arcs from C2 As center. 4.Mark various positions of P as per previous problems and name those similarly. 5.Join all these points in smooth curve. It will be the locus of P equidistance from given two circles. Basic Locus Cases:
  • 75. 2CC1 30 D 60 D 350 C1 Solution Steps: 1) Here consider two pairs, one is a case of two circles with centres C1 and C2 and draw locus of point P equidistance from them. (As per solution of case D above). 2) Consider second case that of fixed circle (C1 ) and fixed line AB and draw locus of point P equidistance from them. (as per solution of case B above). 3) Locate the point where these two loci intersect each other. Name it x. It will be the point equidistance from given two circles and line AB. 4) Take x as centre and its perpendicular distance on AB as radius, draw a circle which will touch given two circles and line AB. Problem 4:In the given situation there are two circles of different diameters and one inclined line AB, as shown. Draw one circle touching these three objects. Basic Locus Cases:
  • 76. P A B 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 70 mm 30 mm p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 Problem 5:-Two points A and B are 100 mm apart. There is a point P, moving in a plane such that the difference of it’s distances from A and B always remains constant and equals to 40 mm. Draw locus of point P. Basic Locus Cases: Solution Steps: 1.Locate A & B points 100 mm apart. 2.Locate point P on AB line, 70 mm from A and 30 mm from B As PA-PB=40 ( AB = 100 mm ) 3.On both sides of P mark points 5 mm apart. Name those 1,2,3,4 as usual. 4.Now similar to steps of Problem 2, Draw different arcs taking A & B centers and A-1, B-1, A-2, B-2 etc as radius. 5. Mark various positions of p i.e. and join them in smooth possible curve. It will be locus of P
  • 77. 1)      Mark lower most position of M on extension of AB (downward) by taking distance MN (40 mm) from point B (because N can not go beyond B ). 2)      Divide line (M initial and M lower most ) into eight to ten parts and mark them M1 , M2 , M3 up to the last position of M . 3)      Now take MN (40 mm) as fixed distance in compass, M1 center cut line CB in N1 . 4)      Mark point P1 on M1 N1 with same distance of MP from M1 . 5)      Similarly locate M2 P2, M3 P3 , M4 P4 and join all P points. It will be locus of P. Solution Steps: 600 900 M N N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 A B C D M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M6 M12 M13 N13 p p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 p13 p11 p12 Problem 6:-Two points A and B are 100 mm apart. There is a point P, moving in a plane such that the difference of it’s distances from A and B always remains constant and equals to 40 mm. Draw locus of point P. FORK & SLIDER
  • 78. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 p p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 O A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Problem No.7: A Link OA, 80 mm long oscillates around O, 600 to right side and returns to it’s initial vertical Position with uniform velocity.Mean while point P initially on O starts sliding downwards and reaches end A with uniform velocity. Draw locus of point P Solution Steps: Point P- Reaches End A (Downwards) 1) Divide OA in EIGHT equal parts and from O to A after O name 1, 2, 3, 4 up to 8. (i.e. up to point A). 2) Divide 600 angle into four parts (150 each) and mark each point by A1 , A2 , A3 , A4 and for return A5 , A6 , A7 andA8 . (Initial A point). 3) Take center O, distance in compass O-1 draw an arc upto OA1 . Name this point as P1. 1)    Similarly O center O-2 distance mark P2 on line O-A2 . 2)    This way locate P3 , P4 , P5 , P6 , P7 and P8 and join them. ( It will be thw desired locus of P ) OSCILLATING LINK
  • 79. p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 O A Problem No 8: A Link OA, 80 mm long oscillates around O, 600 to right side, 1200 to left and returns to it’s initial vertical Position with uniform velocity.Mean while point P initially on O starts sliding downwards, reaches end A and returns to O again with uniform velocity. Draw locus of point P Solution Steps: ( P reaches A i.e. moving downwards. & returns to O again i.e.moves upwards ) 1.Here distance traveled by point P is PA.plus AP.Hence divide it into eight equal parts.( so total linear displacement gets divided in 16 parts) Name those as shown. 2.Link OA goes 600 to right, comes back to original (Vertical) position, goes 600 to left and returns to original vertical position. Hence total angular displacement is 2400 . Divide this also in 16 parts. (150 each.) Name as per previous problem.(A, A1 A2 etc) 3.Mark different positions of P as per the procedure adopted in previous case. and complete the problem. A2 A1 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 p8 p5 p6 p7 p2 p4 p1 p3 OSCILLATING LINK
  • 80. A B A1 A2 A4 A5 A3 A6 A7 P p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Problem 9: Rod AB, 100 mm long, revolves in clockwise direction for one revolution. Meanwhile point P, initially on A starts moving towards B and reaches B. Draw locus of point P. ROTATING LINK 1)  AB Rod revolves around center O for one revolution and point P slides along AB rod and reaches end B in one revolution. 2)  Divide circle in 8 number of equal parts and name in arrow direction after A-A1, A2, A3, up to A8. 3)  Distance traveled by point P is AB mm. Divide this also into 8 number of equal parts. 4)  Initially P is on end A. When A moves to A1, point P goes one linear division (part) away from A1. Mark it from A1 and name the point P1. 5)   When A moves to A2, P will be two parts away from A2 (Name it P2 ). Mark it as above from A2. 6)   From A3 mark P3 three parts away from P3. 7)   Similarly locate P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8 which will be eight parts away from A8. [Means P has reached B]. 8)   Join all P points by smooth curve. It will be locus of P
  • 81. A B A1 A2 A4 A5 A3 A6 A7 P p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 1 2 3 4567 Problem 10 : Rod AB, 100 mm long, revolves in clockwise direction for one revolution. Meanwhile point P, initially on A starts moving towards B, reaches B And returns to A in one revolution of rod. Draw locus of point P. Solution Steps + + + + ROTATING LINK 1)   AB Rod revolves around center O for one revolution and point P slides along rod AB reaches end B and returns to A. 2)   Divide circle in 8 number of equal parts and name in arrow direction after A-A1, A2, A3, up to A8. 3)   Distance traveled by point P is AB plus AB mm. Divide AB in 4 parts so those will be 8 equal parts on return. 4)   Initially P is on end A. When A moves to A1, point P goes one linear division (part) away from A1. Mark it from A1 and name the point P1. 5)   When A moves to A2, P will be two parts away from A2 (Name it P2 ). Mark it as above from A2. 6)   From A3 mark P3 three parts away from P3. 7)   Similarly locate P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8 which will be eight parts away from A8. [Means P has reached B]. 8)   Join all P points by smooth curve. It will be locus of P The Locus will follow the loop path two times in one revolution.
  • 82. DRAWINGS: ( A Graphical Representation) The Fact about: If compared with Verbal or Written Description, Drawings offer far better idea about the Shape, Size & Appearance of any object or situation or location, that too in quite a less time. Hence it has become the Best Media of Communication not only in Engineering but in almost all Fields.
  • 83. Drawings (Some Types) Nature Drawings ( landscape, scenery etc.) Geographical Drawings ( maps etc.) Botanical Drawings ( plants, flowers etc.) Zoological Drawings (creatures, animals etc.) Portraits ( human faces, expressions etc.) Engineering Drawings, (projections.) Machine component DrawingsBuilding Related Drawings. Orthographic Projections (Fv,Tv & Sv.-Mech.Engg terms) (Plan, Elevation- Civil Engg.terms) (Working Drawings 2-D type) Isometric ( Mech.Engg.Term.) or Perspective(Civil Engg.Term) (Actual Object Drawing 3-D)
  • 84. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS: Horizontal Plane (HP), Vertical Frontal Plane ( VP ) Side Or Profile Plane ( PP) Planes. Pattern of planes & Pattern of views Methods of drawing Orthographic Projections Different Reference planes are FV is a view projected on VP. TV is a view projected on HP. SV is a view projected on PP. And Different Views are Front View (FV), Top View (TV) and Side View (SV) IMPORTANT TERMS OF ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS: IT IS A TECHNICAL DRAWING IN WHICH DIFFERENT VIEWS OF AN OBJECT ARE PROJECTED ON DIFFERENT REFERENCE PLANES OBSERVING PERPENDICULAR TO RESPECTIVE REFERENCE PLANE 1 2 3
  • 85.  A.I.P.  to Vp& to Hp  A.V.P.  to Hp &  to Vp PLANES PRINCIPAL PLANES HP AND VP AUXILIARY PLANES Auxiliary Vertical Plane (A.V.P.) Profile Plane ( P.P.) Auxiliary Inclined Plane (A.I.P.) 1
  • 86. THIS IS A PICTORIAL SET-UP OF ALL THREE PLANES. ARROW DIRECTION IS A NORMAL WAY OF OBSERVING THE OBJECT. BUT IN THIS DIRECTION ONLY VPAND A VIEW ON IT (FV) CAN BE SEEN. THE OTHER PLANES AND VIEWS ON THOSE CAN NOT BE SEEN. X Y HP IS ROTATED DOWNWARD 900 AND BROUGHT IN THE PLANE OF VP. PP IS ROTATED IN RIGHT SIDE 900 AND BROUGHT IN THE PLANE OF VP. X Y X Y VP HP PP FV ACTUAL PATTERN OF PLANES & VIEWS OF ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS DRAWN IN FIRST ANGLE METHOD OF PROJECTIONS LSV TV PROCEDURE TO SOLVE ABOVE PROBLEM:- TO MAKE THOSE PLANES ALSO VISIBLE FROM THE ARROW DIRECTION, A) HP IS ROTATED 900 DOUNWARD B) PP, 900 IN RIGHT SIDE DIRECTION. THIS WAY BOTH PLANES ARE BROUGHT IN THE SAME PLANE CONTAINING VP. PATTERN OF PLANES & VIEWS (First Angle Method) 2 Click to view Animation On clicking the button if a warning comes please click YES to continue, this program is safe for your pc.
  • 87. Methods of Drawing Orthographic Projections First Angle Projections Method Here views are drawn by placing object in 1st Quadrant ( Fv above X-y, Tv below X-y ) Third Angle Projections Method Here views are drawn by placing object in 3rd Quadrant. ( Tv above X-y, Fv below X-y ) FV TV X Y X Y G L TV FV SYMBOLIC PRESENTATION OF BOTH METHODS WITH AN OBJECT STANDING ON HP ( GROUND) ON IT’S BASE. 3 NOTE:- HP term is used in 1st Angle method & For the same Ground term is used in 3rd Angle method of projections
  • 88. FOR T.V. FOR S.V. FOR F.V. FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION IN THIS METHOD, THE OBJECT IS ASSUMED TO BE SITUATED IN FIRST QUADRANT MEANS ABOVE HP & INFRONT OF VP. OBJECT IS INBETWEEN OBSERVER & PLANE. ACTUAL PATTERN OF PLANES & VIEWS IN FIRST ANGLE METHOD OF PROJECTIONS X Y VP HP PP FV LSV TV
  • 89. FOR T.V. FOR F.V. IN THIS METHOD, THE OBJECT IS ASSUMED TO BE SITUATED IN THIRD QUADRANT ( BELOW HP & BEHIND OF VP. ) PLANES BEING TRANSPERENT AND INBETWEEN OBSERVER & OBJECT. ACTUAL PATTERN OF PLANES & VIEWS OF THIRD ANGLE PROJECTIONS X Y TV THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION LSV FV
  • 90. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS { MACHINE ELEMENTS } OBJECT IS OBSERVED IN THREE DIRECTIONS. THE DIRECTIONS SHOULD BE NORMAL TO THE RESPECTIVE PLANES. AND NOW PROJECT THREE DIFFERENT VIEWS ON THOSE PLANES. THESE VEWS ARE FRONT VIEW , TOP VIEW AND SIDE VIEW. FRONT VIEW IS A VIEW PROJECTED ON VERTICAL PLANE ( VP ) TOP VIEW IS A VIEW PROJECTED ON HORIZONTAL PLANE ( HP ) SIDE VIEW IS A VIEW PROJECTED ON PROFILE PLANE ( PP ) AND THEN STUDY NEXT 26 ILLUSTRATED CASES CAREFULLY. TRY TO RECOGNIZE SURFACES PERPENDICULAR TO THE ARROW DIRECTIONS FIRST STUDY THE CONCEPT OF 1ST AND 3RD ANGLE PROJECTION METHODS
  • 91. FOR T.V. FOR S.V. FOR F.V. FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION IN THIS METHOD, THE OBJECT IS ASSUMED TO BE SITUATED IN FIRST QUADRANT MEANS ABOVE HP & INFRONT OF VP. OBJECT IS INBETWEEN OBSERVER & PLANE. ACTUAL PATTERN OF PLANES & VIEWS IN FIRST ANGLE METHOD OF PROJECTIONS X Y VP HP PP FV LSV TV
  • 92. ACTUAL PATTERN OF PLANES & VIEWS OF THIRD ANGLE PROJECTIONS X TV LSV FV IN THIS METHOD, THE OBJECT IS ASSUMED TO BE SITUATED IN THIRD QUADRANT ( BELOW HP & BEHIND OF VP. ) PLANES BEING TRANSPERENT AND INBETWEEN OBSERVER & OBJECT. FOR T.V. FOR S.V. Y THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
  • 93. x y FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW FOR F.V. FOR S.V. FOR T.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS 1
  • 94. FOR F.V. FOR S.V. FOR T.V. X Y FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 2
  • 95. FOR F.V. FOR S.V. FOR T.V. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS X Y FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW 3 PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
  • 96. FOR T.V. FOR S.V. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FOR F.V. FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y 4 PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
  • 97. FOR T.V. FOR F.V. FOR S.V. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y 5 PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
  • 98. FOR T.V. FOR F.V.FOR S.V. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y 6 PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
  • 99. FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y FOR T.V. FOR F.V. FOR S.V. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS 7 PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD
  • 100. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS X Y 50 20 25 25 20 FOR T.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 8 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW
  • 101. FOR T.V. FOR F.V. FOR S.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 9 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y
  • 102. FOR T.V. FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 10 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y
  • 103. FOR T.V. FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 11 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y
  • 104. FOR T.V. FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 12 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y
  • 105. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS x y FV 35 35 10 TV 302010 40 70 O FOR T.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 13 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
  • 106. ZSTUDY ILLUSTRATIONS SV TV yx FV 30 30 10 30 10 30 ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL FOR T.V. FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 14 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
  • 107. x y FV SV Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS TV 10 40 60 60 40 ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL FOR T.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 15 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
  • 108. FOR T.V. FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW THREE VIEWS OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 16ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS x y FV SV ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL 40 60 60 40 10 TOP VIEW
  • 109. 40 20 30 SQUARE 20 50 60 30 10 F.V. S.V. O FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND SV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 17 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW X Y
  • 110. 50 80 10 30 D TV O FOR T.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 18ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS 40 10 45 FV O X Y
  • 111. X Y FV O 40 10 10 TV 25 25 30 R 100 103010 20 D FOR F.V. O PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 19 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FOR T.V.
  • 112. O 20 D 30 D 60 D TV 10 30 50 10 35 FV X Y RECT. SLOT FOR T.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 20ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS TOP VIEW
  • 113. O O 40 25 80 F.V. 10 15 25 25 25 25 10 S.V. FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND SV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 21 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
  • 114. 450 X FV Y 30 40 TV 30 D 40 40 15 O FOR T.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 22 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
  • 115. O O 20 20 15 40 100 30 60 30 20 20 50 HEX PART FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV ABD SV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 23 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW
  • 116. O 10 30 10 80 30 T.V. O 10 30 4020 F.V. X Y FOR T.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND TV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 24ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW
  • 117. LSV Y 25 25 1050 FV X 10 10 15 O FOR S.V. FOR F.V. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND LSV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 25 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
  • 118. YX F.V. LEFT S.V. 20 2010 15 15 15 30 10 30 50 15 FOR S.V. FOR F.V. O PICTORIAL PRESENTATION IS GIVEN DRAW FV AND SV OF THIS OBJECT BY FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION METHOD 26 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
  • 119. TO DRAW PROJECTIONS OF ANY OBJECT, ONE MUST HAVE FOLLOWING INFORMATION A) OBJECT { WITH IT’S DESCRIPTION, WELL DEFINED.} B) OBSERVER { ALWAYS OBSERVING PERPENDICULAR TO RESP. REF.PLANE}. C) LOCATION OF OBJECT, { MEANS IT’S POSITION WITH REFFERENCE TO H.P. & V.P.} TERMS ‘ABOVE’ & ‘BELOW’ WITH RESPECTIVE TO H.P. AND TERMS ‘INFRONT’ & ‘BEHIND’ WITH RESPECTIVE TO V.P FORM 4 QUADRANTS. OBJECTS CAN BE PLACED IN ANY ONE OF THESE 4 QUADRANTS. IT IS INTERESTING TO LEARN THE EFFECT ON THE POSITIONS OF VIEWS ( FV, TV ) OF THE OBJECT WITH RESP. TO X-Y LINE, WHEN PLACED IN DIFFERENT QUADRANTS. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS OF POINTS, LINES, PLANES, AND SOLIDS. STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS GIVEN ON HEXT PAGES AND NOTE THE RESULTS.TO MAKE IT EASY HERE A POINT A IS TAKEN AS AN OBJECT. BECAUSE IT’S ALL VIEWS ARE JUST POINTS.
  • 120. NOTATIONS FOLLOWING NOTATIONS SHOULD BE FOLLOWED WHILE NAMEING DIFFERENT VIEWS IN ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS. IT’S FRONT VIEW a’ a’ b’ SAME SYSTEM OF NOTATIONS SHOULD BE FOLLOWED INCASE NUMBERS, LIKE 1, 2, 3 – ARE USED. OBJECT POINT A LINE AB IT’S TOP VIEW a a b IT’S SIDE VIEW a” a” b”
  • 121. X Y 1ST Quad.2nd Quad. 3rd Quad. 4th Quad. X Y VP HP Observer THIS QUADRANT PATTERN, IF OBSERVED ALONG X-Y LINE ( IN RED ARROW DIRECTION) WILL EXACTLY APPEAR AS SHOWN ON RIGHT SIDE AND HENCE, IT IS FURTHER USED TO UNDERSTAND ILLUSTRATION PROPERLLY.
  • 122. HP VP a’ a A POINT A IN 1ST QUADRANT OBSERVER VP HP POINT A IN 2ND QUADRANT OBSERVER a’ a A OBSERVER a a’ POINT A IN 3RD QUADRANT HP VP A OBSERVER a a’ POINT A IN 4TH QUADRANT HP VP A Point A is Placed In different quadrants and it’s Fv & Tv are brought in same plane for Observer to see clearly. Fv is visible as it is a view on VP. But as Tv is is a view on Hp, it is rotated downward 900 , In clockwise direction.The In front part of Hp comes below xy line and the part behind Vp comes above. Observe and note the process.
  • 123. A a a’ A a a’ A a a’ X Y X Y X YFor Fv For Tv For Fv For Tv For Tv For Fv POINT A ABOVE HP & INFRONT OF VP POINT A IN HP & INFRONT OF VP POINT A ABOVE HP & IN VP PROJECTIONS OF A POINT IN FIRST QUADRANT. PICTORIAL PRESENTATION PICTORIAL PRESENTATION ORTHOGRAPHIC PRESENTATIONS OF ALL ABOVE CASES. X Y a a’ VP HP X Y a’ VP HP a X Y a VP HP a’ Fv above xy, Tv below xy. Fv above xy, Tv on xy. Fv on xy, Tv below xy.
  • 124. SIMPLE CASES OF THE LINE 1. A VERTICAL LINE ( LINE PERPENDICULAR TO HP & // TO VP) 2. LINE PARALLEL TO BOTH HP & VP. 3. LINE INCLINED TO HP & PARALLEL TO VP. 4. LINE INCLINED TO VP & PARALLEL TO HP. 5. LINE INCLINED TO BOTH HP & VP. STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS GIVEN ON NEXT PAGE SHOWING CLEARLY THE NATURE OF FV & TV OF LINES LISTED ABOVE AND NOTE RESULTS. PROJECTIONS OF STRAIGHT LINES. INFORMATION REGARDING A LINE means IT’S LENGTH, POSITION OF IT’S ENDS WITH HP & VP IT’S INCLINATIONS WITH HP & VP WILL BE GIVEN. AIM:- TO DRAW IT’S PROJECTIONS - MEANS FV & TV.
  • 125. X Y V.P. X Y V.P. b’ a’ b a F.V. T.V. a b a’ b’ B A TV FV A B X Y H.P. V.P. a’ b’ a b Fv Tv X Y H.P. V.P. a b a’ b’Fv Tv For Fv For Tv For Tv For Fv Note: Fv is a vertical line Showing True Length & Tv is a point. Note: Fv & Tv both are // to xy & both show T. L. 1. 2. A Line perpendicular to Hp & // to Vp A Line // to Hp & // to Vp Orthographic Pattern Orthographic Pattern (Pictorial Presentation) (Pictorial Presentation)
  • 126. A Line inclined to Hp and parallel to Vp (Pictorial presentation) X Y V.P. A B b’ a’ b a   F.V. T.V. A Line inclined to Vp and parallel to Hp (Pictorial presentation) Ø V.P. a b a’ b’ BA Ø F.V. T.V. X Y H.P. V.P. F.V. T.V. a b a’ b’  X Y H.P. V.P. Øa b a’ b’ Tv Fv Tv inclined to xy Fv parallel to xy. 3. 4. Fv inclined to xy Tv parallel to xy. Orthographic Projections
  • 127. X Y V.P. For Fv a’ b’ a b B A   For Tv F.V. T.V. X Y V.P. a’ b’ a b   F.V. T.V. For Fv For Tv B A X Y   H.P. V.P. a b FV TV a’ b’ A Line inclined to both Hp and Vp (Pictorial presentation) 5. Note These Facts:- Both Fv & Tv are inclined to xy. (No view is parallel to xy) Both Fv & Tv are reduced lengths. (No view shows True Length) Orthographic Projections Fv is seen on Vp clearly. To see Tv clearly, HP is rotated 900 downwards, Hence it comes below xy. On removal of object i.e. Line AB Fv as a image on Vp. Tv as a image on Hp,
  • 128. X Y H.P. V.P. X Y  H.P. V.P. a b TV a’ b’ FV TV b2 b1’ TL X Y   H.P. V.P. a b FV TV a’ b’ Here TV (ab) is not // to XY line Hence it’s corresponding FV a’ b’ is not showing True Length & True Inclination with Hp. In this sketch, TV is rotated and made // to XY line. Hence it’s corresponding FV a’ b1’ Is showing True Length & True Inclination with Hp. Note the procedure When Fv & Tv known, How to find True Length. (Views are rotated to determine True Length & it’s inclinations with Hp & Vp). Note the procedure When True Length is known, How to locate Fv & Tv. (Component a-1 of TL is drawn which is further rotated to determine Fv) 1 a a’ b’ 1’ b  b1 ’   TL b1 Ø TL Fv Tv Orthographic Projections Means Fv & Tv of Line AB are shown below, with their apparent Inclinations  &  Here a -1 is component of TL ab1 gives length of Fv. Hence it is brought Up to Locus of a’ and further rotated to get point b’. a’ b’ will be Fv. Similarly drawing component of other TL(a’ b1‘) Tv can be drawn. 
  • 129. The most important diagram showing graphical relations among all important parameters of this topic. Study and memorize it as a CIRCUIT DIAGRAM And use in solving various problems. True Length is never rotated. It’s horizontal component is drawn & it is further rotated to locate view. Views are always rotated, made horizontal & further extended to locate TL,  & Ø Also Remember Important TEN parameters to be remembered with Notations used here onward Ø    1) True Length ( TL) – a’ b1’ & a b 2) Angle of TL with Hp - 3) Angle of TL with Vp – 4) Angle of FV with xy – 5) Angle of TV with xy – 6) LTV (length of FV) – Component (a-1) 7) LFV (length of TV) – Component (a’-1’) 8) Position of A- Distances of a & a’ from xy 9) Position of B- Distances of b & b’ from xy 10) Distance between End Projectors X Y H.P. V.P. 1a b  b1 Ø TLTv LFV a’ b’ 1’ b1 ’  TL Fv  LTV Distance between End Projectors.  & Construct with a’ Ø & Construct with a b & b1 on same locus. b’ & b1’ on same locus. NOTE this
  • 130. a’ b’ a b X Y b’1 b1 Ø  GROUP (A) GENERAL CASES OF THE LINE INCLINED TO BOTH HP & VP ( based on 10 parameters).PROBLEM 1) Line AB is 75 mm long and it is 300 & 400 Inclined to Hp & Vp respectively. End A is 12mm above Hp and 10 mm in front of Vp. Draw projections. Line is in 1st quadrant. SOLUTION STEPS: 1) Draw xy line and one projector. 2) Locate a’ 12mm above xy line & a 10mm below xy line. 3) Take 300 angle from a’ & 400 from a and mark TL I.e. 75mm on both lines. Name those points b1’ and b1 respectively. 4) Join both points with a’ and a resp. 5) Draw horizontal lines (Locus) from both points. 6) Draw horizontal component of TL a b1 from point b1 and name it 1. ( the length a-1 gives length of Fv as we have seen already.) 7) Extend it up to locus of a’ and rotating a’ as center locate b’ as shown. Join a’ b’ as Fv. 8) From b’ drop a projector down ward & get point b. Join a & b 1 LFV TL TL FV TV
  • 131. X y a a’ b1  450 TL 1 b’1b’ LFV FV TL 550 b TV PROBLEM 2: Line AB 75mm long makes 450 inclination with Vp while it’s Fv makes 550 . End A is 10 mm above Hp and 15 mm in front of Vp.If line is in 1st quadrant draw it’s projections and find it’s inclination with Hp. LOCUS OF b LOCUS OF Solution Steps:- 1.Draw x-y line. 2.Draw one projector for a’ & a 3.Locate a’ 10mm above x-y & Tv a 15 mm below xy. 4.Draw a line 450 inclined to xy from point a and cut TL 75 mm on it and name that point b1 Draw locus from point b1 5.Take 550 angle from a’ for Fv above xy line. 6.Draw a vertical line from b1 up to locus of a and name it 1. It is horizontal component of TL & is LFV. 7.Continue it to locus of a’ and rotate upward up to the line of Fv and name it b’.This a’ b’ line is Fv. 8. Drop a projector from b’ on locus from point b1 and name intersecting point b. Line a b is Tv of line AB. 9.Draw locus from b’ and from a’ with TL distance cut point b1‘ 10.Join a’ b1’ as TL and measure it’s angle at a’. It will be true angle of line with HP.
  • 132. X a’ y a b’ FV 500 b 600 b1 TL b’1 TL   PROBLEM 3: Fv of line AB is 500 inclined to xy and measures 55 mm long while it’s Tv is 600 inclined to xy line. If end A is 10 mm above Hp and 15 mm in front of Vp, draw it’s projections,find TL, inclinations of line with Hp & Vp. SOLUTION STEPS: 1.Draw xy line and one projector. 2.Locate a’ 10 mm above xy and a 15 mm below xy line. 3.Draw locus from these points. 4.Draw Fv 500 to xy from a’ and mark b’ Cutting 55mm on it. 5.Similarly draw Tv 600 to xy from a & drawing projector from b’ Locate point b and join a b. 6.Then rotating views as shown, locate True Lengths ab1 & a’b1’ and their angles with Hp and Vp.
  • 133. X Y a’ 1’ a b’1 LTV TL b1 1 b’ b LFV TVFV  TL  PROBLEM 4 :- Line AB is 75 mm long .It’s Fv and Tv measure 50 mm & 60 mm long respectively. End A is 10 mm above Hp and 15 mm in front of Vp. Draw projections of line AB if end B is in first quadrant.Find angle with Hp and Vp. SOLUTION STEPS: 1.Draw xy line and one projector. 2.Locate a’ 10 mm above xy and a 15 mm below xy line. 3.Draw locus from these points. 4.Cut 60mm distance on locus of a’ & mark 1’ on it as it is LTV. 5.Similarly Similarly cut 50mm on locus of a and mark point 1 as it is LFV. 6.From 1’ draw a vertical line upward and from a’ taking TL ( 75mm ) in compass, mark b’1 point on it. Join a’ b’1 points. 7. Draw locus from b’1 8. With same steps below get b1 point and draw also locus from it. 9. Now rotating one of the components I.e. a-1 locate b’ and join a’ with it to get Fv. 10. Locate tv similarly and measure Angles  &
  • 134. X Y c’ c LOCUS OF d & d1d d1 d’ d’1 TVFV TL TL   LOCUS OF d’ & d’1 PROBLEM 5 :- T.V. of a 75 mm long Line CD, measures 50 mm. End C is in Hp and 50 mm in front of Vp. End D is 15 mm in front of Vp and it is above Hp. Draw projections of CD and find angles with Hp and Vp. SOLUTION STEPS: 1.Draw xy line and one projector. 2.Locate c’ on xy and c 50mm below xy line. 3.Draw locus from these points. 4.Draw locus of d 15 mm below xy 5.Cut 50mm & 75 mm distances on locus of d from c and mark points d & d1 as these are Tv and line CD lengths resp.& join both with c. 6.From d1 draw a vertical line upward up to xy I.e. up to locus of c’ and draw an arc as shown. 7 Then draw one projector from d to meet this arc in d’ point & join c’ d’ 8. Draw locus of d’ and cut 75 mm on it from c’ as TL 9.Measure Angles  &
  • 135. TRACES OF THE LINE:- THESE ARE THE POINTS OF INTERSECTIONS OF A LINE ( OR IT’S EXTENSION ) WITH RESPECTIVE REFFERENCE PLANES. A LINE ITSELF OR IT’S EXTENSION, WHERE EVER TOUCHES H.P., THAT POINT IS CALLED TRACE OF THE LINE ON H.P.( IT IS CALLED H.T.) SIMILARLY, A LINE ITSELF OR IT’S EXTENSION, WHERE EVER TOUCHES V.P., THAT POINT IS CALLED TRACE OF THE LINE ON V.P.( IT IS CALLED V.T.) V.T.:- It is a point on Vp. Hence it is called Fv of a point in Vp. Hence it’s Tv comes on XY line.( Here onward named as v ) H.T.:- It is a point on Hp. Hence it is called Tv of a point in Hp. Hence it’s Fv comes on XY line.( Here onward named as ’h’ ) GROUP (B) PROBLEMS INVOLVING TRACES OF THE LINE.
  • 136. 1. Begin with FV. Extend FV up to XY line. 2. Name this point h’ ( as it is a Fv of a point in Hp) 3. Draw one projector from h’. 4. Now extend Tv to meet this projector. This point is HT STEPS TO LOCATE HT. (WHEN PROJECTIONS ARE GIVEN.) 1. Begin with TV. Extend TV up to XY line. 2. Name this point v ( as it is a Tv of a point in Vp) 3. Draw one projector from v. 4. Now extend Fv to meet this projector. This point is VT STEPS TO LOCATE VT. (WHEN PROJECTIONS ARE GIVEN.) h’ HTVT’ v a’ x y a b’ FV b TV Observe & note :- 1. Points h’ & v always on x-y line. 2. VT’ & v always on one projector. 3. HT & h’ always on one projector. 4. FV - h’- VT’ always co-linear. 5. TV - v - HT always co-linear. These points are used to solve next three problems.
  • 137. x y b’ b’1 a v VT’ a’ HT b h’ b1  300  450 PROBLEM 6 :- Fv of line AB makes 450 angle with XY line and measures 60 mm. Line’s Tv makes 300 with XY line. End A is 15 mm above Hp and it’s VT is 10 mm below Hp. Draw projections of line AB,determine inclinations with Hp & Vp and locate HT, VT. 15 10 SOLUTION STEPS:- Draw xy line, one projector and locate fv a’ 15 mm above xy. Take 450 angle from a’ and marking 60 mm on it locate point b’. Draw locus of VT, 10 mm below xy & extending Fv to this locus locate VT. as fv-h’-vt’ lie on one st.line. Draw projector from vt, locate v on xy. From v take 300 angle downward as Tv and it’s inclination can begin with v. Draw projector from b’ and locate b I.e.Tv point. Now rotating views as usual TL and it’s inclinations can be found. Name extension of Fv, touching xy as h’ and below it, on extension of Tv, locate HT.
  • 138. a’ b’ FV 30 45 10 LOCUS OF b’ & b’1 X Y 450 VT’ v HT h’ LOCUS OF b & b1 100 a b TV b’1  TL  TL b1 PROBLEM 7 : One end of line AB is 10mm above Hp and other end is 100 mm in-front of Vp. It’s Fv is 450 inclined to xy while it’s HT & VT are 45mm and 30 mm below xy respectively. Draw projections and find TL with it’s inclinations with Hp & VP. SOLUTION STEPS:- Draw xy line, one projector and locate a’ 10 mm above xy. Draw locus 100 mm below xy for points b & b1 Draw loci for VT and HT, 30 mm & 45 mm below xy respectively. Take 450 angle from a’ and extend that line backward to locate h’ and VT, & Locate v on xy above VT. Locate HT below h’ as shown. Then join v – HT – and extend to get top view end b. Draw projector upward and locate b’ Make a b & a’b’ dark. Now as usual rotating views find TL and it’s inclinations.
  • 139. X y HT VT h’ a’ v b’ a b 80 50 b’1   TL TL FV TV b 1 10 35 55 Locus of a’ PROBLEM 8 :- Projectors drawn from HT and VT of a line AB are 80 mm apart and those drawn from it’s ends are 50 mm apart. End A is 10 mm above Hp, VT is 35 mm below Hp while it’s HT is 45 mm in front of Vp. Draw projections, locate traces and find TL of line & inclinations with Hp and Vp. SOLUTION STEPS:- 1.Draw xy line and two projectors, 80 mm apart and locate HT & VT , 35 mm below xy and 55 mm above xy respectively on these projectors. 2.Locate h’ and v on xy as usual. 3.Now just like previous two problems, Extending certain lines complete Fv & Tv And as usual find TL and it’s inclinations.
  • 140. b1 a’ FV VT’ v TV X Y b’ a b   b1’ TL TL Then from point v & HT angles can be drawn. & From point VT’ & h’ angles can be drawn. &  & Instead of considering a & a’ as projections of first point, if v & VT’ are considered as first point , then true inclinations of line with Hp & Vp i.e. angles  &  can be constructed with points VT’ & V respectively. THIS CONCEPT IS USED TO SOLVE NEXT THREE PROBLEMS.
  • 141. PROBLEM 9 :- Line AB 100 mm long is 300 and 450 inclined to Hp & Vp respectively. End A is 10 mm above Hp and it’s VT is 20 mm below Hp .Draw projections of the line and it’s HT. X Y VT’ v 10 20 Locus of a & a1’  (300 ) (450 ) a1’ 100 mm b1’ b1 a1 100 mm b’ a’ b a FV TV HT h’ SOLUTION STEPS:- Draw xy, one projector and locate on it VT and V. Draw locus of a’ 10 mm above xy. Take 300 from VT and draw a line. Where it intersects with locus of a’ name it a1’ as it is TL of that part. From a1’ cut 100 mm (TL) on it and locate point b1’ Now from v take 450 and draw a line downwards & Mark on it distance VT-a1’ I.e.TL of extension & name it a1 Extend this line by 100 mm and mark point b1. Draw it’s component on locus of VT’ & further rotate to get other end of Fv i.e.b’ Join it with VT’ and mark intersection point (with locus of a1’ ) and name it a’ Now as usual locate points a and b and h’ and HT.
  • 142. PROBLEM 10 :- A line AB is 75 mm long. It’s Fv & Tv make 450 and 600 inclinations with X-Y line resp End A is 15 mm above Hp and VT is 20 mm below Xy line. Line is in first quadrant. Draw projections, find inclinations with Hp & Vp. Also locate HT. X Y VT’ v 15 20 Locus of a & a1’ a1’ 75 mm b1’ b1 a1 75 mm b’ a’ b a FV TV HT h’ 450 600   SOLUTION STEPS:- Similar to the previous only change is instead of line’s inclinations, views inclinations are given. So first take those angles from VT & v Properly, construct Fv & Tv of extension, then determine it’s TL( V-a1) and on it’s extension mark TL of line and proceed and complete it.
  • 143. PROBLEM 11 :- The projectors drawn from VT & end A of line AB are 40mm apart. End A is 15mm above Hp and 25 mm in front of Vp. VT of line is 20 mm below Hp. If line is 75mm long, draw it’s projections, find inclinations with HP & Vp X Y 40mm 15 20 25 v VT’ a’ a a1’ b1’b’ b TV FV 75m m b1   Draw two projectors for VT & end A Locate these points and then YES ! YOU CAN COMPLETE IT.
  • 144. X A.I.P. GROUP (C) CASES OF THE LINES IN A.V.P., A.I.P. & PROFILE PLANE.  a’ b’ Line AB is in AIP as shown in above figure no 1. It’s FV (a’b’) is shown projected on Vp.(Looking in arrow direction) Here one can clearly see that the Inclination of AIP with HP = Inclination of FV with XY line Line AB is in AVP as shown in above figure no 2.. It’s TV (a b) is shown projected on Hp.(Looking in arrow direction) Here one can clearly see that the Inclination of AVP with VP = Inclination of TV with XY line A.V.P.  A B  a b B A
  • 145. PPVP HP a b a’ b’ a” b” X Y FV TV LSV A B a b a’ b’ For F.V. For T.V. LINE IN A PROFILE PLANE ( MEANS IN A PLANE PERPENDICULAR TO BOTH HP & VP) Results:- 1. TV & FV both are vertical, hence arrive on one single projector. 2. It’s Side View shows True Length ( TL) 3. Sum of it’s inclinations with HP & VP equals to 900 ( 4. It’s HT & VT arrive on same projector and can be easily located From Side View.  + = 900 ) OBSERVE CAREFULLY ABOVE GIVEN ILLUSTRATION AND 2nd SOLVED PROBLEM. ORTHOGRAPHIC PATTERN OF LINE IN PROFILE PLANE HT VT  
  • 146. PROBLEM 12 :- Line AB 80 mm long, makes 300 angle with Hp and lies in an Aux.Vertical Plane 450 inclined to Vp. End A is 15 mm above Hp and VT is 10 mm below X-y line. Draw projections, fine angle with Vp and Ht. VT v X Y a b a’ b’ a1’ b1 ’ Locus of b’ Locus of b’ 10 15 HT h’  b1  AVP 450 to VP 450 Locus of a’ & a1’ Simply consider inclination of AVP as inclination of TV of our line, well then? You sure can complete it as previous problems! Go ahead!!
  • 147. PROBLEM 13 :- A line AB, 75mm long, has one end A in Vp. Other end B is 15 mm above Hp and 50 mm in front of Vp.Draw the projections of the line when sum of it’s Inclinations with HP & Vp is 900 , means it is lying in a profile plane. Find true angles with ref.planes and it’s traces. a b HT VT X Y a’ b’ Side View ( True Length ) a” b” (HT) (VT) HP VP Front view top view SOLUTION STEPS:- After drawing xy line and one projector Locate top view of A I.e point a on xy as It is in Vp, Locate Fv of B i.e.b’15 mm above xy as it is above Hp.and Tv of B i.e. b, 50 mm below xy asit is 50 mm in front of Vp Draw side view structure of Vp and Hp and locate S.V. of point B i.e. b’’ From this point cut 75 mm distance on Vp and Mark a’’ as A is in Vp. (This is also VT of line.) From this point draw locus to left & get a’ Extend SV up to Hp. It will be HT. As it is a Tv Rotate it and bring it on projector of b. Now as discussed earlier SV gives TL of line and at the same time on extension up to Hp & Vp gives inclinations with those panes.  
  • 148. APPLICATIONS OF PRINCIPLES OF PROJECTIONS OF LINES IN SOLVING CASES OF DIFFERENT PRACTICAL SITUATIONS. In these types of problems some situation in the field or some object will be described . It’s relation with Ground ( HP ) And a Wall or some vertical object ( VP ) will be given. Indirectly information regarding Fv & Tv of some line or lines, inclined to both reference Planes will be given and you are supposed to draw it’s projections and further to determine it’s true Length and it’s inclinations with ground. Here various problems along with actual pictures of those situations are given for you to understand those clearly. Now looking for views in given ARROW directions, YOU are supposed to draw projections & find answers, Off course you must visualize the situation properly. CHECK YOUR ANSWERS WITH THE SOLUTIONS GIVEN IN THE END. ALL THE BEST !!
  • 149. Wall P Wall Q A B PROBLEM 14:-Two objects, a flower (A) and an orange (B) are within a rectangular compound wall, whose P & Q are walls meeting at 900 . Flower A is 1M & 5.5 M from walls P & Q respectively. Orange B is 4M & 1.5M from walls P & Q respectively. Drawing projection, find distance between them If flower is 1.5 M and orange is 3.5 M above the ground. Consider suitable scale.. TV FV
  • 150. PROBLEM 15 :- Two mangos on a tree A & B are 1.5 m and 3.00 m above ground and those are 1.2 m & 1.5 m from a 0.3 m thick wall but on opposite sides of it. If the distance measured between them along the ground and parallel to wall is 2.6 m, Then find real distance between them by drawing their projections. FV TV A B 0.3M THICK
  • 151. PROBLEM 16 :- oa, ob & oc are three lines, 25mm, 45mm and 65mm long respectively.All equally inclined and the shortest is vertical.This fig. is TV of three rods OA, OB and OC whose ends A,B & C are on ground and end O is 100mm above ground. Draw their projections and find length of each along with their angles with ground. 25mm 45 mm 65 mm A B C O FV TV
  • 152. PROBLEM 17:- A pipe line from point A has a downward gradient 1:5 and it runs due East-South. Another Point B is 12 M from A and due East of A and in same level of A. Pipe line from B runs 200 Due East of South and meets pipe line from A at point C. Draw projections and find length of pipe line from B and it’s inclination with ground. A B C Downward Gradient 1:5 1 5 12 M N E S
  • 153. N W S PROBLEM 18: A person observes two objects, A & B, on the ground, from a tower, 15 M high, At the angles of depression 300 & 450 . Object A is is due North-West direction of observer and object B is due West direction. Draw projections of situation and find distance of objects from observer and from tower also. A B O 300 450
  • 154. 4.5 M 7.5M 300 450 10 M 15 M FV TV A B C PROBLEM 19:-Guy ropes of two poles fixed at 4.5m and 7.5 m above ground, are attached to a corner of a building 15 M high, make 300 and 450 inclinations with ground respectively.The poles are 10 M apart. Determine by drawing their projections,Length of each rope and distance of poles from building.
  • 155. 1.2 M 0.7 M 4 M FV TV PROBLEM 20:- A tank of 4 M height is to be strengthened by four stay rods from each corner by fixing their other ends to the flooring, at a point 1.2 M and 0.7 M from two adjacent walls respectively, as shown. Determine graphically length and angle of each rod with flooring.
  • 156. FV 2 M 1.5 M 5 M A B C D Hook TV PROBLEM 21:- A horizontal wooden platform 2 M long and 1.5 M wide is supported by four chains from it’s corners and chains are attached to a hook 5 M above the center of the platform. Draw projections of the objects and determine length of each chain along with it’s inclination with ground. H
  • 157. PROBLEM 22. A room is of size 6.5m L ,5m D,3.5m high. An electric bulb hangs 1m below the center of ceiling. A switch is placed in one of the corners of the room, 1.5m above the flooring. Draw the projections an determine real distance between the bulb and switch. Switch Bulb Front wall Ceiling Side wall Observer TV L D H
  • 158. PROBLEM 23:- A PICTURE FRAME 2 M WIDE AND 1 M TALL IS RESTING ON HORIZONTAL WALL RAILING MAKES 350 INCLINATION WITH WALL. IT IS ATTAACHED TO A HOOK IN THE WALL BY TWO STRINGS. THE HOOK IS 1.5 M ABOVE WALL RAILING. DETERMINE LENGTH OF EACH CHAIN AND TRUE ANGLE BETWEEN THEM 350 1.5 M 1 M 2 M Wall railing FV TV
  • 159. X Y c’ c LOCUS OF d & d1d d1 d’ d’1 TV FV TL TL   LOCUS OF d’ & d’1 PROBLEM NO.24 T.V. of a 75 mm long Line CD, measures 50 mm. End C is 15 mm below Hp and 50 mm in front of Vp. End D is 15 mm in front of Vp and it is above Hp. Draw projections of CD and find angles with Hp and Vp. SOME CASES OF THE LINE IN DIFFERENT QUADRANTS. REMEMBER: BELOW HP- Means- Fv below xy BEHIND V p- Means- Tv above xy.
  • 160. X Y a a’ b b’ TV FV LOCUS OF b’ & b’1 LOCUS OF b & b1 b’1 TL  b1 TL  70 PROBLEM NO.25 End A of line AB is in Hp and 25 mm behind Vp. End B in Vp.and 50mm above Hp. Distance between projectors is 70mm. Draw projections and find it’s inclinations with Ht, Vt.
  • 161. X y a b’1 =300 p’1 a’ p’ b’ b b1 LOCUS OF b’ & b’1 LOCUS OF b & b1  p 35 25 TL TL FV TV PROBLEM NO.26 End A of a line AB is 25mm below Hp and 35mm behind Vp. Line is 300 inclined to Hp. There is a point P on AB contained by both HP & VP. Draw projections, find inclination with Vp and traces.
  • 162. a’ b’ a b b’1   TL TL FVTV b1 75 35 Ht VtX Y 25 55 PROBLEM NO.27 End A of a line AB is 25mm above Hp and end B is 55mm behind Vp. The distance between end projectors is 75mm. If both it’s HT & VT coincide on xy in a point, 35mm from projector of A and within two projectors, Draw projections, find TL and angles and HT, VT.
  • 163. PROJECTIONS OF PLANES In this topic various plane figures are the objects. What will be given in the problem? 1. Description of the plane figure. 2. It’s position with HP and VP. In which manner it’s position with HP & VP will be described? 1.Inclination of it’s SURFACE with one of the reference planes will be given. 2. Inclination of one of it’s EDGES with other reference plane will be given (Hence this will be a case of an object inclined to both reference Planes.) To draw their projections means F.V, T.V. & S.V. What is usually asked in the problem? Study the illustration showing surface & side inclination given on next page.
  • 164. HP a 1 b 1 c 1 d 1 VPVPVP a’ d’ c’b’ For Fv ForTv For F.V. ForT.V. ForT.V. For F.V. HP a b c d a1’ d1’ c1’ b1’ HP a1 b1 c1 d1 CASE OF A RECTANGLE – OBSERVE AND NOTE ALL STEPS. SURFACE PARALLEL TO HP PICTORIAL PRESENTATION SURFACE INCLINED TO HP PICTORIAL PRESENTATION ONE SMALL SIDE INCLINED TO VP PICTORIAL PRESENTATION ORTHOGRAPHIC TV-True Shape FV- Line // to xy ORTHOGRAPHIC FV- Inclined to XY TV- Reduced Shape ORTHOGRAPHIC FV- Apparent Shape TV-Previous Shape A B C
  • 165. PROCEDURE OF SOLVING THE PROBLEM: IN THREE STEPS EACH PROBLEM CAN BE SOLVED:( As Shown In Previous Illustration ) STEP 1. Assume suitable conditions & draw Fv & Tv of initial position. STEP 2. Now consider surface inclination & draw 2nd Fv & Tv. STEP 3. After this,consider side/edge inclination and draw 3rd ( final) Fv & Tv. ASSUMPTIONS FOR INITIAL POSITION: (Initial Position means assuming surface // to HP or VP) 1.If in problem surface is inclined to HP – assume it // HP Or If surface is inclined to VP – assume it // to VP 2. Now if surface is assumed // to HP- It’s TV will show True Shape. And If surface is assumed // to VP – It’s FV will show True Shape. 3. Hence begin with drawing TV or FV as True Shape. 4. While drawing this True Shape – keep one side/edge ( which is making inclination) perpendicular to xy line ( similar to pair no. on previous page illustration ).A B Now Complete STEP 2. By making surface inclined to the resp plane & project it’s other view. (Ref. 2nd pair on previous page illustration ) C Now Complete STEP 3. By making side inclined to the resp plane & project it’s other view. (Ref. 3nd pair on previous page illustration ) APPLY SAME STEPS TO SOLVE NEXT ELEVEN PROBLEMS
  • 166. X Y a b c d a’b’ c’d’ a1 b1 c1 d1 a1 b1 c1 d1 a’b’ d’c’ c’1 d’1 b’1 a’1 450 300 Problem 1: Rectangle 30mm and 50mm sides is resting on HP on one small side which is 300 inclined to VP,while the surface of the plane makes 450 inclination with HP. Draw it’s projections. Read problem and answer following questions 1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP 2. Assumption for initial position? ------// to HP 3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV 4. Which side will be vertical? ---One small side. Hence begin with TV, draw rectangle below X-Y drawing one small side vertical. Surface // to Hp Surface inclined to Hp Side Inclined to Vp
  • 167. Problem 2: A 300 – 600 set square of longest side 100 mm long, is in VP and 300 inclined to HP while it’s surface is 450 inclined to VP.Draw it’s projections (Surface & Side inclinations directly given) Read problem and answer following questions 1 .Surface inclined to which plane? ------- VP 2. Assumption for initial position? ------// to VP 3. So which view will show True shape? --- FV 4. Which side will be vertical? ------longest side. c1 X Y 300 450 a’1 b’1 c’1 a c a’ a b1 b’ b a1b c a’1 b’1 c’1 c’ Hence begin with FV, draw triangle above X-Y keeping longest side vertical. Surface // to Vp Surface inclined to Vp side inclined to Hp
  • 168. c c1 X Y 450 a’1 b’1 c’1 a c a’ a b1 b’ b a1b a’1 b’1 c’1 c’ 35 10 Problem 3: A 300 – 600 set square of longest side 100 mm long is in VP and it’s surface 450 inclined to VP. One end of longest side is 10 mm and other end is 35 mm above HP. Draw it’s projections (Surface inclination directly given. Side inclination indirectly given) Read problem and answer following questions 1 .Surface inclined to which plane? ------- VP 2. Assumption for initial position? ------// to VP 3. So which view will show True shape? --- FV 4. Which side will be vertical? ------longest side. Hence begin with FV, draw triangle above X-Y keeping longest side vertical. First TWO steps are similar to previous problem. Note the manner in which side inclination is given. End A 35 mm above Hp & End B is 10 mm above Hp. So redraw 2nd Fv as final Fv placing these ends as said.
  • 169. Read problem and answer following questions 1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP 2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP 3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV 4. Which side will be vertical? -------- any side. Hence begin with TV,draw pentagon below X-Y line, taking one side vertical. Problem 4: A regular pentagon of 30 mm sides is resting on HP on one of it’s sides with it’s surface 450 inclined to HP. Draw it’s projections when the side in HP makes 300 angle with VP a’b’ d’ b1 d c1 a c’e’ b c d1 b’1 a1 e’1 c’1 d’1 a1 b1 c1d1 d’ a’b’ c’e’ e1 e1 a’1 X Y450 300 e SURFACE AND SIDE INCLINATIONS ARE DIRECTLY GIVEN.
  • 170. Problem 5: A regular pentagon of 30 mm sides is resting on HP on one of it’s sides while it’s opposite vertex (corner) is 30 mm above HP. Draw projections when side in HP is 300 inclined to VP. Read problem and answer following questions 1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP 2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP 3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV 4. Which side will be vertical? --------any side. Hence begin with TV,draw pentagon below X-Y line, taking one side vertical. b’ d’ a’ c’e’ a1 b1 c1d1 e1 b1 c1 d1 a1 e1 b’1 e’1 c’1 d’1 a’1 X Ya’b’ d’c’e’ 30 a b c d e 300 SURFACE INCLINATION INDIRECTLY GIVEN SIDE INCLINATION DIRECTLY GIVEN: ONLY CHANGE is the manner in which surface inclination is described: One side on Hp & it’s opposite corner 30 mm above Hp. Hence redraw 1st Fv as a 2nd Fv making above arrangement. Keep a’b’ on xy & d’ 30 mm above xy.
  • 171. T L a d c b a’ b’ d’ c’ X Ya’ b’ d’ c’ a1 b1 d1 c1 a 1 b 1 d 1 c 1 450 300 a’1 b’1 c’1 d’1 a1 b1 d1 c1 a d c b a’ b’ d’ c’ a’ b’ d’ c’ a 1 b 1 d 1 c 1 300 a’1 b’1 c’1 d’1 Problem 8: A circle of 50 mm diameter is resting on Hp on end A of it’s diameter AC which is 300 inclined to Hp while it’s Tv is 450 inclined to Vp.Draw it’s projections. Problem 9: A circle of 50 mm diameter is resting on Hp on end A of it’s diameter AC which is 300 inclined to Hp while it makes 450 inclined to Vp. Draw it’s projections. Read problem and answer following questions 1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP 2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP 3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV 4. Which diameter horizontal? ---------- AC Hence begin with TV,draw rhombus below X-Y line, taking longer diagonal // to X-Y The difference in these two problems is in step 3 only. In problem no.8 inclination of Tv of that AC is given,It could be drawn directly as shown in 3rd step. While in no.9 angle of AC itself i.e. it’s TL, is given. Hence here angle of TL is taken,locus of c1 Is drawn and then LTV I.e. a1 c1 is marked and final TV was completed.Study illustration carefully. Note the difference in construction of 3rd step in both solutions.
  • 172. Problem 10: End A of diameter AB of a circle is in HP A nd end B is in VP.Diameter AB, 50 mm long is 300 & 600 inclined to HP & VP respectively. Draw projections of circle. The problem is similar to previous problem of circle – no.9. But in the 3rd step there is one more change. Like 9th problem True Length inclination of dia.AB is definitely expected but if you carefully note - the the SUM of it’s inclinations with HP & VP is 900 . Means Line AB lies in a Profile Plane. Hence it’s both Tv & Fv must arrive on one single projector. So do the construction accordingly AND note the case carefully.. SOLVE SEPARATELY ON DRAWING SHEET GIVING NAMES TO VARIOUS POINTS AS USUAL, AS THE CASE IS IMPORTANT TL X Y 300 600 Read problem and answer following questions 1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP 2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP 3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV 4. Which diameter horizontal? ---------- AB Hence begin with TV,draw CIRCLE below X-Y line, taking DIA. AB // to X-Y
  • 173. As 3rd step redraw 2nd Tv keeping side DE on xy line. Because it is in VP as said in problem. X Y a b c d e f Problem 11: A hexagonal lamina has its one side in HP and Its apposite parallel side is 25mm above Hp and In Vp. Draw it’s projections. Take side of hexagon 30 mm long. ONLY CHANGE is the manner in which surface inclination is described: One side on Hp & it’s opposite side 25 mm above Hp. Hence redraw 1st Fv as a 2nd Fv making above arrangement. Keep a’b’ on xy & d’e’ 25 mm above xy. 25 f’ e’d’c’b’a’ f’ e’ d’ c’ b’ a’ a1 b1 c1 d1 e1 f1 c1 ’ b’1a’1 f’1 d’1 e’1 f1 a1 c1 b1 d1e1 Read problem and answer following questions 1. Surface inclined to which plane? ------- HP 2. Assumption for initial position? ------ // to HP 3. So which view will show True shape? --- TV 4. Which diameter horizontal? ---------- AC Hence begin with TV,draw rhombus below X-Y line, taking longer diagonal // to X-Y
  • 174. A B C H H/3 G X Y a’ b’ c’ g’ b a,g c b a,g c 450 a’1 c’1 b’1 g’1 FREELY SUSPENDED CASES. 1.In this case the plane of the figure always remains perpendicular to Hp. 2.It may remain parallel or inclined to Vp. 3.Hence TV in this case will be always a LINE view. 4.Assuming surface // to Vp, draw true shape in suspended position as FV. (Here keep line joining point of contact & centroid of fig. vertical ) 5.Always begin with FV as a True Shape but in a suspended position. AS shown in 1st FV. IMPORTANT POINTS Problem 12: An isosceles triangle of 40 mm long base side, 60 mm long altitude Is freely suspended from one corner of Base side.It’s plane is 450 inclined to Vp. Draw it’s projections. Similarly solve next problem of Semi-circle First draw a given triangle With given dimensions, Locate it’s centroid position And join it with point of suspension.
  • 175. 0.414R G A P 20 mm CG X Y e’ c’ d’ b’ a’ p’ g’ b c a p,g d e b c a p,g d e Problem 13 :A semicircle of 100 mm diameter is suspended from a point on its straight edge 30 mm from the midpoint of that edge so that the surface makes an angle of 450 with VP. Draw its projections. First draw a given semicircle With given diameter, Locate it’s centroid position And join it with point of suspension. 1.In this case the plane of the figure always remains perpendicular to Hp. 2.It may remain parallel or inclined to Vp. 3.Hence TV in this case will be always a LINE view. 4.Assuming surface // to Vp, draw true shape in suspended position as FV. (Here keep line joining point of contact & centroid of fig. vertical ) 5.Always begin with FV as a True Shape but in a suspended position. AS shown in 1st FV. IMPORTANT POINTS
  • 176. To determine true shape of plane figure when it’s projections are given. BY USING AUXILIARY PLANE METHOD WHAT WILL BE THE PROBLEM? Description of final Fv & Tv will be given. You are supposed to determine true shape of that plane figure. Follow the below given steps: 1. Draw the given Fv & Tv as per the given information in problem. 2. Then among all lines of Fv & Tv select a line showing True Length (T.L.) (It’s other view must be // to xy) 3. Draw x1-y1 perpendicular to this line showing T.L. 4. Project view on x1-y1 ( it must be a line view) 5. Draw x2-y2 // to this line view & project new view on it. It will be the required answer i.e. True Shape. The facts you must know:- If you carefully study and observe the solutions of all previous problems, You will find IF ONE VIEW IS A LINE VIEW & THAT TOO PARALLEL TO XY LINE, THEN AND THEN IT’S OTHER VIEW WILL SHOW TRUE SHAPE: NOW FINAL VIEWS ARE ALWAYS SOME SHAPE, NOT LINE VIEWS: SO APPLYING ABOVE METHOD: WE FIRST CONVERT ONE VIEW IN INCLINED LINE VIEW .(By using x1y1 aux.plane) THEN BY MAKING IT // TO X2-Y2 WE GET TRUE SHAPE. Study Next Four Cases
  • 177. X Y a c b C’ b’ a’ 10 15 15 TL X1 Y1 C1 b1a1 a’1 b’1 c’1 TRUE SHAPE 900 X2 Y2 Problem 14 Tv is a triangle abc. Ab is 50 mm long, angle cab is 300 and angle cba is 650. a’b’c’ is a Fv. a’ is 25 mm, b’ is 40 mm and c’ is 10 mm above Hp respectively. Draw projections of that figure and find it’s true shape. 300 650 50 mm s per the procedure- irst draw Fv & Tv as per the data. n Tv line ab is // to xy hence it’s other view a’b’ is TL. So draw x1y1 perpendicular to it. roject view on x1y1. a) First draw projectors from a’b’ & c’ on x1y1. b) from xy take distances of a,b & c( Tv) mark on these projectors from x1y1. Name points a1b1 & c1. c) This line view is an Aux.Tv. Draw x2y2 // to this line view and project Aux. Fv on it. for that from x1y1 take distances of a’b’ & c’ and mark from x2y= on new projectors. Name points a’1 b’1 & c’1 and join them. This will be the required true shape. ALWAYS FOR NEW FV TAKE DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS FV AND FOR NEW TV, DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS TV REMEMBER!!
  • 178. x1 y1 c’1 b’1 a’1 x2 y2 b1 c1 d1TRUE SHAPE 900 c’ T L X Y a’ b’ b ca 10 20 15 15 1’ 1 40 50 25 Problem 15: Fv & Tv of a triangular plate are shown. Determine it’s true shape. USE SAME PROCEDURE STEPS OF PREVIOUS PROBLEM: BUT THERE IS ONE DIFFICULTY: NO LINE IS // TO XY IN ANY VIEW. MEANS NO TL IS AVAILABLE. IN SUCH CASES DRAW ONE LINE // TO XY IN ANY VIEW & IT’S OTHER VIEW CAN BE CONSIDERED AS TL FOR THE PURPOSE. HERE a’ 1’ line in Fv is drawn // to xy. HENCE it’s Tv a-1 becomes TL. THEN FOLLOW SAME STEPS AND DETERMINE TRUE SHAPE. (STUDY THE ILLUSTRATION) ALWAYS FOR NEW FV TAKE DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS FV AND FOR NEW TV, DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS TV REMEMBER!!
  • 179. y1 X2 X1 a1 c1 d1 b1 c’1 d’1 b’1 a’1 y2 TRUE SHAPEa b c d YX a’ d’ c’ b’ 50 D. 50D TL PROBLEM 16: Fv & Tv both are circles of 50 mm diameter. Determine true shape of an elliptical plate. ADOPT SAME PROCEDURE. a c is considered as line // to xy. Then a’c’ becomes TL for the purpose. Using steps properly true shape can be Easily determined. Study the illustration. ALWAYS, FOR NEW FV TAKE DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS FV AND FOR NEW TV, DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS TV REMEMBER!!
  • 180. a b c d e a’ b’ e’ c’ d’ a1 b1 e1 d1 c1 300X Y X1 Y1 450 TRUE SHAPE Problem 17 : Draw a regular pentagon of 30 mm sides with one side 300 inclined to xy. This figure is Tv of some plane whose Fv is A line 450 inclined to xy. Determine it’s true shape. IN THIS CASE ALSO TRUE LENGTH IS NOT AVAILABLE IN ANY VIEW. BUT ACTUALLY WE DONOT REQUIRE TL TO FIND IT’S TRUE SHAPE, AS ONE VIEW (FV) IS ALREADY A LINE VIEW. SO JUST BY DRAWING X1Y1 // TO THIS VIEW WE CAN PROJECT VIEW ON IT AND GET TRUE SHAPE: STUDY THE ILLUSTRATION.. ALWAYS FOR NEW FV TAKE DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS FV AND FOR NEW TV, DISTANCES OF PREVIOUS TV REMEMBER!!
  • 181. SOLIDS To understand and remember various solids in this subject properly, those are classified & arranged in to two major groups. Group A Solids having top and base of same shape Cylinder Prisms Triangular Square Pentagonal Hexagonal Cube Triangular Square Pentagonal Hexagonal Cone Tetrahedron Pyramids ( A solid having six square faces) ( A solid having Four triangular faces) Group B Solids having base of some shape and just a point as a top, called apex.
  • 182. SOLIDS Dimensional parameters of different solids. Top Rectangular Face Longer Edge Base Edge of Base Corner of base Corner of base Triangular Face Slant Edge Base Apex Square Prism Square Pyramid Cylinder Cone Edge of Base Base Apex Base Generators Imaginary lines generating curved surface of cylinder & cone. Sections of solids( top & base not parallel) Frustum of cone & pyramids. ( top & base parallel to each other)
  • 183. X Y STANDING ON H.P On it’s base. RESTING ON H.P On one point of base circle. LYING ON H.P On one generator. (Axis perpendicular to Hp And // to Vp.) (Axis inclined to Hp And // to Vp) (Axis inclined to Hp And // to Vp) While observing Fv, x-y line represents Horizontal Plane. (Hp) Axis perpendicular to Vp And // to Hp Axis inclined to Vp And // to Hp Axis inclined to Vp And // to Hp X Y F.V. F.V. F.V. T.V. T.V. T.V. While observing Tv, x-y line represents Vertical Plane. (Vp) STANDING ON V.P On it’s base. RESTING ON V.P On one point of base circle. LYING ON V.P On one generator.
  • 184. STEPS TO SOLVE PROBLEMS IN SOLIDS Problem is solved in three steps: STEP 1: ASSUME SOLID STANDING ON THE PLANE WITH WHICH IT IS MAKING INCLINATION. ( IF IT IS INCLINED TO HP, ASSUME IT STANDING ON HP) ( IF IT IS INCLINED TO VP, ASSUME IT STANDING ON VP) IF STANDING ON HP - IT’S TV WILL BE TRUE SHAPE OF IT’S BASE OR TOP: IF STANDING ON VP - IT’S FV WILL BE TRUE SHAPE OF IT’S BASE OR TOP. BEGIN WITH THIS VIEW: IT’S OTHER VIEW WILL BE A RECTANGLE ( IF SOLID IS CYLINDER OR ONE OF THE PRISMS): IT’S OTHER VIEW WILL BE A TRIANGLE ( IF SOLID IS CONE OR ONE OF THE PYRAMIDS): DRAW FV & TV OF THAT SOLID IN STANDING POSITION: STEP 2: CONSIDERING SOLID’S INCLINATION ( AXIS POSITION ) DRAW IT’S FV & TV. STEP 3: IN LAST STEP, CONSIDERING REMAINING INCLINATION, DRAW IT’S FINAL FV & TV. AXIS VERTICAL AXIS INCLINED HP AXIS INCLINED VP AXIS VERTICAL AXIS INCLINED HP AXIS INCLINED VP AXIS TO VP er AXIS INCLINED VP AXIS INCLINED HP AXIS TO VP er AXIS INCLINED VP AXIS INCLINED HP GENERAL PATTERN ( THREE STEPS ) OF SOLUTION: GROUP B SOLID. CONE GROUPA SOLID. CYLINDER GROUP B SOLID. CONE GROUPA SOLID. CYLINDER Three steps If solid is inclined to Hp Three steps If solid is inclined to Hp Three steps If solid is inclined to Vp Study Next Twelve Problems and Practice them separately !! Three steps If solid is inclined to Vp
  • 185. PROBLEM NO.1, 2, 3, 4 GENERAL CASES OF SOLIDS INCLINED TO HP & VP PROBLEM NO. 5 & 6 CASES OF CUBE & TETRAHEDRON PROBLEM NO. 7 CASE OF FREELY SUSPENDED SOLID WITH SIDE VIEW. PROBLEM NO. 8 CASE OF CUBE ( WITH SIDE VIEW) PROBLEM NO. 9 CASE OF TRUE LENGTH INCLINATION WITH HP & VP. PROBLEM NO. 10 & 11 CASES OF COMPOSITE SOLIDS. (AUXILIARY PLANE) PROBLEM NO. 12 CASE OF A FRUSTUM (AUXILIARY PLANE) CATEGORIES OF ILLUSTRATED PROBLEMS!
  • 186. X Y a b c d o o’ d’c’b’a’ o’ d’c’ b’a’ o1 d1 b1 c1 a1 a’1 d’1 c’1 b’1 o’1 o 1 d 1 b 1 c 1 a1 o1 d 1 b 1 c1 a1 (APEX NEARER TO V.P). (APEX AWAY FROM V.P.) Problem 1. A square pyramid, 40 mm base sides and axis 60 mm long, has a triangular face on the ground and the vertical plane containing the axis makes an angle of 450 with the VP. Draw its projections. Take apex nearer to VP Solution Steps : Triangular face on Hp , means it is lying on Hp: 1.Assume it standing on Hp. 2.It’s Tv will show True Shape of base( square) 3.Draw square of 40mm sides with one side vertical Tv & taking 50 mm axis project Fv. ( a triangle) 4.Name all points as shown in illustration. 5.Draw 2nd Fv in lying position I.e.o’c’d’ face on xy. And project it’s Tv. 6.Make visible lines dark and hidden dotted, as per the procedure. 7.Then construct remaining inclination with Vp ( Vp containing axis ic the center line of 2nd Tv.Make it 450 to xy as shown take apex near to xy, as it is nearer to Vp) & project final Fv. For dark and dotted lines 1.Draw proper outline of new view DARK. 2. Decide direction of an observer. 3. Select nearest point to observer and draw all lines starting from it-dark. 4. Select farthest point to observer and draw all lines (remaining)from it- dotted.
  • 187. Problem 2: A cone 40 mm diameter and 50 mm axis is resting on one generator on Hp which makes 300 inclination with Vp Draw it’s projections. h a b c d e g f X Ya’ b’ d’ e’c’ g ’ f’h’ o’ a’ h’b’ e’ c’g’ d’f’ o’ a1 h1 g1 f1 e1 d1 c1 b1 a1 c1 b1 d1 e1 f1 g1 h1 o1 a’1 b’1 c’1 d’1e’1 f’1 g’1 h’1 o1 o1 30 Solution Steps: Resting on Hp on one generator, means lying on Hp: 1.Assume it standing on Hp. 2.It’s Tv will show True Shape of base( circle ) 3.Draw 40mm dia. Circle as Tv & taking 50 mm axis project Fv. ( a triangle) 4.Name all points as shown in illustration. 5.Draw 2nd Fv in lying position I.e.o’e’ on xy. And project it’s Tv below xy. 6.Make visible lines dark and hidden dotted, as per the procedure. 7.Then construct remaining inclination with Vp ( generator o1e1 300 to xy as shown) & project final Fv. For dark and dotted lines 1.Draw proper outline of new vie DARK. 2. Decide direction of an observer. 3. Select nearest point to observer and draw all lines starting from it-dark. 4. Select farthest point to observer and draw all lines (remaining) from it- dotted.
  • 188. a bd c 1 24 3 X Ya b d c 1 2 4 3 a’ b’ c’ d’ 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 450 4’ 3’ 2’ 1’ d’ c’ b’ a’ 4’ 3’ 2’ 1’ d’ c’ b’ a’ 350 a1 b1 c1 d1 1 2 3 4 Problem 3: A cylinder 40 mm diameter and 50 mm axis is resting on one point of a base circle on Vp while it’s axis makes 450 with Vp and Fv of the axis 350 with Hp. Draw projections.. Solution Steps: Resting on Vp on one point of base, means inclined to Vp: 1.Assume it standing on Vp 2.It’s Fv will show True Shape of base & top( circle ) 3.Draw 40mm dia. Circle as Fv & taking 50 mm axis project Tv. ( a Rectangle) 4.Name all points as shown in illustration. 5.Draw 2nd Tv making axis 450 to xy And project it’s Fv above xy. 6.Make visible lines dark and hidden dotted, as per the procedure. 7.Then construct remaining inclination with Hp ( Fv of axis I.e. center line of view to xy as shown) & project final Tv.
  • 189. b b1 X Y a d co d’ c’b’a’ o’ d’ c’ b’ a’ o’ c1 a1 d1 o1 c 1 b 1 a 1 d 1 o 1 o’1 a’1 b’1 c’1 d’1 Problem 4:A square pyramid 30 mm base side and 50 mm long axis is resting on it’s apex on Hp, such that it’s one slant edge is vertical and a triangular face through it is perpendicular to Vp. Draw it’s projections. Solution Steps : 1.Assume it standing on Hp but as said on apex.( inverted ). 2.It’s Tv will show True Shape of base( square) 3.Draw a corner case square of 30 mm sides as Tv(as shown) Showing all slant edges dotted, as those will not be visible from top. 4.taking 50 mm axis project Fv. ( a triangle) 5.Name all points as shown in illustration. 6.Draw 2nd Fv keeping o’a’ slant edge vertical & project it’s Tv 7.Make visible lines dark and hidden dotted, as per the procedure. 8.Then redrew 2nd Tv as final Tv keeping a1o1d1 triangular face perpendicular to Vp I.e.xy. Then as usual project final Fv.
  • 190. Problem 5: A cube of 50 mm long edges is so placed on Hp on one corner that a body diagonal is parallel to Hp and perpendicular to Vp Draw it’s projections. X Y b c d a a’ d’ c’b’ a’ d’ c’ b’ a1 b1 d1 c1 a1 b1 d1 c1 1’ p’ p’ a’1 d’1 c’1 d’1 Solution Steps: 1.Assuming standing on Hp, begin with Tv,a square with all sides equally inclined to xy.Project Fv and name all points of FV & TV. 2.Draw a body-diagonal joining c’ with 3’( This can become // to xy) 3.From 1’ drop a perpendicular on this and name it p’ 4.Draw 2nd Fv in which 1’-p’ line is vertical means c’-3’ diagonal must be horizontal. .Now as usual project Tv.. 6.In final Tv draw same diagonal is perpendicular to Vp as said in problem. Then as usual project final FV. 1’3’ 1’ 3’
  • 191. Y Problem 6:A tetrahedron of 50 mm long edges is resting on one edge on Hp while one triangular face containing this edge is vertical and 450 inclined to Vp. Draw projections. X T L a o b c b’a’ c’ o’ a’ a1 c1 o1 b1 a 1 o 1 b 1 900 450 c 1 c’1 b’c’ o’ a’1 o’1 b’1 IMPORTANT: Tetrahedron is a special type of triangular pyramid in which base sides & slant edges are equal in length. Solid of four faces. Like cube it is also described by One dimension only.. Axis length generally not given. Solution Steps As it is resting assume it standing on Hp. Begin with Tv , an equilateral triangle as side case as shown: First project base points of Fv on xy, name those & axis line. From a’ with TL of edge, 50 mm, cut on axis line & mark o’ (as axis is not known, o’ is finalized by slant edge length) Then complete Fv. In 2nd Fv make face o’b’c’ vertical as said in problem. And like all previous problems solve completely.
  • 192. FREELY SUSPENDED SOLIDS: Positions of CG, on axis, from base, for different solids are shown below. H H/2 H/4 GROUPA SOLIDS ( Cylinder & Prisms) GROUP B SOLIDS ( Cone & Pyramids) CG CG
  • 193. X Ya’ d’e’c’b’ o’ a b c d e o g’ H/4 H LINE d’g’ VERTICAL a’b’ c’ d’ o” e’ g’ a1 b1 o1 e1 d1 c1 a” e” d” c” b” FOR SIDE VIEW Problem 7: A pentagonal pyramid 30 mm base sides & 60 mm long axis, is freely suspended from one corner of base so that a plane containing it’s axis remains parallel to Vp. Draw it’s three views. IMPORTANT: When a solid is freely suspended from a corner, then line joining point of contact & C.G. remains vertical. ( Here axis shows inclination with Hp.) So in all such cases, assume solid standing on Hp initially.) Solution Steps: In all suspended cases axis shows inclination with Hp. 1.Hence assuming it standing on Hp, drew Tv - a regular pentagon,corner case. 2.Project Fv & locate CG position on axis – ( Âź H from base.) and name g’ and Join it with corner d’ 3.As 2nd Fv, redraw first keeping line g’d’ vertical. 4.As usual project corresponding Tv and then Side View looking from.
  • 194. a’ d’ c’b’ b c d a a’ d’ c’ b’a1 b d1 c1 d’’ c’’ a’’ b’’ X Y1’ 1’ 1’ Problem 8: A cube of 50 mm long edges is so placed on Hp on one corner that a body diagonal through this corner is perpendicular to Hp and parallel to Vp Draw it’s three views. Solution Steps: 1.Assuming it standing on Hp begin with Tv, a square of corner case. 2.Project corresponding Fv.& name all points as usual in both views. 3.Join a’1’ as body diagonal and draw 2nd Fv making it vertical (I’ on xy) 4.Project it’s Tv drawing dark and dotted lines as per the procedure. 5.With standard method construct Left-hand side view. ( Draw a 450 inclined Line in Tv region ( below xy). Project horizontally all points of Tv on this line and reflect vertically upward, above xy.After this, draw horizontal lines, from all points of Fv, to meet these lines. Name points of intersections and join properly. For dark & dotted lines locate observer on left side of Fv as shown.)
  • 195. a1 h1 f1 e1 d1 c1 b1 g1 1 o1 400 Axis Tv Length Axis Tv Length Axis True Length Locus of Center 1 c’1 a’1 b’1 e’1 d’1 h’1 f’1 g’1 o’1 h a b c d e g f yX a’ b’ d’ e’c’ g’ f’h’ o’ a’ h’b’ e’ c’g’ d’f’ o’ 450 a1 h1 f1 e1 d1 c1 b1 g1 o1 1 Problem 9: A right circular cone, 40 mm base diameter and 60 mm long axis is resting on Hp on one point of base circle such that it’s axis makes 450 inclination with Hp and 400 inclination with Vp. Draw it’s projections. This case resembles to problem no.7 & 9 from projections of planes topic. In previous all cases 2nd inclination was done by a parameter not showing TL.Like Tv of axis is inclined to Vp etc. But here it is clearly said that the axis is 400 inclined to Vp. Means here TL inclination is expected. So the same construction done in those Problems is done here also. See carefully the final Tv and inclination taken there. So assuming it standing on HP begin as usual.
  • 196. 450 (AVP 450 toVp) y 1 X 1 F.V. T.V. Aux.F.V. X Y Problem 10: A triangular prism, 40 mm base side 60 mm axis is lying on Hp on one rectangular face with axis perpendicular to Vp. One square pyramid is leaning on it’s face centrally with axis // to vp. It’s base side is 30 mm & axis is 60 mm long resting on Hp on one edge of base.Draw FV & TV of both solids.Project another FV on an AVP 450 inclined to VP. Steps : Draw Fv of lying prism ( an equilateral Triangle) And Fv of a leaning pyramid. Project Tv of both solids. Draw x1y1 450 inclined to xy and project aux.Fv on it. Mark the distances of first FV from first xy for the distances of aux. Fv from x1y1 line. Note the observer’s directions Shown by arrows and further steps carefully.
  • 197. X Y X1 Y1 o’ o Fv Tv Aux.Tv (AIP450 toHp) 450 Problem 11:A hexagonal prism of base side 30 mm longand axis 40 mm long, is standing on Hp on it’s base with one base edge // to Vp. A tetrahedron is placed centrally on the top of it.The base of tetrahedron is a triangle formed by joining alternate corners of top of prism..Draw projections of both solids. Project an auxiliary Tv on AIP 450 inclined to Hp. TL a’ b’ d’c’ e’f’ a b c d ef STEPS: Draw a regular hexagon as Tv of standing prism With one side // to xy and name the top points.Project it’s Fv – a rectangle and name it’s top. Now join it’s alternate corners a-c-e and the triangle formed is base of a tetrahedron as said. Locate center of this triangle & locate apex o Extending it’s axis line upward mark apex o’ By cutting TL of edge of tetrahedron equal to a-c. and complete Fv of tetrahedron. Draw an AIP ( x1y1) 450 inclined to xy And project Aux.Tv on it by using similar Steps like previous problem. a1 b1 c1 d1 e1 f1 o1
  • 198. X Y X1 Y1 TL AIP // to slant edge Showing true length i.e. a’- 1’ a’ b’ e’ c’ d’ 1’ 2’5’ 3’4’ Fv Tv Aux.Tv 1 2 3 4 5 a b d c e 1 2 3 4 5 b1 c1 d1 e1 a1 Problem 12: A frustum of regular hexagonal pyramid is standing on it’s larger base On Hp with one base side perpendicular to Vp.Draw it’s Fv & Tv. Project it’s Aux.Tv on an AIP parallel to one of the slant edges showing TL. Base side is 50 mm long , top side is 30 mm long and 50 mm is height of frustum.
  • 199. 1. SECTIONS OF SOLIDS. 2. DEVELOPMENT. 3. INTERSECTIONS. ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS OF THE PRINCIPLES OF PROJECTIONS OF SOLIDES. STUDY CAREFULLY THE ILLUSTRATIONS GIVEN ON NEXT SIX PAGES !
  • 200. SECTIONING A SOLID. An object ( here a solid ) is cut by some imaginary cutting plane to understand internal details of that object. The action of cutting is called SECTIONING a solid & The plane of cutting is called SECTION PLANE. wo cutting actions means section planes are recommended. Section Plane perpendicular to Vp and inclined to Hp. ( This is a definition of an Aux. Inclined Plane i.e. A.I.P.) NOTE:- This section plane appears as a straight line in FV. Section Plane perpendicular to Hp and inclined to Vp. ( This is a definition of an Aux. Vertical Plane i.e. A.V.P.) NOTE:- This section plane appears as a straight line in TV. emember:- After launching a section plane either in FV or TV, the part towards observer is assumed to be removed. As far as possible the smaller part is assumed to be removed. OBSERVER ASSUME UPPER PART REMOVED SECTON PLANE IN FV. OBSERVER ASSUME LOWER PART REMOVED SECTON PLANE IN TV. (A) (B)
  • 201. ILLUSTRATION SHOWING IMPORTANT TERMS IN SECTIONING. x y TRUE SHAPE Of SECTION SECTION PLANE SECTION LINES (450 to XY) Apparent Shape of section SECTIONAL T.V. For TV For True Shape
  • 202. Section Plane Through Apex Section Plane Through Generators Section Plane Parallel to end generator. Section Plane Parallel to Axis. Triangle Ellipse Parabola Hyperbola Ellipse Cylinder through generators. Sq. Pyramid through all slant edges Trapezium Typical Section Planes & Typical Shapes Of Sections.
  • 203. DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES OF SOLIDS. MEANING:- ASSUME OBJECT HOLLOW AND MADE-UP OF THIN SHEET. CUT OPEN IT FROM ONE SIDE AND UNFOLD THE SHEET COMPLETELY. THEN THE SHAPE OF THAT UNFOLDED SHEET IS CALLED DEVELOPMENT OF LATERLAL SUEFACES OF THAT OBJECT OR SOLID. LATERLAL SURFACE IS THE SURFACE EXCLUDING SOLID’S TOP & BASE. ENGINEERING APLICATION: THERE ARE SO MANY PRODUCTS OR OBJECTS WHICH ARE DIFFICULT TO MANUFACTURE BY CONVENTIONAL MANUFACTURING PROCESSES, BECAUSE OF THEIR SHAPES AND SIZES. THOSE ARE FABRICATED IN SHEET METAL INDUSTRY BY USING DEVELOPMENT TECHNIQUE. THERE IS A VAST RANGE OF SUCH OBJECTS. EXAMPLES:- Boiler Shells & chimneys, Pressure Vessels, Shovels, Trays, Boxes & Cartons, Feeding Hoppers, Large Pipe sections, Body & Parts of automotives, Ships, Aeroplanes and many more. WHAT IS OUR OBJECTIVE IN THIS TOPIC ? To learn methods of development of surfaces of different solids, their sections and frustums. 1. Development is different drawing than PROJECTIONS. 2. It is a shape showing AREA, means it’s a 2-D plain drawing. 3. Hence all dimensions of it must be TRUE dimensions. 4. As it is representing shape of an un-folded sheet, no edges can remain hidden And hence DOTTED LINES are never shown on development. But before going ahead, note following Important points. Study illustrations given on next page carefully.
  • 204. D H D SS H L   = R L + 3600 R=Base circle radius. L=Slant height. L= Slant edge. S = Edge of base L S S H= Height S = Edge of base H= Height D= base diameter Development of lateral surfaces of different solids. (Lateral surface is the surface excluding top & base) Prisms: No.of Rectangles Cylinder: A Rectangle Cone: (Sector of circle) Pyramids: (No.of triangles) Tetrahedron: Four Equilateral Triangles All sides equal in length Cube: Six Squares.
  • 205. L L   = R L + 3600 R= Base circle radius of cone L= Slant height of cone L1 = Slant height of cut part. Base side Top side L1 L= Slant edge of pyramid L1 = Slant edge of cut part. DEVELOPMENT OF FRUSTUM OF CONE DEVELOPMENT OF FRUSTUM OF SQUARE PYRAMID STUDY NEXT NINE PROBLEMS OF SECTIONS & DEVELOPMENT FRUSTUMS
  • 206. X Y X1 Y1 a’ b’e’ c’d’ A B C E D a e d b c TRUE SHAPE A B C D E A DEVELOPMENT a” b” c”d” e” Problem 1: A pentagonal prism , 30 mm base side & 50 mm axis is standing on Hp on it’s base whose one side is perpendicular to Vp. It is cut by a section plane 450 inclined to Hp, through mid point of axis. Draw Fv, sec.Tv & sec. Side view. Also draw true shape of section and Development of surface of remaining solid. Solution Steps:for sectional views: Draw three views of standing prism. Locate sec.plane in Fv as described. Project points where edges are getting Cut on Tv & Sv as shown in illustration. Join those points in sequence and show Section lines in it. Make remaining part of solid dark. For True Shape: Draw x1y1 // to sec. plane Draw projectors on it from cut points. Mark distances of points of Sectioned part from Tv, on above projectors from x1y1 and join in sequence. Draw section lines in it. It is required true shape. For Development: Draw development of entire solid. Name from cut-open edge I.e. A. in sequence as shown. Mark the cut points on respective edges. Join them in sequence in st. lines. Make existing parts dev.dark.
  • 207. Y h a b c d e g f X a’ b’ d’ e’c’ g’ f’h’ o’ X1 Y1 g” h”f” a”e” b”d” c” A B C D E F A G H SECTIONAL T.V SECTIONAL S.V TRUE SH APE OF SECTIO N DEVELOPMENT SECTIO N PLANE Problem 2: A cone, 50 mm base diameter and 70 mm axis is standing on it’s base on Hp. It cut by a section plane 450 inclined to Hp through base end of end generator.Draw projections, sectional views, true shape of section and development of surfaces of remaining solid. Solution Steps:for sectional views: Draw three views of standing cone. Locate sec.plane in Fv as described. Project points where generators are getting Cut on Tv & Sv as shown in illustration.Join those points in sequence and show Section lines in it. Make remaining part of solid dark. For True Shape: Draw x1y1 // to sec. plane Draw projectors on it from cut points. Mark distances of points of Sectioned part from Tv, on above projectors from x1y1 and join in sequence. Draw section lines in it. It is required true shape. For Development: Draw development of entire solid. Name from cut-open edge i.e. A. in sequence as shown.Mark the cut points on respective edges. Join them in sequence in curvature. Make existing parts dev.dark.
  • 208. X Ye’a’ b’ d’c’ g’ f’h’ a’ h’b’ e’ c’g’ d’f’ o’ o’ Problem 3: A cone 40mm diameter and 50 mm axis is resting on one generator on Hp( lying on Hp) which is // to Vp.. Draw it’s projections.It is cut by a horizontal section plane through it’s base center. Draw sectional TV, development of the surface of the remaining part of cone. A B C D E F A G H O a1 h1 g1 f1 e1 d1 c1 b1 o1 SECTIONAL T.V DEVELOPMENT (SHOWING TRUE SHAPE OF SECTION) HORIZONTAL SECTION PLANE h a b c d e g f O Follow similar solution steps for Sec.views - True shape – Development as per previous problem!
  • 209. A.V.P300 inclined to Vp Through mid-point of axis. X Y 1,2 3,8 4,7 5,6 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 2 1 8 7 6 54 3 b’ f’a’ e’c’ d’ a b c d e f b’f’a’e’c’d’ a1 d1b1 e1 c1 f1 X1 Y1 AS SECTION PLANE IS IN T.V., CUT OPEN FROM BOUNDRY EDGE C1 FOR DEVELOPMENT. TRUE SHAPE OF SECTION C D E F A B C DEVELOPMENT SECTIONAL F.V. Problem 4: A hexagonal prism. 30 mm base side & 55 mm axis is lying on Hp on it’s rect.face with axis // to Vp. It is cut by a section plane normal to Hp and 300 inclined to Vp bisecting axis. Draw sec. Views, true shape & development. Use similar steps for sec.views & true shape. NOTE: for development, always cut open object from From an edge in the boundary of the view in which sec.plane appears as a line. Here it is Tv and in boundary, there is c1 edge.Hence it is opened from c and named C,D,E,F,A,B,C. Note the steps to locate Points 1, 2 , 5, 6 in sec.Fv: Those are transferred to 1st TV, then to 1st Fv and Then on 2nd Fv.
  • 210. 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’ 7 1 5 4 3 2 6 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 a b c d e f g 4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 A B C D E A F G O O’ d’e’ c’f’ g’b’ a’ X Y X1 Y1 TRUE SHAPE F.V. SECTIONAL TOP VIEW. DEVELOPMENT Problem 5:A solid composed of a half-cone and half- hexagonal pyramid is shown in figure.It is cut by a section plane 450 inclined to Hp, passing through mid-point of axis.Draw F.v., sectional T.v.,true shape of section and development of remaining part of the solid. ( take radius of cone and each side of hexagon 30mm long and axis 70mm.) Note: Fv & TV 8f two solids sandwiched Section lines style in both: Development of half cone & half pyramid:
  • 211. o’ h a b c d g f o e a’ b’ c’ g’ d’f’ e’h’X Y  = R L + 3600 R=Base circle radius. L=Slant height.  A B C D E F G H A O 1 3 2 4 7 6 5 L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’5’ 6’ 7’ Problem 6: Draw a semicircle 0f 100 mm diameter and inscribe in it a largest circle.If the semicircle is development of a cone and inscribed circle is some curve on it, then draw the projections of cone showing that curve. Solution Steps: Draw semicircle of given diameter, divide it in 8 Parts and inscribe in it a largest circle as shown.Name intersecting points 1, 2, 3 etc. Semicircle being dev.of a cone it’s radius is slant height of cone.( L ) Then using above formula find R of base of cone. Using this data draw Fv & Tv of cone and form 8 generators and name. Take o -1 distance from dev.,mark on TL i.e.o’a’ on Fv & bring on o’b’ and name 1’ Similarly locate all points on Fv. Then project all on Tv on respective generators and join by smooth curve. L TO DRAW PRINCIPAL VIEWS FROM GIVEN DEVELOPMENT.
  • 212. h a b c d g f e o’ a’ b’ d’c’ g’ f’h’ e’ X Y A B C D E F G H A O L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  = R L + 3600 R=Base circle radius. L=Slant height. 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’ 1 2 3 4 5 67 Problem 7:Draw a semicircle 0f 100 mm diameter and inscribe in it a largest rhombus.If the semicircle is development of a cone and rhombus is some curve on it, then draw the projections of cone showing that curve. TO DRAW PRINCIPAL VIEWS FROM GIVEN DEVELOPMENT. Solution Steps: Similar to previous Problem:
  • 213. a’ b’ c’ d’ o’ e’ a b c d o e X Y A B C D E A O 2 3 4 1 Problem 8: A half cone of 50 mm base diameter, 70 mm axis, is standing on it’s half base on HP with it’s flat face parallel and nearer to VP.An inextensible string is wound round it’s surface from one point of base circle and brought back to the same point.If the string is of shortest length, find it and show it on the projections of the cone. 1 2 3 4 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ TO DRAW A CURVE ON PRINCIPAL VIEWS FROM DEVELOPMENT. Concept: A string wound from a point up to the same Point, of shortest length Must appear st. line on it’s Development. Solution steps: Hence draw development, Name it as usual and join A to A This is shortest Length of that string. Further steps are as usual. On dev. Name the points of Intersections of this line with Different generators.Bring Those on Fv & Tv and join by smooth curves. Draw 4’ a’ part of string dotted As it is on back side of cone.
  • 214. X Y e’a’ b’ d’c’ g’ f’h’ o’ h a b c d e g f O DEVELOPMENT A B C D E F A G H O 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 6’ 7’ 1 2 3 4 56 7 HELIX CURVE Problem 9: A particle which is initially on base circle of a cone, standing on Hp, moves upwards and reaches apex in one complete turn around the cone. Draw it’s path on projections of cone as well as on it’s development. Take base circle diameter 50 mm and axis 70 mm long. It’s a construction of curve Helix of one turn on cone: Draw Fv & Tv & dev.as usual On all form generators & name. Construction of curve Helix:: Show 8 generators on both views Divide axis also in same parts. Draw horizontal lines from those points on both end generators. 1’ is a point where first horizontal Line & gen. b’o’ intersect. 2’ is a point where second horiz. Line & gen. c’o’ intersect. In this way locate all points on Fv. Project all on Tv.Join in curvature. For Development: Then taking each points true Distance From resp.generator from apex, Mark on development & join.
  • 215. INTERPENETRATION OF SOLIDS WHEN ONE SOLID PENETRATES ANOTHER SOLID THEN THEIR SURFACES INTERSECT AND AT THE JUNCTION OF INTERSECTION A TYPICAL CURVE IS FORMED, WHICH REMAINS COMMON TO BOTH SOLIDS. THIS CURVE IS CALLED CURVE OF INTERSECTION AND IT IS A RESULT OF INTERPENETRATION OF SOLIDS. PURPOSE OF DRAWING THESE CURVES:- WHEN TWO OBJECTS ARE TO BE JOINED TOGATHER, MAXIMUM SURFACE CONTACT BETWEEN BOTH BECOMES A BASIC REQUIREMENT FOR STRONGEST & LEAK-PROOF JOINT. Curves of Intersections being common to both Intersecting solids, show exact & maximum surface contact of both solids. Study Following Illustrations Carefully. Square Pipes. Circular Pipes. Square Pipes. Circular Pipes. Minimum Surface Contact. ( Point Contact) (Maximum Surface Contact) Lines of Intersections. Curves of Intersections.
  • 216. A machine component having two intersecting cylindrical surfaces with the axis at acute angle to each other. Intersection of a Cylindrical main and Branch Pipe. Pump lid having shape of a hexagonal Prism and Hemi-sphere intersecting each other. Forged End of a Connecting Rod. A Feeding Hopper In industry. An Industrial Dust collector. Intersection of two cylinders. Two Cylindrical surfaces. SOME ACTUAL OBJECTS ARE SHOWN, SHOWING CURVES OF INTERSECTIONS. BY WHITE ARROWS.
  • 217. FOLLOWING CASES ARE SOLVED. REFFER ILLUSTRATIONS AND NOTE THE COMMON CONSTRUCTION FOR ALL 1.CYLINDER TO CYLINDER2. 2.SQ.PRISM TO CYLINDER 3.CONE TO CYLINDER 4.TRIANGULAR PRISM TO CYLNDER 5.SQ.PRISM TO SQ.PRISM 6.SQ.PRISM TO SQ.PRISM ( SKEW POSITION) 7.SQARE PRISM TO CONE ( from top ) 8.CYLINDER TO CONE COMMON SOLUTION STEPS One solid will be standing on HP Other will penetrate horizontally. Draw three views of standing solid. Name views as per the illustrations. Beginning with side view draw three Views of penetrating solids also. On it’s S.V. mark number of points And name those(either letters or nos.) The points which are on standard generators or edges of standing solid, ( in S.V.) can be marked on respective generators in Fv and Tv. And other points from SV should be brought to Tv first and then projecting upward To Fv. Dark and dotted line’s decision should be taken by observing side view from it’s right side as shown by arrow. Accordingly those should be joined by curvature or straight lines. Note: Incase cone is penetrating solid Side view is not necessary. Similarly in case of penetration from top it is not required.
  • 218. X Y 1 2 3 4 a” g” c” e” b” f” d” h” 4” 1”3” 2”1’ 2’4’ 3’ a’ b ’h’ c’g’ d’f’ a’ CASE 1. CYLINDER STANDING & CYLINDER PENETRATING Problem: A cylinder 50mm dia.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated by another of 40 mm dia.and 70 mm axis horizontally Both axes intersect & bisect each other. Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
  • 219. X Y a” d” b” c” 4” 1”3” 2”1’ 2’4’ 3’ 1 2 3 4 a’ d’ b’ c’ a’ c’ d’ b’ CASE 2. CYLINDER STANDING & SQ.PRISM PENETRATING Problem: A cylinder 50mm dia.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated by a square prism of 25 mm sides.and 70 mm axis, horizontally. Both axes Intersect & bisect each other. All faces of prism are equally inclined to Hp. Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
  • 220. X Y CASE 3. CYLINDER STANDING & CONE PENETRATING Problem: A cylinder of 80 mm diameter and 100 mm axis is completely penetrated by a cone of 80 mm diameter and 120 mm long axis horizontally.Both axes intersect & bisect each other. Draw projections showing curve of intersections. 1 2 8 3 7 4 6 5 7’ 6’ 8’ 1’ 5’ 2’ 4’ 3’
  • 221. X Y a” d” b” c” a’ c’ a’ d’ b’ c’ d’ b’ 1 2 3 4 1’ 2’4’ 3’ 4” 1”3” 2” CASE 4. SQ.PRISM STANDING & SQ.PRISM PENETRATING Problem: A sq.prism 30 mm base sides.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated by another square prism of 25 mm sides.and 70 mm axis, horizontally. Both axes Intersects & bisect each other. All faces of prisms are equally inclined to Vp. Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
  • 222. X Y 1 2 3 4 4” 1”3” 2”1’ 2’4’ 3’ b e a c d f bb c d e e aa f f CASE 5. CYLINDER STANDING & TRIANGULAR PRISM PENETRATING Problem: A cylinder 50mm dia.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated by a triangular prism of 45 mm sides.and 70 mm axis, horizontally. One flat face of prism is parallel to Vp and Contains axis of cylinder. Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
  • 223. X Y a” e” b” d” 1 2 3 4 1’ 2’4’ 3’ 4” 1”3” 2” 300 c” f” a’ f’ c’ d’ b’ e’ CASE 6. SQ.PRISM STANDING & SQ.PRISM PENETRATING (300 SKEW POSITION) Problem: A sq.prism 30 mm base sides.and 70mm axis is completely penetrated by another square prism of 25 mm side s.and 70 mm axis, horizontally. Both axes Intersect & bisect each other.Two faces of penetrating prism are 300 inclined to Hp. Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
  • 224. X Y h a b c d e g f 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 9 8 7 a’ b’h’ c’g’ d’f’ e’ 5 mm OFF-SET 1’ 2’ 5’ 4’ 3’ 6’ CASE 7. CONE STANDING & SQ.PRISM PENETRATING (BOTH AXES VERTICAL) Problem: A cone70 mm base diameter and 90 mm axis is completely penetrated by a square prism from top with it’s axis // to cone’s axis and 5 mm away from it. a vertical plane containing both axes is parallel to Vp. Take all faces of sq.prism equally inclined to Vp. Base Side of prism is 0 mm and axis is 100 mm long. Draw projections showing curves of intersections.
  • 225. CASE 8. CONE STANDING & CYLINDER PENETRATING h a b c d e g f a’ b’h’ c’g’ d’f’ e’ g” g”h” a”e” b”d” c” 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X Y o”o’ 11 33 5 5 6 7, 8,22 4 4 Problem: A vertical cone, base diameter 75 mm and axis 100 mm long, is completely penetrated by a cylinder of 45 mm diameter. The axis of the cylinder is parallel to Hp and Vp and intersects axis of the cone at a point 28 mm above the base. Draw projections showing curves of intersection.
  • 226. H 3-D DRAWINGS CAN BE DRAWN IN NUMEROUS WAYS AS SHOWN BELOW. ALL THESE DRAWINGS MAY BE CALLED 3-DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS, OR PHOTOGRAPHIC OR PICTORIAL DRAWINGS. HERE NO SPECIFIC RELATION AMONG H, L & D AXES IS MENTAINED. H NOW OBSERVE BELOW GIVEN DRAWINGS. ONE CAN NOTE SPECIFIC INCLINATION AMONG H, L & D AXES. ISO MEANS SAME, SIMILAR OR EQUAL. HERE ONE CAN FIND EDUAL INCLINATION AMONG H, L & D AXES. EACH IS 1200 INCLINED WITH OTHER TWO. HENCE IT IS CALLED ISOMETRIC DRAWING H L IT IS A TYPE OF PICTORIAL PROJECTION IN WHICH ALL THREE DIMENSIONS OF AN OBJECT ARE SHOWN IN ONE VIEW AND IF REQUIRED, THEIR ACTUAL SIZES CAN BE MEASURED DIRECTLY FROM IT. IN THIS 3-D DRAWING OF AN OBJECT, ALL THREE DIMENSIONAL AXES ARE MENTAINED AT EQUAL INCLINATIONS WITH EACH OTHER.( 1200 ) PURPOSE OF ISOMETRIC DRAWING IS TO UNDERSTAND OVERALL SHAPE, SIZE & APPEARANCE OF AN OBJECT PRIOR TO IT’S PRODUCTION. ISOMETRIC DRAWING TYPICAL CONDITION.
  • 227. ISOMETRIC AXES, LINES AND PLANES: The three lines AL, AD and AH, meeting at point A and making 1200 angles with each other are termed Isometric Axes. The lines parallel to these axes are called Isometric Lines. The planes representing the faces of of the cube as well as other planes parallel to these planes are called Isometric Planes. ISOMETRIC SCALE: When one holds the object in such a way that all three dimensions are visible then in the process all dimensions become proportionally inclined to observer’s eye sight and hence appear apparent in lengths. This reduction is 0.815 or 9 / 11 ( approx.) It forms a reducing scale which Is used to draw isometric drawings and is called Isometric scale. In practice, while drawing isometric projection, it is necessary to convert true lengths into isometric lengths for measuring and marking the sizes. This is conveniently done by constructing an isometric scale as described on next page. H A SOME IMPORTANT TERMS:
  • 228. ISOMETRIC VIEW ISOMETRIC PROJECTION H H TYPES OF ISOMETRIC DRAWINGS Drawn by using Isometric scale ( Reduced dimensions ) Drawn by using True scale ( True dimensions ) 450 300 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 TRUE LENG THS ISOM. LENGTHS Isometric scale [ Line AC ] required for Isometric Projection A B C D CONSTRUCTION OF ISOM.SCALE. From point A, with line AB draw 300 and 450 inclined lines AC & AD resp on AD. Mark divisions of true length and from each division-point draw vertical lines upto AC line. The divisions thus obtained on AC give lengths on isometric scale.
  • 229. SHAPE Isometric view if the Shape is F.V. or T.V. TRIANGLE A B RECTANGLE D C H L D A B C D A B D C L H L D L 1 2 3 A B 3 1 2 A B 3 1 2 A B H L D L 1 2 3 4 PENTAGON A B C D E 1 2 3 4 A B C D E 1 2 3 4 A B C D E ISOMETRIC OF PLANE FIGURES AS THESE ALL ARE 2-D FIGURES WE REQUIRE ONLY TWO ISOMETRIC AXES. IF THE FIGURE IS FRONT VIEW, H & L AXES ARE REQUIRED. IF THE FIGURE IS TOP VIEW, D & L AXES ARE REQUIRED. Shapes containing Inclined lines should be enclosed in a rectangle as shown. Then first draw isom. of that rectangle and then inscribe that shape as it is. 1
  • 230. 1 4 2 3 A B D C 1 4 2 3 A BD C Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF A CIRCLE IF IT IS A TV OR FV. FIRST ENCLOSE IT IN A SQUARE. IT’S ISOMETRIC IS A RHOMBUS WITH D & L AXES FOR TOP VIEW. THEN USE H & L AXES FOR ISOMETRIC WHEN IT IS FRONT VIEW. FOR CONSTRUCTION USE RHOMBUS METHOD SHOWN HERE. STUDY IT. 2
  • 231. 25 R 100 MM 50 MM Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF THE FIGURE SHOWN WITH DIMENTIONS (ON RIGHT SIDE) CONSIDERING IT FIRST AS F.V. AND THEN T.V. IF TOP VIEW IF FRONT VIEW 3
  • 232. CIRCLE HEXAGON SEMI CIRCLE ISOMETRIC OF PLANE FIGURES AS THESE ALL ARE 2-D FIGURES WE REQUIRE ONLY TWO ISOMETRIC AXES. IF THE FIGURE IS FRONT VIEW, H & L AXES ARE REQUIRED. IF THE FIGURE IS TOP VIEW, D & L AXES ARE REQUIRED. SHAPE IF F.V. IF T.V. For Isometric of Circle/Semicircle use Rhombus method. Construct Rhombus of sides equal to Diameter of circle always. ( Ref. topic ENGG. CURVES.) For Isometric of Circle/Semicircle use Rhombus method. Construct it of sides equal to diameter of circle always. ( Ref. Previous two pages.) 4
  • 233. D L 1 2 3 4 A B C D E D L 1 2 3 4 A B C D E ISOMETRIC VIEW OF PENTAGONAL PYRAMID STANDING ON H.P. (Height is added from center of pentagon) ISOMETRIC VIEW OF BASE OF PENTAGONAL PYRAMID STANDING ON H.P. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 5
  • 234. H L 1 2 3 4 A B C D E Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS ISOMETRIC VIEW OF PENTAGONALL PRISM LYING ON H.P. ISOMETRIC VIEW OF HEXAGONAL PRISM STANDING ON H.P. 6
  • 235. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS CYLINDER LYING ON H.P. CYLINDER STANDING ON H.P. 7
  • 236. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS HALF CYLINDER LYING ON H.P. ( with flat face // to H.P.) HALF CYLINDER STANDING ON H.P. ( ON IT’S SEMICIRCULAR BASE) 8
  • 237. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS ISOMETRIC VIEW OF A FRUSTOM OF SQUARE PYRAMID STANDING ON H.P. ON IT’S LARGER BASE. 40 20 60 X Y FV TV 9
  • 238. ISOMETRIC VIEW OF FRUSTOM OF PENTAGONAL PYRAMID 40 20 60 STUDY ILLUSTRATION 1 2 3 4 y A B C D E 40 20 60 x FV TV PROJECTIONS OF FRUSTOM OF PENTAGONAL PYRAMID ARE GIVEN. DRAW IT’S ISOMETRIC VIEW. SOLUTION STEPS: FIRST DRAW ISOMETRIC OF IT’S BASE. THEN DRAWSAME SHAPE AS TOP, 60 MM ABOVE THE BASE PENTAGON CENTER. THEN REDUCE THE TOP TO 20 MM SIDES AND JOIN WITH THE PROPER BASE CORNERS. 10
  • 239. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS ISOMETRIC VIEW OF A FRUSTOM OF CONE STANDING ON H.P. ON IT’S LARGER BASE. FV TV 40 20 60 X Y 11
  • 240. 50 Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS PROBLEM: A SQUARE PYRAMID OF 30 MM BASE SIDES AND 50 MM LONG AXIS, IS CENTRALLY PLACED ON THE TOP OF A CUBE OF 50 MM LONG EDGES.DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF THE PAIR. 50 30 12
  • 241. a b co p p a b c o Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS PROBLEM: A TRIANGULAR PYRAMID OF 30 MM BASE SIDES AND 50 MM LONG AXIS, IS CENTRALLY PLACED ON THE TOP OF A CUBE OF 50 MM LONG EDGES. DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF THE PAIR. SOLUTION HINTS. TO DRAW ISOMETRIC OF A CUBE IS SIMPLE. DRAW IT AS USUAL. BUT FOR PYRAMID AS IT’S BASE IS AN EQUILATERAL TRIANGLE, IT CAN NOT BE DRAWN DIRECTLY.SUPPORT OF IT’S TV IS REQUIRED. SO DRAW TRIANGLE AS A TV, SEPARATELY AND NAME VARIOUS POINTS AS SHOWN. AFTER THIS PLACE IT ON THE TOP OF CUBE AS SHOWN. THEN ADD HEIGHT FROM IT’S CENTER AND COMPLETE IT’S ISOMETRIC AS SHOWN. 13
  • 242. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 50 50 30 D 30 10 30 + FV TV PROBLEM: A SQUARE PLATE IS PIERCED THROUGH CENTRALLY BY A CYLINDER WHICH COMES OUT EQUALLY FROM BOTH FACES OF PLATE. IT’S FV & TV ARE SHOWN. DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW. 14
  • 243. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 30 10 30 60 D 40 SQUARE FV TV PROBLEM: A CIRCULAR PLATE IS PIERCED THROUGH CENTRALLY BY A SQUARE PYRAMID WHICH COMES OUT EQUALLY FROM BOTH FACES OF PLATE. IT’S FV & TV ARE SHOWN. DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW. 15
  • 244. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS X Y 30 D50 D 10 40 20 40 FV TV F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. 16
  • 245. P r R R r P C C = Center of Sphere. P = Point of contact R = True Radius of Sphere r = Isometric Radius. R r Iso-Direction P r R C r r ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS OF SPHERE & HEMISPHERE r R 450 300 TO DRAW ISOMETRIC PROJECTION OF A HEMISPHERE TO DRAW ISOMETRIC PROJECTION OF A SPHERE 1. FIRST DRAW ISOMETRIC OF SQUARE PLATE. 2. LOCATE IT’S CENTER. NAME IT P. 3. FROM PDRAW VERTICAL LINE UPWARD, LENGTH ‘ r mm’ AND LOCATE CENTER OF SPHERE “C” 4. ‘C’ AS CENTER, WITH RADIUS ‘R’ DRAW CIRCLE. THIS IS ISOMETRIC PROJECTION OF A SPHERE. Adopt same procedure. Draw lower semicircle only. Then around ‘C’ construct Rhombus of Sides equal to Isometric Diameter. For this use iso-scale. Then construct ellipse in this Rhombus as usual And Complete Isometric-Projection of Hemi-sphere. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS Isom. Scale 17
  • 246. P r R r r 50 D 30 D 50 D 50 r R 450 300 PROBLEM: A HEMI-SPHERE IS CENTRALLY PLACED ON THE TOP OF A FRUSTOM OF CONE. DRAW ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS OF THE ASSEMBLY. FIRST CONSTRUCT ISOMETRIC SCALE. USE THIS SCALE FOR ALL DIMENSIONS IN THIS PROBLEM. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 18
  • 247. a b c d 1 2 3 4 o 1’ 4’3’ 2’ 1 2 4 3 X Y Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS A SQUARE PYRAMID OF 40 MM BASE SIDES AND 60 MM AXIS IS CUT BY AN INCLINED SECTION PLANE THROUGH THE MID POINT OF AXIS AS SHOWN.DRAW ISOMETRIC VIEW OF SECTION OF PYRAMID. 19
  • 248. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS X Y 50 20 25 25 20 O O F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. 20
  • 249. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS x y FV TV 35 35 10 302010 40 70 O O F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. 21
  • 250. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS x y FV SV TV 30 30 10 30 10 30 ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL F.V. & T.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. 22
  • 251. x y FV SV TV Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 10 40 60 60 40 ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL F.V. & T.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. 24
  • 252. x y FV SV TV ALL VIEWS IDENTICAL 40 60 60 40 10 F.V. & T.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 25
  • 253. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW L.H.SIDE VIEW x y 20 20 20 50 20 20 20 20 30 O O F.V. & T.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 26
  • 254. 40 20 30 SQUARE 20 50 60 30 10 F.V. S.V. O O F.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 27
  • 255. 40 10 50 80 10 30 D 45 FV TV O O F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 28
  • 256. O FV TV X YO 40 10 25 25 30 R 10 100 103010 20 D F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 29
  • 257. O O 10 30 50 10 35 20 D 30 D 60 D FV TV X Y RECT. SLOT F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 30
  • 258. O 10 O 40 25 15 25 25 25 2580 10 F.V. S.V. F.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view.Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 31
  • 259. O 450 X TV FV Y 30 D 30 40 40 40 15 O F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 32
  • 260. O O 20 20 15 30 60 30 20 20 40 100 50 HEX PART F.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 33
  • 261. O O 10 10 30 10 30 4020 80 30 F.V. T.V. X Y F.V. & T.V. of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 34
  • 262. FV LSV X Y 10 O FV LSV X Y 10 10 15 25 25 1050O F.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 35 36 NOTE THE SMALL CHZNGE IN 2ND FV & SV. DRAW ISOMETRIC ACCORDINGLY.
  • 263. YX F.V. LEFT S.V. 30 20 2010 15 15 15 30 50 10 15 O O F.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 37
  • 264. 30 40 10 60 30 40 F.V. S.V. O O F.V. and S.V.of an object are given. Draw it’s isometric view. Z STUDY ILLUSTRATIONS 38
  • 265. PROJECTIONS OF STRAIGHT LINES 1. A line AB is in first quadrant. Its ends A and B are 25mm and 65mm in front of VP respectively. The distance between the end projectors is 75mm. The line is inclined at 300 to VP and its VT is 10mm above HP. Draw the projections of AB and determine its true length and HT and inclination with HP. 2. A line AB measures 100mm. The projections through its VT and end A are 50mm apart. The point A is 35mm above HP and 25mm in front VP. The VT is 15mm above HP. Draw the projections of line and determine its HT and Inclinations with HP and VP. 3. Draw the three views of line AB, 80mm long, when it is lying in profile plane and inclined at 350 to HP. Its end A is in HP and 20mm in front of VP, while other end B is in first quadrant. Determine also its traces. 4. A line AB 75 mm long, has its one end A in VP and other end B 15mm above HP and 50mm in front of VP. Draw the projections of line when sum of inclinations with HP and VP is 900 . Determine the true angles of inclination and show traces. 5. A line AB is 75mm long and lies in an auxiliary inclined plane (AIP) which makes an angle of 450 with the HP. The front view of the line measures 55mm. The end A is in VP and 20mm above HP. Draw the projections of the line AB and find its inclination with HP and VP. 6. Line AB lies in an AVP 500 inclined to Vp while line is 300 inclined to Hp. End A is 10 mm above Hp. & 15 mm in front of Vp.Distance between projectors is 50 mm.Draw projections and find TL and inclination of line with Vp. Locate traces also. EXERCISES:
  • 266. APPLICATIONS OF LINES Room , compound wall cases 7) A room measures 8m x 5m x4m high. An electric point hang in the center of ceiling and 1m below it. A thin straight wire connects the point to the switch in one of the corners of the room and 2m above the floor. Draw the projections of the and its length and slope angle with the floor. 8) A room is of size 6m5m3.5m high. Determine graphically the real distance between the top corner and its diagonally apposite bottom corners. consider appropriate scale 9) Two pegs A and B are fixed in each of the two adjacent side walls of the rectangular room 3m x 4m sides. Peg A is 1.5m above the floor, 1.2m from the longer side wall and is protruding 0.3m from the wall. Peg B is 2m above the floor, 1m from other side wall and protruding 0.2m from the wall. Find the distance between the ends of the two pegs. Also find the height of the roof if the shortest distance between peg A and and center of the ceiling is 5m. 10) Two fan motors hang from the ceiling of a hall 12m x 5m x 8m high at heights of 4m and 6m respectively. Determine graphically the distance between the motors. Also find the distance of each motor from the top corner joining end and front wall. 11) Two mangos on a two tree are 2m and 3m above the ground level and 1.5m and 2.5m from a 0.25m thick wall but on apposite sides of it. Distances being measured from the center line of the wall. The distance between the apples, measured along ground and parallel to the wall is 3m. Determine the real distance between the ranges.
  • 267. POLES,ROADS, PIPE LINES,, NORTH- EAST-SOUTH WEST, SLOPE AND GRADIENT CASES. 12)Three vertical poles AB, CD and EF are lying along the corners of equilateral triangle lying on the ground of 100mm sides. Their lengths are 5m, 8m and 12m respectively. Draw their projections and find real distance between their top ends. 13) A straight road going up hill from a point A due east to another point B is 4km long and has a slop of 250 . Another straight road from B due 300 east of north to a point C is also 4 kms long but going downward and has slope of 150 . Find the length and slope of the straight road connecting A and C. 14) An electric transmission line laid along an uphill from the hydroelectric power station due west to a substation is 2km long and has a slop of 300 . Another line from the substation, running W 450 N to village, is 4km long and laid on the ground level. Determine the length and slope of the proposed telephone line joining the the power station and village. 15) Two wire ropes are attached to the top corner of a 15m high building. The other end of one wire rope is attached to the top of the vertical pole 5m high and the rope makes an angle of depression of 450 . The rope makes 300 angle of depression and is attached to the top of a 2m high pole. The pole in the top view are 2m apart. Draw the projections of the wire ropes. 16) Two hill tops A and B are 90m and 60m above the ground level respectively. They are observed from the point C, 20m above the ground. From C angles and elevations for A and B are 450 and 300 respectively. From B angle of elevation of A is 450 . Determine the two distances between A, B and C.
  • 268. PROJECTIONS OF PLANES:- 1. A thin regular pentagon of 30mm sides has one side // to Hp and 300 inclined to Vp while its surface is 450 inclines to Hp. Draw its projections. 2. A circle of 50mm diameter has end A of diameter AB in Hp and AB diameter 300 inclined to Hp. Draw its projections if a) the TV of same diameter is 450 inclined to Vp, OR b) Diameter AB is in profile plane. 3. A thin triangle PQR has sides PQ = 60mm. QR = 80mm. and RP = 50mm. long respectively. Side PQ rest on ground and makes 300 with Vp. Point P is 30mm in front of Vp and R is 40mm above ground. Draw its projections. 4. An isosceles triangle having base 60mm long and altitude 80mm long appears as an equilateral triangle of 60mm sides with one side 300 inclined to XY in top view. Draw its projections. 5. A 300 -600 set-square of 40mm long shortest side in Hp appears is an isosceles triangle in its TV. Draw projections of it and find its inclination with Hp. 6. A rhombus of 60mm and 40mm long diagonals is so placed on Hp that in TV it appears as a square of 40mm long diagonals. Draw its FV. 7. Draw projections of a circle 40 mm diameter resting on Hp on a point A on the circumference with its surface 300 inclined to Hp and 450 to Vp. 8. A top view of plane figure whose surface is perpendicular to Vp and 600 inclined to Hp is regular hexagon of 30mm sides with one side 300 inclined to xy.Determine it’s true shape. 9. Draw a rectangular abcd of side 50mm and 30mm with longer 350 with XY, representing TV of a quadrilateral plane ABCD. The point A and B are 25 and 50mm above Hp respectively. Draw a suitable Fv and determine its true shape. 10.Draw a pentagon abcde having side 500 to XY, with the side ab =30mm, bc = 60mm, cd =50mm, de = 25mm and angles abc 1200 , cde 1250 . A figure is a TV of a plane whose ends A,B and E are 15, 25 and 35mm above Hp respectively. Complete the projections and determine the true shape of the plane figure.0
  • 269. PROJECTIONS OF SOLIDS 1. Draw the projections of a square prism of 25mm sides base and 50mm long axis. The prism is resting with one of its corners in VP and axis inclined at 300 to VP and parallel to HP. 2. A pentagonal pyramid, base 40mm side and height 75mm rests on one edge on its base on the ground so that the highest point in the base is 25mm. above ground. Draw the projections when the axis is parallel to Vp. Draw an another front view on an AVP inclined at 300 to edge on which it is resting so that the base is visible. 3. A square pyramid of side 30mm and axis 60 mm long has one of its slant edges inclined at 450 to HP and a plane containing that slant edge and axis is inclined at 300 to VP. Draw the projections. 4. A hexagonal prism, base 30mm sides and axis 75mm long, has an edge of the base parallel to the HP and inclined at 450 to the VP. Its axis makes an angle of 600 with the HP. Draw its projections. Draw another top view on an auxiliary plane inclined at 500 to the HP. 5. Draw the three views of a cone having base 50 mm diameter and axis 60mm long It is resting on a ground on a point of its base circle. The axis is inclined at 400 to ground and at 300 to VP. 6. Draw the projections of a square prism resting on an edge of base on HP. The axis makes an angle of 300 with VP and 450 with HP. Take edge of base 25mm and axis length as 125mm. 7. A right pentagonal prism is suspended from one of its corners of base. Draw the projections (three views) when the edge of base apposite to the point of suspension makes an angle of 300 to VP. Take base side 30mm and axis length 60mm.s 8. A cone base diameter 50mm and axis 70mm long, is freely suspended from a point on the rim of its base. Draw the front view and the top view when the plane containing its axis is perpendicular to HP and makes an angle of 450 with VP.
  • 270. 9. A cube of 40mm long edges is resting on the ground with its vertical faces equally inclined to the VP. A right circular cone base 25mm diameter and height 50mm is placed centrally on the top of the cube so that their axis are in a straight line. Draw the front and top views of the solids. Project another top view on an AIP making 450 with the HP 10.A square bar of 30mm base side and 100mm long is pushed through the center of a cylindrical block of 30mm thickness and 70mm diameter, so that the bar comes out equally through the block on either side. Draw the front view, top view and side view of the solid when the axis of the bar is inclined at 300 to HP and parallel to VP, the sides of a bar being 450 to VP. 11.A cube of 50mm long edges is resting on the ground with its vertical faces equally inclined to VP. A hexagonal pyramid , base 25mm side and axis 50mm long, is placed centrally on the top of the cube so that their axes are in a straight line and two edges of its base are parallel to VP. Draw the front view and the top view of the solids, project another top view on an AIP making an angle of 450 with the HP. 12.A circular block, 75mm diameter and 25mm thick is pierced centrally through its flat faces by a square prism of 35mm base sides and 125mm long axis, which comes out equally on both sides of the block. Draw the projections of the solids when the combined axis is parallel to HP and inclined at 300 to VP, and a face of the prism makes an angle of 300 with HP. Draw side view also. CASES OF COMPOSITE SOLIDS.
  • 271. 1) A square pyramid of 30mm base sides and 50mm long axis is resting on its base in HP. Edges of base is equally inclined to VP. It is cut by section plane perpendicular to VP and inclined at 450 to HP. The plane cuts the axis at 10mm above the base. Draw the projections of the solid and show its development. 2) A hexagonal pyramid, edge of base 30mm and axis 75mm, is resting on its edge on HP which is perpendicular toVP. The axis makes an angle of 300to HP. the solid is cut by a section plane perpendicular to both HP and VP, and passing through the mid point of the axis. Draw the projections showing the sectional view, true shape of section and development of surface of a cut pyramid containing apex. 3) A cone of base diameter 60mm and axis 80mm, long has one of its generators in VP and parallel to HP. It is cut by a section plane perpendicular HP and parallel to VP. Draw the sectional FV, true shape of section and develop the lateral surface of the cone containing the apex. 4) A cube of 50mm long slid diagonal rest on ground on one of its corners so that the solid diagonal is vertical and an edge through that corner is parallel to VP. A horizontal section plane passing through midpoint of vertical solid diagonal cuts the cube. Draw the front view of the sectional top view and development of surface. 5) A vertical cylinder cut by a section plane perpendicular to VP and inclined to HP in such a way that the true shape of a section is an ellipse with 50mm and 80mm as its minor and major axes. The smallest generator on the cylinder is 20mm long after it is cut by a section plane. Draw the projections and show the true shape of the section. Also find the inclination of the section plane with HP. Draw the development of the lower half of the cylinder. 6) A cube of 75mm long edges has its vertical faces equally inclined to VP. It is cut by a section plane perpendicular to VP such that the true shape of section is regular hexagon. Determine the inclination of cutting plane with HP.Draw the sectional top view and true shape of section. 7) The pyramidal portion of a half pyramidal and half conical solid has a base ofthree sides, each 30mm long. The length of axis is 80mm. The solid rest on its base with the side of the pyramid base perpendicular to VP. A plane parallel to VP cuts the solid at a distance of 10mm from the top view of the axis. Draw sectional front view and true shape of section. Also develop the lateral surface of the cut solid. SECTION & DEVELOPMENT
  • 272. 8) A hexagonal pyramid having edge to edge distance 40mm and height 60mm has its base in HP and an edge of base perpendicular to VP. It is cut by a section plane, perpendicular to VP and passing through a point on the axis 10mm from the base. Draw three views of solid when it is resting on its cut face in HP, resting the larger part of the pyramid. Also draw the lateral surface development of the pyramid. 9) A cone diameter of base 50mm and axis 60mm long is resting on its base on ground. It is cut by a section plane perpendicular to VP in such a way that the true shape of a section is a parabola having base 40mm. Draw three views showing section, true shape of section and development of remaining surface of cone removing its apex. 10) A hexagonal pyramid, base 50mm side and axis 100mm long is lying on ground on one of its triangular faces with axis parallel to VP. A vertical section plane, the HT of which makes an angle of 300 with the reference line passes through center of base, the apex being retained. Draw the top view, sectional front view and the development of surface of the cut pyramid containing apex. 11) Hexagonal pyramid of 40mm base side and height 80mm is resting on its base on ground. It is cut by a section plane parallel to HP and passing through a point on the axis 25mm from the apex. Draw the projections of the cut pyramid. A particle P, initially at the mid point of edge of base, starts moving over the surface and reaches the mid point of apposite edge of the top face. Draw the development of the cut pyramid and show the shortest path of particle P. Also show the path in front and top views 12) A cube of 65 mm long edges has its vertical face equally inclined to the VP. It is cut by a section plane, perpendicular to VP, so that the true shape of the section is a regular hexagon, Determine the inclination of the cutting plane with the HP and draw the sectional top view and true shape of the section.
  • 273. PROBLEM 14:-Two objects, a flower (A) and an orange (B) are within a rectangular compound wall, whose P & Q are walls meeting at 900 . Flower A is 1.5M & 1 M from walls P & Q respectively. Orange B is 3.5M & 5.5M from walls P & Q respectively. Drawing projection, find distance between them If flower is 1.5 M and orange is 3.5 M above the ground. Consider suitable scale.. a b a’ b’ b’1 x y 1.5M 3,5M 1M 1.5M 3.6M 5.5M Wall P Wall Q TL (answer) A B Wall Q Wall P F.V.
  • 274. a b a’ b’ 3.00 m 1.5m 2.6m 1.2m 1.5m b1’ Wall thickness 0.3m WALL X Y(GL) REAL DISTANCE BETWEEN MANGOS A & B IS = a’ b1’ PROBLEM 15 :- Two mangos on a tree A & B are 1.5 m and 3.00 m above ground and those are 1.2 m & 1.5 m from a 0.3 m thick wall but on opposite sides of it. If the distance measured between them along the ground and parallel to wall is 2.6 m, Then find real distance between them by drawing their projections. TV 0.3M THICKA B
  • 275. 100 25 45 65 a b c o a’b’ c’ o’ TL1 TL2 TL3 c1’b1’ a1’ PROBLEM 16 :- oa, ob & oc are three lines, 25mm, 45mm and 65mm long respectively.All equally inclined and the shortest is vertical.This fig. is TV of three rods OA, OB and OC whose ends A,B & C are on ground and end O is 100mm above ground. Draw their projections and find length of each along with their angles with ground. A O B C Fv Tv Answers: TL1 TL2 & TL3 x y
  • 276. PROBLEM 17:- A pipe line from point A has a downward gradient 1:5 and it runs due South - East. Another Point B is 12 M from A and due East of A and in same level of A. Pipe line from B runs 150 Due East of South and meets pipe line from A at point C. Draw projections and find length of pipe line from B and it’s inclination with ground. A B C Downward Gradient 1:5 1 5 12 M N E S 1 5 a b c x y 150 450 12m N EAST SOUTH W DUE SOUTH -EAST a’ b’ c’2c’ c’1 TL ( answer) TL ( answer) = a’ c’2 = Inclination of pipe line BC FV TV
  • 277. PROBLEM 18: A person observes two objects, A & B, on the ground, from a tower, 15 M high, At the angles of depression 300 & 450 . Object A is is due North-West direction of observer and object B is due West direction. Draw projections of situation and find distance of objects from observer and from tower also. N W S A B O 300 450 W S E N o a b o’ a’1 b’a’ 300 450 15M Answers: Distances of objects from observe o’a’1 & o’b’ From tower oa & ob
  • 278. 7.5M10 M FV TV B 4.5 M 300 450 15 M A C PROBLEM 19:-Guy ropes of two poles fixed at 4.5m and 7.5 m above ground, are attached to a corner of a building 15 M high, make 300 and 450 inclinations with ground respectively.The poles are 10 M apart. Determine by drawing their projections,Length of each rope and distance of poles from building. c’ a b c a’ b’ c1’ c’2 12M 15M 4.5M 7.5M 300 450 Answers: Length of Rope BC= b’c’2 Length of Rope AC= a’c’1 Distances of poles from building = ca & cb
  • 279. 1.2 M 0.7 M 4 M FV TV PROBLEM 20:- A tank of 4 M height is to be strengthened by four stay rods from each corner by fixing their other ends to the flooring, at a point 1.2 M and 0.7 M from two adjacent walls respectively, as shown. Determine graphically length and angle of each rod with flooring. A B 0.7 M 1.2 M a b a’ b’b’1 True Length Answers: Length of each rod = a’b’1 Angle with Hp. = X Y TV FV
  • 280. A B C D Hook TV PROBLEM 21:- A horizontal wooden platform 2 M long and 1.5 M wide is supported by four chains from it’s corners and chains are attached to a hook 5 M above the center of the platform. Draw projections of the objects and determine length of each chain along with it’s inclination with ground. H (GL) a b cd h a’d’ b’c’ h’ 5 M 2 M 1.5 M x y TL d’1 Answers: Length of each chain = a’d’1 Angle with Hp. =
  • 281. PROBLEM 22. A room is of size 6.5m L ,5m D,3.5m high. An electric bulb hangs 1m below the center of ceiling. A switch is placed in one of the corners of the room, 1.5m above the flooring. Draw the projections an determine real distance between the bulb and switch. Switch Bulb Front wall Ceiling Side wall Observer TV L D H B- Bulb A-Switch Answer :- a’ b’1 a b x y a’ b’ b’1 6.5m 3.5m 5m 1m 1.5
  • 282. PROBLEM 23:- A PICTURE FRAME 2 M WIDE AND 1 M TALL IS RESTING ON HORIZONTAL WALL RAILING MAKES 350 INCLINATION WITH WALL. IT IS ATTAACHED TO A HOOK IN THE WALL BY TWO STRINGS. THE HOOK IS 1.5 M ABOVE WALL RAILING. DETERMINE LENGTH OF EACH CHAIN AND TRUE ANGLE BETWEEN THEM 350 1.5 M 1 M 2 M Wall railing FV TV A B C D ad h bc a1 b1 a’b’ c’d’ (wall railing) (frame) (chains) Answers: Length of each chain= hb1 True angle between chains = (chains) X Y h’ 1.5M 1M